NatWest Group
NWG
#330
Rank
$72.57 B
Marketcap
$18.11
Share price
2.61%
Change (1 day)
71.33%
Change (1 year)

NatWest Group - 20-F annual report


Text size:
FORM 20-F

(Mark one)oREGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
   
ORxANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
   
For the fiscal year ended                                   31 December 2003                                   
   
ORoTRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d)
OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934
For the transition period from __________ to __________
   
   
Commission file number                                              1-10306                                            


The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Scotland
42 St Andrew Square, Edinburgh EH2 2YE United Kingdom


Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act.  
   
Title of each class  Name of each exchange on which registered
   

American Depositary Shares Series D, E, F, G, H, I, J and K, each representing one Non-Cumulative Dollar Preference Share, Series D, E, F, G, H, I, J and K, respectively

 New York Stock Exchange
Exchangeable Capital Securities, Series A and B New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Dollar Preference Shares* New York Stock Exchange
Dollar Perpetual Regulatory tier one securities, Series 1  New York Stock Exchange
   
    * Issuable upon exchange of the Exchangeable Capital Securities   

   
Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act.  
 
None


Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act.
None




Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

Ordinary shares of 25 pence each2,963,335,412  Non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series D to K82,000,000
Non-voting Deferred Shares2,660,556,304  Non-cumulative convertible dollar preference shares, Series 1 to 31,900,000
11% cumulative preference shares 500,000 Non-cumulative convertible euro preference shares, Series 1750,000
5½% cumulative preference shares400,000  Non-cumulative convertible sterling preference shares, Series 1200,000
 


Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.
 xYESoNO
     
Indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.oItem 17xItem 18



SEC Form 20-F cross reference guide 
    
ItemItem CaptionPages
    
PART I   
1Identity of Directors, Senior Management and AdvisersNot applicable
    
2Offer Statistics and Expected TimetableNot applicable
    
3Key Information 
  Selected financial data150 - 153, 161
  Capitalisation and indebtednessNot applicable
  Reasons for the offer and use of proceedsNot applicable
  Risk factors6
    
4Information on the Company 
  History and development of the Company4 - 6, 64, 178
  Business overview4 - 6, 164 - 168
  Organisational structure4, 178
  Property, plant and equipment168
    
5Operating and Financial Review and Prospects 
  Operating results11 - 41
  Liquidity and capital resources40 - 41, 50 - 53, 162 - 163
  Research and development, patents, licences etcNot applicable
  Trend information7, 161
  Off balance sheet arrangements162-163
  Contractual obligations163
    
6Directors, Senior Management and Employees 
  Directors and senior management62 - 63
  Compensation72 - 81
  Board practices68 - 71
  Employees37, 66 - 67
  Share ownership66, 79, 82
    
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions 
  Major shareholders65, 168
  Related party transactions166
  Interests of experts and counselNot applicable
    
8 Financial Information 
  Consolidated statements and other financial information86 - 148
  Significant changes148

i


ItemItem CaptionPages
    
9The Offer and Listing 
  Offer and listing details171 - 172
  Plan of distributionNot applicable
  Markets171 - 172
  Selling shareholdersNot applicable
  DilutionNot applicable
  Expenses of the issueNot applicable
   
10Additional Information 
  Share capitalNot applicable
  Memorandum and articles of association173
  Material contracts168
  Exchange controls177
  Taxation173 - 177
  Dividends and paying agentsNot applicable
  Statement of expertsNot applicable
  Documents on display178
  Subsidiary informationNot applicable
   
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk42 - 59,
   122 - 126,
   154 - 160
12Description of Securities other than Equity SecuritiesNot applicable
    
PART II   
13Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable
   
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of ProceedsNot applicable
   
15Controls and Procedures.68 - 71
   
16[Reserved] 
    
16AAAudit Committee financial expert69
 BCode of ethics67
 CPrincipal Accountant Fees and services99
 DExemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit CommitteeNot applicable
    
PART III   
17Financial StatementsNot applicable
    
18Financial Statements86 - 148
   
19Exhibit Index181
 Signature182

ii


Operating and financial review

Contents  
   
Presentation of information2 
   
Forward-looking statements3 
   
Description of business4 
   
Risk factors6 
   
Critical accounting policies7 
   
Accounting developments9 
   
Financial highlights11 
   
Summary consolidated profit  
and loss account12 
   
Analysis of results17 
   
Divisional performance25 
   
Consolidated balance sheet38 
   
Cash flow40 
   
UK GAAP compared with US GAAP41 
   
Capital resources41 
   
Risk management42 

1




Presentation of information

In the Report and Accounts, and unless specified otherwise, the term ‘company’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc, ‘RBS’ or the ‘Group’ means the company and its subsidiary undertakings, ‘the Royal Bank’ means The Royal Bank of Scotland plc and ‘NatWest’ means National Westminster Bank Plc.

The company publishes its financial statements in pounds sterling (“£” or “sterling”). The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of pounds sterling, respectively, and references to ‘pence’ represent pence in the United Kingdom (“UK”). Reference to ‘dollars’ or ‘$’ are to United States of America (“US”) dollars. The abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of dollars, respectively, and references to ‘cents’ represent cents in the US. The abbreviation ‘’ represents the ‘euro’, the European single currency and the abbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of euros, respectively.

Certain information in this report is presented separately for domestic and foreign activities. Domestic activities primarily consist of UK domestic transactions of the Group. Foreign activities comprise the Group’s transactions conducted through those offices in the UK specifically organised to service international banking transactions and transactions conducted through offices outside the UK.

The geographic analysis in the average balance sheet and interest rates, changes in net interest income and average interest rates, yields, spreads and margins in this report have been compiled on the basis of location of office – UK and Overseas. Management believe that presentation on this basis provides more useful information on the yields, spreads and margins of the Group’s activities than would be provided by presentation on the basis of the domestic and foreign activities analysis used elsewhere in this report as it more closely reflects the basis on which the Group is managed. ‘UK’ in this context includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

The Group distinguishes its trading from non-trading activities by determining whether a business unit’s principal activity is trading or non-trading and then attributing all of that unit’s activities to one portfolio or the other. Although this method may result in some non-trading activity being classified as trading, and vice versa, the Group believes that any resulting misclassification is not material.

In this report, the terms ‘UK GAAP’ and ‘US GAAP’ refer to generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) in the UK and the US respectively.

2




Forward-looking statements

Certain sections in this document contain ‘forward-looking statements’ as that term is defined in the United States Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995, such as statements that include the words ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘project’, ‘anticipate’, ‘should’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘probability’, ‘risk’, ‘Value-at-Risk (“VaR”)’, ‘target’, ‘goal’, ‘objective’, ‘will’, ‘endeavour’, ‘outlook’, ‘optimistic’, ‘prospects’ and similar expressions or variations on such expressions.

In particular, this document includes forward-looking statements relating, but not limited, to the Group’s potential exposures to various types of market risks, such as interest rate risk, foreign exchange rate risk and commodity and equity price risk. Such statements are subject to risks and uncertainties. For example, certain of the market risk disclosures are dependent on choices about key model characteristics and assumptions and are subject to various limitations. By their nature, certain of the market risk disclosures are only estimates and, as a result, actual future gains and losses could differ materially from those that have been estimated.

Other factors that could cause actual results to differ materially from those estimated by the forward-looking statements contained in this document include, but are not limited to: general economic conditions in the UK and in other countries in which the Group has significant business activities or investments, including the United States; the monetary and interest rate policies of the Bank of England, the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and other G-7 central banks; inflation; deflation; unanticipated turbulence in interest rates, foreign currency exchange rates, commodity prices and equity prices; changes in UK and foreign laws, regulations and taxes; changes in competition and pricing environments; natural and other disasters; the inability to hedge certain risks economically; the adequacy of loss reserves; acquisitions or restructurings; technological changes; changes in consumer spending and saving habits; and the success of the Group in managing the risks involved in the foregoing.

The forward-looking statements contained in this document speak only as of the date of this report, and the Group does not undertake to update any forward-looking statement to reflect events or circumstances after the date hereof or to reflect the occurrence of unanticipated events.

For a further discussion of certain risks faced by the Group, see Risk factors on page 6.

3




Operating and financial review

Description of business

Introduction

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc is the holding company of one of the world’s largest banking and financial services groups, with a market capitalisation of £49 billion at the end of 2003. Headquartered in Edinburgh, the Group operates in the UK and internationally through its two principal subsidiaries, The Royal Bank of Scotland plc (“the Royal Bank”), and National Westminster Bank Plc (“NatWest”). Both the Royal Bank and NatWest are major UK clearing banks whose origins go back over 275 years. The Group has a large and diversified customer base and provides a wide range of products and services to personal, commercial and large corporate and institutional customers.

The Group had total assets of £455 billion and ordinary shareholders’ equity of £25.2 billion at 31 December 2003. It is strongly capitalised with a total capital ratio of 11.8% and tier 1 capital ratio of 7.4% as at 31 December 2003.

Organisational structure and business overview

The Group’s activities are organised in the following business divisions: Corporate Banking and Financial Markets, Retail Banking, Retail Direct, Manufacturing, Wealth Management, RBS Insurance, Ulster Bank and Citizens. A description of each of the divisions is given below.

Corporate Banking and Financial Markets (“CBFM”) is the largest provider of banking services to medium and large businesses in the UK and the leader in the UK in asset finance. It provides an integrated range of products and services to mid-sized and large corporate and institutional customers in the UK and overseas. These services include corporate and commercial banking, treasury and capital markets products, structured and leveraged finance, trade finance, leasing and factoring.

Financial Markets provides corporate and institutional customers with treasury services, including global interest rate derivatives trading, bond origination and trading, sovereign debt trading, futures brokerage, foreign exchange, money market, currency derivative and rate risk management services. RBS Greenwich Capital, with headquarters in Connecticut, US, delivers debt market solutions tailored to meet the needs of companies and institutions around the world.

During 2003, CBFM acquired Nordisk Renting AB, a Swedish leasing company.

Retail Bankingcomprises both the Royal Bank and NatWest retail brands. It offers a full range of banking products and related financial services to the personal, premium and small business markets.

To meet its customers’ needs in the personal banking market, Retail Banking offers a variety of products: money transmission, savings, loans, mortgages and insurance. In the small business market, Retail Banking provides a full range of services which include money transmission and cash management, short, medium and long-term financial and deposit products and insurance. Customer choice and flexibility is at the heart of theRetail Banking proposition and a number of options are available to customers for carrying out their day to day banking transactions through branches, ATMs, the internet, and the telephone.

Retail Direct issues a comprehensive range of credit, charge and debit cards to personal and corporate customers and engages in merchant acquisition and processing facilities for retail businesses. It also includes Tesco Personal Finance (“TPF”), The One account (formerly Virgin One), Direct Line Financial Services (“DLFS”), Lombard Direct, WorldPay Limited, the Group’s internet banking platform, the Primeline brand and in Europe, the Comfort Card businesses, all of which offer products to customers through direct channels.

During 2003, Retail Direct acquired the credit card and personal loans portfolios of Santander Direkt Bank in Germany.

Manufacturing supports the customer facing businesses, mainly CBFM, Retail Banking, Retail Direct and Wealth Management, and provides operational technology, customer support in telephony, account management and money transmission, global purchasing, property and other services.

Manufacturing drives optimum efficiencies in high volume processing activities, leverages the Group’s purchasing power and has become a centre of excellence for managing large scale and complex change programmes such as integration.

Wealth Management comprises various private banking subsidiaries and offshore banking businesses. The Coutts Group brings together businesses that focus on private banking through the Coutts, the Royal Bank and the NatWest private banking brands. Adam & Company is a private bank operating primarily in Scotland. The offshore banking businesses – The Royal Bank of Scotland International and NatWest Offshore – deliver retail banking services to local expatriate customers, and corporate banking and treasury services to corporate, intermediary and institutional clients, principally in the Channel Islands, the Isle of Man and Gibraltar.

During 2003, the Miami-based Latin American operations of Coutts were sold and the acquisition of Bank von Ernst & Cie AG, a private bank based in Switzerland, was completed.

RBS Insurance was established following the acquisition of Churchill Insurance Group on 1 September 2003. RBS Insurance comprises all companies from the Direct Line and Churchill Groups. Direct Line and Churchill sell and underwrite retail and wholesale insurance on the telephone and the internet in the UK and overseas. UKI Partnerships is a leading wholesale provider of insurance and motoring related services. The National Insurance and Guarantee Corporation sells personal and commercial insurance products through a network of independent financial advisers, while Intergroup acts as a travel insurance intermediary and Devitt Insurance Services operates as a specialist travel broker administrator.

The combined strength of Direct Line and Churchill makes RBS Insurance the second largest general insurer in the UK, by gross earned premiums.

4



Ulster Bank provides a comprehensive range of retail and wholesale financial services in Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland. Retail Banking has a network of branches throughout Ireland and operates in the personal, commercial and wealth management sectors. Corporate Banking and Financial Markets provides a wide range of services in the corporate and institutional markets.

On 6 October 2003, the Group announced that it had agreed the terms of a recommended acquisition for cash of First Active plc. The acquisition was completed in January 2004.

First Active and Ulster Bank have retained their own distinctive brands, branch networks and customer propositions. The acquisition enables the Group to sell First Active’s competitive range of mortgage and savings products to Ulster Bank customers, and Ulster Bank’s wide range of banking products, to First Active customers.

Citizens is engaged in retail and corporate banking activities through its branch network in the states of Rhode Island, Connecticut, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Pennsylvania, Delaware and New Jersey. Citizens is the second largest commercial banking organisation in New England and the 13th largest commercial banking organisation in the US measured by deposits. Citizens provides a full range of retail and corporate banking services, including personal banking, residential mortgages and home equity loans. In addition, Citizens engages in a wide variety of commercial loans (including real estate), consumer lending, credit card services, trust services and retail investment services. Citizens also operates subsidiaries primarily engaged in equipment lease financing.

During 2003, Citizens completed the acquisitions ofCommonwealth Bancorp, Inc., Port Financial Corp. (the holding company of CambridgePort Bank) and Community Bancorp, Inc. (the holding company of Community National Bank). It also announced the acquisition of Thistle Group Holdings, Co., the holding company of Roxborough Manayunk Bank, which was completed in January 2004.

Santander Central Hispano, S.A.

In October 1988, the Group and Banco Santander entered into an agreement whereby the Group and Banco Santander and its subsidiaries agreed to co-operate in certain banking and financial services activities in Europe, including representation in each other’s bank branches to service their respective customers, offshore and investment banking, technology development, operational co-operation and the development of representation in Europe and the Far East. In April 1999, Banco Santander merged with Banco Central Hispanoamericano, another Spanish banking group and the merged entity is now called Santander Central Hispano, S.A. (“SCH”).

The Group holds 2.83% of SCH’s capital stock and SCH holds 5.15% of the company’s ordinary shares.

Competition

The Group faces intense competition in the markets it serves. In the UK, the Group’s principal competitors are the other UK retail and commercial banks, building societies (which are similar to savings and loans associations in the US) and the other major international banks represented in London.

Competition for corporate and institutional customers in the UK remains strong. In addition to the UK banks, large foreign financial institutions are also active and offer combined investment and commercial banking capabilities. In asset finance, Lombard competes with banks and specialised asset finance providers, both captive and non-captive.

In the small business banking market, where competition remains strong, the Group competes with other UK clearing banks, with specialist finance providers and building societies.

In the personal banking segment, competition remains intense. In addition to UK banks and building societies, major retailers, life assurance companies and internet-only players are active participants. The mortgage market has remained highly competitive, with re-mortgaging activity by customers at a high level. NatWest Life and Royal Scottish Assurance compete with Independent Financial Advisors and life assurance companies. The competitive situation in the long term savings market is dynamic due to regulatory change and the impact of volatile securities markets on consumer confidence.

The UK credit card market is highly competitive. Large retailers and specialist card issuers, including major US operators, are active in the market in addition to the UK banks and building societies. There has been some consolidation in the market as larger players have acquired smaller portfolios, but non-bank new entrants are continuing to grow in importance in the marketplace. Competition is across a range of dimensions, including aggressive pricing, loyalty and reward schemes, and packaged benefits. In addition to physical distribution channels, providers compete through direct marketing activity and, increasingly, the internet.

In Wealth Management, The Royal Bank of ScotlandInternational and NatWest Offshore compete with other UK and international banks to offer offshore banking services. Coutts Group and Adam & Co. compete as private banks with UK clearing and private banks, and with international private banks. Difficult market conditions have seen some retrenchment of competitive activity, particularly in the mass-affluent segment.

RBS Insurance competes in personal lines insurance. The market is highly competitive. There is competition from a range of insurance companies which now operate telephone and internet direct sales businesses. RBS Insurance also competes in the direct motor insurance markets in Spain, Italy and Germany with the local insurance companies.

In Northern Ireland and the Republic of Ireland, Ulster Bank competes in retail and commercial banking with the major Irish banks and building societies, and with other UK and

5




Operating and financial review continued

international banks and building societies active in the market. Competition is intensifying as both UK and Irish institutions seek to expand their businesses.

In the United States, Citizens competes in the New England and Mid-Atlantic retail and mid-corporate banking markets with local and regional banks and other financial institutions. The Group also competes in the US in large corporate lending and specialised finance markets, and in fixed-income trading and sales. Competition is principally with the large US commercial and investment banks and international banks active in the US.

In other international markets, principally in continental Europe, the Group faces competition from the leading domestic and international institutions active in the relevant national markets.

Risk factors

Set out below are certain risk factors which could affect the Group’s future results and cause them to be materially different from expected results. The Group’s results could also be affected by competition and other factors. The factors discussed in this report should not be regarded as a complete and comprehensive statement of all potential risks and uncertainties.

The financial performance of the Group is affected by borrower credit quality and general economic conditions, in particular in the UK and the US

Risks arising from changes in credit quality and the recoverability of loans and amounts due from counterparties are inherent in a wide range of the Group’s businesses. Adverse changes in the credit quality of the Group’s borrowers and counterparties or a general deterioration in UK, US or global economic conditions, or arising from systemic risks in the financial systems, could affect the recoverability and value of the Group’s assets and require an increase in the provision for bad and doubtful debts and other provisions.

Changes in interest rates, foreign exchange rates, equity prices and other market factors affect the Group’s business

The most significant market risks the Group faces are interest rate, foreign exchange and bond and equity price risks. Changes in interest rate levels, yield curves and spreads may affect the interest rate margin realised between lending and borrowing costs. Changes in currency rates, particularly in the sterling-dollar and sterling-euro exchange rates, affect the value of assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies and affect earnings reported by the Group’s non-UK subsidiaries, mainly Citizens, RBS Greenwich Capital and Ulster Bank, and may affect income from foreign exchange dealing. The performance of financial markets may cause changes in the value of the Group’s investment and trading portfolios. The Group has implemented risk management methods to mitigate and control these and other market risks towhich the Group is exposed. However, it is difficult to predict with accuracy changes in economic or market conditions and to anticipate the effects that such changes could have on the Group’s financial performance and business operations.

The Group’s insurance businesses are subject to inherent risks involving claims provisions

Future claims in the Group’s general and life assurance business may be higher than expected as a result of changing trends in claims experience resulting from catastrophic weather conditions, demographic developments, changes in mortality and other causes outside the Group’s control. Such changes would affect the profitability of current and future insurance products and services. The Group re-insures some of the risks it has assumed.

Operational risks are inherent in the Group’s business

The Group’s businesses are dependent on the ability to process a very large number of transactions efficiently and accurately. Operational risk and losses can result from fraud, errors by employees, failure to document transactions properly or to obtain proper internal authorisation, failure to comply with regulatory requirements and Conduct of Business rules, equipment failures, natural disasters or the failure of external systems, for example, the Group’s suppliers or counterparties. Although the Group has implemented risk controls and loss mitigation actions, and substantial resources are devoted to developing efficient procedures and to staff training, it is only possible to be reasonably, but not absolutely, certain that such procedures will be effective in controlling each of the operational risks faced by the Group.

Each of the Group’s businesses is subject to substantial regulation and regulatory oversight. Any significant regulatory developments could have an effect on how the Group conducts its business and on the Group’s results of operations

The Group is subject to financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in each location in which the Group operates. This supervision and regulation, in particular in the UK, if changed could materially affect the Group’s business, the products and services offered or the value of assets.

The Group’s future growth in earnings and shareholder value depends on strategic decisions regarding organic growth and potential acquisitions

The Group devotes substantial management and planning resources to the development of strategic plans for organic growth and identification of possible acquisitions, supported by substantial expenditure to generate growth in customer business. If these strategic plans do not meet with success, the Group’s earnings could grow more slowly or decline.

6



Trend information

The Competition Commission recommended a number of pricing and behavioural remedies following its inquiry into the UK market for small business banking. The Group has implemented the pricing remedies with effect from 1 January 2003 and offered the Group’s SME customers interest on current accounts. The Group has also given undertakings to implement the behavioural remedies. These behavioural remedies include measures to ease the process of switching of accounts between banks and to enable terms and conditions to be compared between banks and were implemented on 31 December 2003, as required by the OFT.

During 2003 there were signs of improving economic conditions in the United States and Continental Europe, while the United Kingdom economy maintained its positive trend. In the United States, monetary and fiscal policies remain expansive. Overall, while the economic outlook seems brighter, a level of uncertainty and fragility remains.

Litigation

In December 2003, members of the Group were joined as defendants in a number of legal actions in the United States following the collapse of Enron. Collectively, the claims are, to a substantial degree, unquantified and in each case they are made against large numbers of defendants. The Group intends to defend these claims vigorously. The US Courts dealing with the main Enron actions have ordered that the Group join the non-binding, multi-party mediation which commenced in late 2003. Based on current knowledge including applicable defences and given the unquantified nature of these claims, the directors are unable at this stage to predict with certainty the eventual loss, if any, in these matters. In addition, pursuant to requests received from the Securities and Exchange Commission and the Department of Justice, the Group has been providing copies of Enron-related materials to these authorities and continues to co-operate fully with them.

Members of the Group are engaged in other litigation in the United Kingdom and a number of overseas jurisdictions, including the United States, involving claims by and against them arising in the ordinary course of business. The directors of the company have reviewed these other actual, threatened and known potential claims and proceedings and, after consulting with the Group’s legal advisers are satisfied that the outcome of these claims and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on the Group’s consolidated net assets, results of operations or cash flows.

Critical accounting policies

The reported results of the Group are sensitive to the accounting policies, assumptions and estimates that underlie the preparation of its financial statements. The Group’s principal accounting policies are set out on pages 87 to 90. UK company law and accounting standards require the directors, in preparing the Group’s financial statements, to select suitable accounting policies, apply them consistently and make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent. Where UK GAAP allows a choice of policy, Financial Reporting Standard (“FRS”) 18 ‘Accounting Policies’ requires an entity to adopt those policies judged to be most appropriate to its particular circumstances for the purpose of giving a true and fair view.

The judgements and assumptions involved in the Group’s accounting policies that are most important to the portrayal of its financial condition are discussed below. The use of estimates, assumptions or models that differ from those adopted by the Group would affect its reported results.

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

The Group provides for losses existing in its lending book so as to state its impaired loan portfolio at its expected ultimate net realisable value. Specific provisions are established against individual exposures and the general provision covers advances impaired at the balance sheet date but which have not been identified as such. Bad and doubtful debt provisions made during the year less amounts released and recoveries of amounts written-off in previous years are charged to the profit and loss account. Loans and advances are reported on the balance sheet net of specific and general provisions.

For certain homogeneous portfolios, including credit card receivables and other personal advances including mortgages, specific provisions are established on a portfolio basis, taking into account the level of arrears, security, past loss experience, credit scores and defaults based on portfolio trends. The most significant factors in establishing these provisions are the expected loss rates and the related average life. These factors are kept under constant review by the Group.

For loans and advances that are individually assessed, the specific provision is determined from a review of the financial condition of the borrower and any guarantor and takes into account the customer’s debt capacity and financial flexibility; the level and quality of earnings; the amount and sources of cash flows; the industry in which the customer operates; and the realisable value of any security held. The most significant estimates that affect the quantum of a specific provision are the amounts and timing of receipts from the borrower and the amount that will be recovered from any security held.

Evaluating these estimates involves significant judgement as receipts will depend on the future performance of the borrower and the value of security, both of which will be affected by future economic conditions. Additionally, the security may not be readily marketable.

The general provision covers bad and doubtful debts that have not been separately identified at the balance sheet date but are known to be present in any portfolio of advances. The level of general provision is assessed in the light of past experience and reflects the size and diversity of the Group’s loan portfolio, the current state of the economies in which the Group operates, other factors affecting the business environment, recent trends in companies going into administration, receivership and bankruptcy and the Group’s monitoring and control procedures, including the scope of specific provisioning procedures.

The future credit quality of the Group’s lending book is subject to uncertainties that could cause actual credit losses to differ materially from reported loan loss provisions. These uncertainties include the economic environment, notably interest rates and their effect on customer spending, the unemployment level, payment behaviour and bankruptcy trends and changes in the Group’s portfolios.

Loans and advances – recognition of interest income

Where the collectibility of interest is in doubt it is excluded from the profit and loss account but is credited to an interest in suspense account. As interest charged to overdraft accounts loses its identity, the determination of the collectibility is generally achieved through individual file reviews. However, for some products, such as personal loans and credit cards, suspension of interest is automated based on the number of payments in arrears. Such automated suspension of interest may be accelerated in the event of death, bankruptcy, legal proceedings or financial hardship. Notwithstanding any arrears, where it is established that the customer is able to cover interest, it is credited to the profit and loss account. Loans classified as impaired and any related suspended interest are written-down to their estimated net realisable value when it is determined that there is no realistic prospect of recovery of all or part of the loan.

7




Operating and financial review continued

Fair value

Securities and derivatives held for trading purposes are recognised in the financial statements at fair value. In the balance sheet, trading securities are included within Treasury and other eligible bills, Debt securities and Equity shares as appropriate. Positive fair values (assets) of trading derivatives are included in Other assets and negative fair values (liabilities) in Other liabilities. Positive and negative fair values of trading derivatives are offset where the contracts have been entered into under master netting agreements or other agreements that give a legally enforceable right of set-off. Gains or losses arising from changes in fair value are included in Dealing profits in the profit and loss account.

Fair value is the value at which a position could be closed out or sold in a transaction to a willing and knowledgeable counterparty over a reasonable period of time under current market conditions. Fair values are determined by reference to observable market prices where available and reliable. Where representative market prices for an instrument are not available or are unreliable because of poor liquidity, the fair value is derived from prices for its components using appropriate pricing or valuation models that are based on independently sourced market parameters, including interest rate yield curves, option volatilities and currency rates.

Securities carried at fair value include government, asset-backed and corporate debt obligations and corporate equity shares. Fair value for a substantial proportion of these instruments is based on observable market prices or derived from observable market parameters. Determining fair value for such instruments does not involve significant judgement. Where observable prices are not available or if a position could be liquidated only at an unfavourable price or over an extended period, fair value is based on appropriate valuation techniques or management estimates.

The Group’s derivative products include swaps, forwards, futures and options. Exchange traded instruments are valued using quoted prices. The fair value of over-the-counter instruments is derived from pricing models which take account of contract terms, including maturity, as well as quoted market parameters such as interest rates and volatilities. Most of the Group’s pricing models do not entail material subjectivity because the methodologies utilised do not incorporate significant judgement and the parameters included in the models can be calibrated to actively quoted market prices. Values established from pricing models are adjusted for credit risk, liquidity risk and future operational costs.

The table below analyses the Group’s assets and liabilities carried at fair value according to the basis on which fair value is determined.

 Assets carried at fair value   Liabilities carried at fair value   
 
  
 
  
 
Fair value at 31
December 2003
is based on:
Securities
purchased
%
 Derivatives
%
 Securities
sold
%
 Derivatives
%
 

 
Quoted market prices 99 1 99 1 
Internal models1 99 1 99 

 
 100 100 100 100 
 
 

General insurance claims

The Group makes provision for the full cost of settling outstanding claims arising from its general insurance business at the balance sheet date, including claims estimated to have been incurred but not yet reported at that date and claims handling expenses. Claims are recognised in the accounting period in which the loss occurs.

Provisions are determined by management based on experience of claims settled and on statistical models which require certain assumptions to be made regarding the incidence, timing and amount of claims and any specific factors such as adverse weather conditions. In order to calculate the total provision required, the historical development of claims is analysed using statistical methodology to extrapolate, within acceptable probability parameters, the value of outstanding claims at the balance sheet date. Also included in the estimation of outstanding claims are other assumptions such as the inflationary factor used for bodily injury claims which is based on historical trends and, therefore, allows for some increase due to changes in common law and statute. Costs for both direct and indirect claims handling expenses are also included. Outward reinsurance recoveries are accounted for in the same accounting period as the direct claims to which they relate.

The outstanding claims provision is based on information available to management and the eventual outcome may vary from the original assessment. Actual claims experience may differ from the historical pattern on which the estimate is based and the cost of settling individual claims may exceed that assumed.

Goodwill

The Group capitalises goodwill arising on the acquisition of businesses, as disclosed in the Accounting policies. Under UK GAAP goodwill is amortised and there is a rebuttable presumption that the useful economic life of purchased goodwill does not exceed 20 years from the date of acquisition. The useful economic life of acquired goodwill is assessed on the basis of the type and diversity of the business, its location and the markets in which it operates. Under US GAAP goodwill is not amortised but is subject to annual review for impairment.

An impairment test is designed to assess the recoverable amount of an asset or, in the case of goodwill, an operating segment, by comparing its carrying value with the discounted value of future cash flows that it will generate. Impairment testing inherently involves a number of judgmental areas: the preparation of cash flow forecasts for periods that are beyond the normal requirements of management reporting, the valuation of the separable assets of each business whose goodwill is being reviewed and an assessment of the discount rate appropriate to the business. Under UK GAAP, impairment tests are only undertaken in the year following an acquisition or when there is evidence that impairment might have occurred. US GAAP requires annual impairment tests that are different from any UK tests and accordingly they may support a different carrying value for the asset being tested.

8




Accounting developments

UK GAAP

The Accounting Standards Board published FRS 5 Application Note G Revenue recognition that is applicable to the Group for the year ended 31 December 2003. No changes to the Group’s revenue recognition policies were required.

UITF Abstract 37 ‘Purchases and sales of own shares’ had no impact on the Group because no own shares are deemed to be under the control of Group companies.

UITF Abstract 38 ‘Accounting for ESOP trusts’ and the consequential amendment to UITF Abstract 17 ‘Employee shares schemes’ which are mandatory for accounting periods ending on or after 23 June 2004 are not expected to have a material effect on the Group.

International Financial Reporting Standards

In June 2002, the European Union adopted a regulation that requires, from 1 January 2005, listed companies to prepare their financial statements in accordance with international accounting standards. The Group’s 2005 financial statements will therefore be prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (“IFRS”). These comprise not only IFRS but also International Accounting Standards (“IAS”).

In the light of the European Union decision, the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) announced its commitment to have a platform of high quality, improved standards in place by the end of March 2004 and its intention to avoid mandatory accounting changes between 2004 and 2006. Adoption of new standards issued in that period would be discretionary. A number of new or revised standards that will be effective for 2004 have only recently, or not yet, been finalised. These include standards of major significance for the Group, in particular IAS 32 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure and Presentation’ and IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’. Revised versions of IAS 32 and IAS 39 were published on 18 December 2003 and the IASB’s proposals on macro-hedging were issued at the end of March 2004. Nevertheless, there can be no certainty about the applicable accounting standards in respect of 2005 until IAS 32 and IAS 39 are ratified by the European Union.

During 2003, the Group initiated a programme to change its accounting policies and practices to be IFRS compliant by 2005. A dedicated project team has been assembled and separate work streams established for each difference in accounting that will require significant effort to implement. Activities during 2003 included documenting differences between the Group’s current accounting policies and IFRS, detailed planning for the move to IFRS, identification of implementation methodologies, the specification of IT requirements and raising awareness of IFRS throughout the Group.

IFRS differ in certain significant respects from the Group’s accounting policies under UK GAAP. The summary below outlines the important differences for the Group in respect of recognition and measurement on the basis of extant IFRS that will be effective for 2005, including revised IAS 32 and IAS 39:

Dividends – IFRS require dividends payable to be recorded in the period in which they are declared whereas under UK GAAP dividends are recorded in the period to which they relate.

Computer software – under UK GAAP, most software development costs are written off as incurred. Under IFRS, such costs are capitalised if certain conditions are met and amortised over the estimated useful life of the software.

Pensions – under UK GAAP, the cost of defined benefit pension schemes and healthcare plans is determined by independent professionally qualified actuaries using the projected unit method and recognised on a systematic basis over employees’ service lives. Scheme liabilities are discounted at a long-term stable rate. Under IFRS, scheme liabilities are discounted at the market rate on high quality corporate bonds. Actuarial gains and losses must be amortised, on a straight-line basis over the expected average remaining working lives of employees, to income or expense if they amount cumulatively to more than 10% of the present value of scheme liabilities or 10% of the fair value of scheme assets.

Financial instruments: financial assets – under UK GAAP, loans are measured at cost less provisions for bad and doubtful debts, derivatives held for trading are carried at fair value and hedging derivatives are accounted for in accordance with the treatment of the item being hedged (see ‘Derivatives and hedging’ below), and securities are classified as being held as investment securities, or held for dealing purposes. Investment debt securities are stated at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value. Premiums and discounts on dated securities are amortised to interest income over the period to maturity. Other securities are carried at fair value. Under IFRS, financial assets are classified into held-to-maturity; available-for-sale; held for trading; designated as fair value through profit or loss; and loans and receivables. Financial assets classified as held-to-maturity or as loans and receivables are carried at amortised cost. Other financial assets are measured at fair value. Changes in the fair value of available-for-sale financial assets are reported in a separate component of shareholders’ equity. Changes in the fair value of financial assets held for trading or designated as fair value are taken to the profit and loss account. Financial assets can be classified as held-to-maturity only if they have a fixed maturity and the reporting entity has the positive intention

9




Operating and financial review continued

and ability to hold to maturity. Trading financial assets are held for the purpose of selling in the near term. IFRS allows any financial asset to be designated as fair value through profit and loss on initial recognition. Unquoted debt financial assets that are not classified as held-to-maturity, held for trading or designated as fair value through profit or loss are categorised as loans and receivables. All other financial assets are classified as available-for-sale.

Effective interest rate and lending fees – under UK GAAP, loan origination fees are recognised when receivable unless they are charged in lieu of interest. IFRS requires origination fees to be deferred and recognised as an adjustment to the effective interest rate on the related financial asset. The effective interest rate is the rate that discounts estimated future cash flows over an instrument’s expected life to its net carrying value. It takes into account all fees and points paid that are an integral part of the yield, transaction costs and all other premiums and discounts. Under IFRS, the carrying value of a financial instrument held at amortised cost is calculated using the effective interest method.

Loan impairment – under UK GAAP, provisions for bad and doubtful debts are made so as to record impaired loans at their ultimate net realisable value. IFRS require impairment losses on financial assets carried at amortised cost to be measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the asset’s original effective interest rate. Impairment must be assessed individually for individually significant assets but can be assessed collectively for other assets.

Financial instruments: financial liabilities – IFRS require all financial liabilities to be measured at amortised cost except those held for trading and those that were designated as fair value through profit and loss on initial recognition. Under UK GAAP, short positions in securities and trading derivatives are carried at fair value, all other financial liabilities are recorded at amortised cost.

Liabilities and equity – under UK GAAP, all issued shares are classified as shareholders’ funds, and analysed between equity and non-equity interests. There is no concept of non-equity shares in IFRS. Instruments are classified between equity and liabilities in accordance with the substance of the contractual arrangements. A non-derivative instrument is classified as equity if it does not include a contractual obligation either to deliver cash or to exchange financial instruments with another entity under potentially unfavourable conditions, and if the instrument will or may be settled by the issue of equity, settlement does not involve the issue of a variable number of shares.

Derivatives and hedging – under UK GAAP, non-trading derivatives are accounted for on an accruals basis in accordance with the accounting treatment of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a non-trading derivative transaction is terminated or ceases to be an effective hedge, it is re-measured at fair value and any gain or loss amortised over the remaining life of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a hedged item is derecognised the related non-trading derivative is remeasured at fair value and any gain or loss taken to the profit and loss account. Under IFRS, all derivatives are measured at fair value. Hedge accounting is permitted for three types of hedge relationship: fair value hedge – the hedge of changes in the fair value of a recognised asset or liability or firm commitment; cash flow hedge - the hedge of variability in cash flows from a recognised asset or liability or a forecast transaction; and the hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity. In a fair value hedge the gain or loss on the derivative is recognised in the profit and loss account as it arises offset by the corresponding gain or loss on the hedged item attributable to the risk hedged. In a cash flow hedge and in the hedge of a net investment in a foreign entity, the element of the derivative’s gain or loss that is an effective hedge is recognised directly in equity. The ineffective element is taken to the profit and loss account. Certain conditions must be met for a relationship to qualify for hedge accounting. These include designation, documentation and prospective and actual hedge effectiveness.

Offset – for a financial asset and financial liability to be offset, IFRS require that an entity must intend to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. However, under UK GAAP an intention to settle net is not a requirement for set off, although the entity must have the ability to insist on net settlement and that ability is assured beyond doubt.

Leasing – under UK GAAP, finance lease income is recognised so as to give a level rate of return on the net cash investment in the lease. IFRS require a level rate of return on the net investment in the lease. This means that under UK GAAP tax cash flows are taken into account in allocating income but they are not under IFRS.

Share based payments – IFRS 2 requires recognition of the full economic benefit provided to employees and other suppliers in the form of equity in the reporting entity. Under UK GAAP recognition is limited to the intrinsic value of awards to employees and subject to a minimum recognisable benefit for certain all-employee awards.

Insurance Contracts – Although IFRS 5 generally permits the UK GAAP accounting for insurance contracts to continue after IFRS are adopted, contracts with features of both insurance and deposit arrangements are to be accounted for in two parts. In addition, insurance assets and liabilities consolidated under IFRS are not presented separately as under UK GAAP but aggregated with similar items held by other members of the group.

US GAAP

For a discussion of recent developments in US GAAP relevant to the Group, see Note 53 on the accounts.

10





Financial highlights      
       
for the year ended 31 December2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Total income19,229 16,815 14,558 
Profit before tax6,159 4,763 4,252 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders2,315 1,971 1,868 
Cost:income ratio (%) (1)48.8 55.6 57.5 
Basic earnings per share (pence)79.0 68.4 67.6 
Dividend cover (times) (2)1.6 1.6 1.7 
After-tax return on equity (%) (3)9.3 8.4 8.9 

 
       
at 31 December2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Total assets455,275 412,000 368,859 
Loans and advances to customers252,531 223,324 190,492 
Deposits304,286 273,881 239,033 
Shareholders’ funds28,099 27,052 26,668 
Risk asset ratio      
    – tier 1 (%)7.4 7.3 7.1 
   – total (%)11.8 11.7 11.5 

 
Notes:      
(1) Cost:income ratio represents operating expenses expressed as a percentage of total income.
(2) Dividend cover represents the total ordinary dividend expressed as a multiple of profit attributable to ordinary shareholders.
(3) After-tax return on equity is based on profit attributable to ordinary shareholders and average equity shareholders’ funds.

11




Operating and financial review continued

Summary consolidated profit and loss account for the year ended 31 December 2003

       
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
   Net interest income8,3017,8496,846






   Non-interest income (excluding general insurance)7,8677,0726,337
   General insurance net premium income3,0611,8941,375






   Non-interest income10,9288,9667,712






   Total income19,22916,81514,558






   Administrative expenses7,6997,7316,835
   Depreciation and amortisation 
   – tangible fixed assets919895881
   – goodwill763731651






   Operating expenses*9,3819,3578,367






   Profit before other operating charges9,8487,4586,191
   General insurance net claims2,1951,350948






   Operating profit before provisions7,6536,1085,243
   Provisions1,4941,345991






   Profit on ordinary activities before tax6,1594,7634,252
   Tax on profit on ordinary activities1,9101,5561,537






   Profit on ordinary activities after tax4,2493,2072,715
   Minority interests (including non-equity)21013390






   Profit after minority interests4,0393,0742,625
   Preference dividends261305358






3,7782,7692,267
   Additional Value Shares dividend1,463798399






   Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders2,3151,9711,868
   Ordinary dividends1,4901,2671,085






   Retained profit825704783





   Basic earnings per ordinary share79.0p 68.4p 67.6p 





 
* Integration costs included in operating expenses comprise: 
2003 20022001
£m £m£m






   Administrative expenses229955850
   Depreciation225






229957875





 

12




2003 compared with 2002

Profit

Profit before tax increased by 29% or £1,396 million, from £4,763 million to £6,159 million.

Total income

The Group achieved strong growth in income during 2003. Total income was up 14% or £2,414 million to £19,229 million. Non-interest income now accounts for 57% of total income.

Net interest income increased by 6% to £8,301 million and represents 43% of total income (2002 – 47%). Average loans and advances to customers and average customer deposits grew by 12% and 8% respectively. The benefit of this growth has more than offset the impact on net interest income of the Competition Commission inquiry into SME banking in the UK and the lower interest rate environment in the UK and the US which have reduced income earned from deposits and investments.

Non-interest income increased by 22% to £10,928 million and represents 57% of total income (2002 – 53%). Fees receivable were up 8% with good growth in lending, transmission and card related fees reflecting higher volumes. General insurance premium income grew strongly, reflecting volume growth in both motor and home insurance products, and the acquisition of Churchill. In addition, volumes in financial markets were up strongly in both the UK and the US reflecting growth in customer-driven activity in interest rate protection, mortgage securitisation and foreign exchange. Income from rental assets grew by 17% to £1,088 million, reflecting the growth in operating leases and investment properties.

Net interest margin

The Group’s net interest margin at 3.0% was, in line with the first half, down from 3.1% in 2002 due to a reduced benefit from interest-free funds arising from the lower interest rate environment, and the outcome of the Competition Commission inquiry into SME banking.

Operating expenses

Operating expenses were in line with prior year at £9,381 million. Increased expenditure of £752 million in support of organic growth and customer service improvements was partly offset by a decrease in integration costs of £728 million.

Cost:income ratio

The strong growth in income together with tight cost management resulted in a further improvement in the Group’s ratio of operating expenses to total income, to 48.8% from 55.6%.

Net insurance claims

General insurance claims, after reinsurance, increased by 63% to £2,195 million. Excluding Churchill, the increase was 29%, consistent with volume growth in the component parts of the insurance division.

Provisions

The profit and loss charge for bad debts and amounts written off fixed asset investments was £1,494 million compared with £1,345 million in 2002. The profit and loss charge is in line with the growth in loans and advances.

Credit quality

There has been no material change during the year in the distribution by grade of the Group’s total risk assets.

The ratio of risk elements in lending to gross loans and advances to customers at 2.01% at 31 December 2003 showed an improving trend (31 December 2002 – 2.14%).

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans represented 2.24% of gross loans and advances to customers compared with 2.66% at 31 December 2002.

Integration

Integration costs in the year were £229 million, of which, £143 million related to the final elements of the NatWest integration and £86 million related to other acquisitions, including Citizens’ acquisitions and Churchill.

All integration initiatives in relation to NatWest have been implemented. The programme benefits, comprising £890 million annual revenue benefits and £1,440 million annual cost savings, were fully implemented less than three years after the acquisition of NatWest. Total costs for the integration programme were £2.3 billion. Since 6 March 2000 the integration initiatives have contributed a cumulative £5.6 billion to the Group.

Earnings and dividends

Basic earnings per ordinary share increased by 15%, from 68.4p to 79.0p.

The final dividend of 55p per share amounting to £1.5 billion was paid on 1 December 2003 to the holders of the AVS issued in connection with the acquisition of NatWest. A total of £1 per AVS amounting to £2.7 billion in aggregate has been paid over three years to shareholders in accordance with the original schedule.

A final dividend of 35.7p per ordinary share is recommended, making a total for the year of 50.3p per share, an increase of 15%. If approved, the final dividend will be paid on 4 June 2004 to shareholders registered on 12 March 2004. The total dividend is covered 1.6 times by earnings.

13




Operating and financial review continued

Balance sheet

Total assets were £455 billion at 31 December 2003, 11% higher than total assets of £412 billion at 31 December 2002.

Lending to customers, excluding repurchase agreements and stock borrowing (“reverse repos”), increased by 13% or £27 billion to £228 billion. Customer deposits, excluding repurchase agreements and stock lending (“repos”), grew by 8% or £16 billion to £210 billion.

Capital ratios at 31 December 2003 were 7.4% (tier 1) and 11.8% (total), against 7.3% (tier 1) and 11.7% (total) at 31 December 2002.

Profitability

The after-tax return on ordinary equity was 9.3% compared with 8.4% for 2002. This is based on profit attributable to ordinary shareholders and average equity shareholders’ funds.

Acquisitions

In January 2003, Citizens completed the acquisition of Pennsylvania-based commercial bank, Commonwealth Bancorp, Inc. for a cash consideration of US$450 million.

In April 2003, Citizens announced the acquisition of Port Financial Corp., the holding company of the Massachusetts savings bank, CambridgePort Bank for a cash consideration of US$285 million. This transaction was completed on 31 July 2003.

In May 2003, RBS announced the acquisition of Nordisk Renting AB, a Swedish leasing company, for a cash consideration of €104 million. This transaction was completed on 2 June 2003.

In May 2003, RBS announced the acquisition of the credit card and personal loans portfolios of Frankfurt-based Santander Direkt Bank for a cash consideration of 486 million. This transaction was completed on 31 July 2003.

In June 2003, RBS announced the acquisition of Churchill Insurance Group PLC for a cash consideration of £1.1 billion. This transaction was completed on 1 September 2003.

In July 2003, Citizens announced the acquisition of Community Bancorp, Inc., the holding company for Community National Bank, for a cash consideration of US$116 million. This transaction was completed on 31 October 2003.

In September 2003, Citizens announced the acquisition of Thistle Group Holdings, Co., the holding company for Roxborough Manayunk Bank, for a cash consideration of US$136 million. This transaction was completed on 5 January 2004.

In October 2003, Coutts Bank (Switzerland) Limited announced the acquisition of a Swiss private bank, Bank von Ernst & Cie AG, for a cash consideration of Swiss Francs 500 million. This transaction was completed on 28 November 2003.

In October 2003, RBS announced that it had agreed terms for a recommended acquisition of First Active plc, for a cash consideration of €887 million. This transaction was completed on 5 January 2004.

On 3 February 2004, RBS announced that it had agreed terms with People’s Bank of Connecticut to purchase their credit card portfolio. This transaction was completed on 5 March 2004.

Disposals

In May 2003, RBS announced the sale of the Miami-based Latin American private banking operations of Coutts Group to Santander Central Hispano. The cash consideration was US$81 million. This transaction was completed on 31 July 2003.

2002 compared with 2001

Profit

Profit before tax was up 12%, from £4,252 million to £4,763 million.

Total income

RBS continued to achieve strong growth in income. Total income at £16,815 million was up by 16%, or £2,257 million. Excluding acquisitions, total income rose by 12%.

Citizens increased its income by 53% (15% underlying growth, excluding the effect of acquisitions and exchange rate fluctuations), Direct Line Group by 39% (34% excluding acquisitions) and Retail Direct by 16%.

Corporate Banking and Financial Markets income was up by 11%, notwithstanding Financial Markets’ strong performance in 2001 when it benefited from market volatility and falling interest rates.

Retail Banking grew its income by 8% and Ulster Bank by 8%. Income in Wealth Management declined 3% as the effect of lower stock market values on activity levels and fees more than offset the benefit from increased customer numbers and volumes.

Net interest income

Net interest income increased by 15%, or £1,003 million, to £7,849 million. Net interest income accounted for 47% of total income. Average interest-earning assets of the banking business increased by 14%.

14




Net interest margin

The Group’s net interest margin remained stable at 3.1%. Improved lending margins offset the downward pressure on deposit margins arising from lower interest rates.

Non-interest income

Non-interest income increased by 16%, or £1,254 million, to £8,966 million. Non-interest income accounted for 53% of total income.

Fees and commissions receivable were up 12%, or £573 million. Volume driven increases in lending fees and continued strong growth in fee paying current accounts contributed to the increase. Dealing profits at £1,462 million were up £36 million, 3%, on the strong performance in 2001. The increase in dealing profits resulted from customer led business growth and higher revenues from trading in interest rate instruments. Other operating income was £157 million, 15% higher mainly due to the expansion of CBFM’s operating lease business. General insurance premium income, after reinsurance, rose by 38%, or £519 million reflecting Direct Line Group’s organic growth and acquisitions in Continental Europe.

Operating expenses

Operating expenses rose by 12%, or £990 million, to £9,357 million. This reflects the effect of acquisitions and expenditure to support strong organic growth and customer service improvements.

Cost:income ratio

Strong income growth coupled with tight cost management resulted in a further improvement in the Group’s cost:income ratio, to 55.6% from 57.5%.

Net insurance claims

General insurance claims, after reinsurance, increased by 42%, or £402 million, to £1,350 million reflecting significant volume growth and acquisitions at Direct Line.

Provisions

The profit and loss charge for provisions was £1,345 million compared with £991 million in 2001. The charge for the two halves of the year was consistent with the second half of 2001.

Bad debt provisions amounted to £1,286 million compared with £984 million in 2001. The charge reflects overall growth in lending and, as in the second half of 2001, is particularly influenced by provisions required against a number of specific corporate situations. Amounts written off fixed asset investments, largely in the first half of the year, were £59 million against £7 million in 2001.

Total balance sheet provisions for bad debts amounted to £3,927 million at 31 December 2002, up 8% from £3,653 million at 31 December 2001.

Credit quality

Overall credit quality remains strong with no material change in the distribution by grade of the Group’s total risk assets compared with the position at the previous year end.

Risk elements in lending amounted to £4,871 million at 31 December 2002, up 8% from £4,493 million at 31 December 2001, and up 2% from £4,791 million at 30 June 2002.

Total provision coverage (the ratio of total balance sheet provisions to risk elements in lending) at 31 December 2002 was maintained at 81%.

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans in aggregate amounted to £6,054 million, an increase of 9% over 31 December 2001 and 1% over 30 June 2002.

Integration

The Group successfully completed the conversion of NatWest IT systems on to the RBS technology platform in October 2002. This programme ran for 30 months and involved more than 4,000 staff, culminating in the migration of a customer base three times the size of the Royal Bank of Scotland on to a single technology platform. The scale and complexity of this project are without precedent.

Annualised revenue benefits of £805 million and annualised cost savings of £1,350 million were delivered by December 2002. In addition, by February 2003 all integration initiatives had been completed. As a result the full programme annualised benefits, comprising £890 million revenue benefits and £1,440 million cost savings, have been achieved less than three years after the acquisition of NatWest.

Cumulative combined revenue and cost benefits to the profits for the period 2000 to 2002 amounted to £3.6 billion, which was £1.1 billion ahead of the original plan.

In the US, Citizens completed the IT integration of the Mellon Regional Franchise in August 2002, earlier than planned. Benefits from this transaction were delivered more quickly than was envisaged.

Earnings and dividends

Basic earnings per ordinary share increased by 1% from 67.6p to 68.4p.

A second dividend of 30.0p per share was paid on 2 December 2002 to the holders of AVS issued in connection with the acquisition of NatWest. By the end of 2002, a total of 45.0p per AVS had been paid, in accordance with the original payment schedule.

The total ordinary dividend for the year was 43.7p per ordinary share, an increase of 15%. The total dividend was covered 1.6 times by earnings.

15




Operating and financial review continued

Balance sheet

Total assets were £412 billion at 31 December 2002, 12% higher than total assets of £369 billion at 31 December 2001. Of the total assets, £311 billion (76%) related to banking business and £101 billion (24%) to trading business (31 December 2001: £285 billion (77%) banking business and £84 billion (23%) trading business).

Lending to customers excluding repurchase agreements and stock borrowing (“reverse repos”) increased by 13%, £22 billion. Including reverse repos, loans and advances to customers were up 17%. Customer deposits increased by 10%, from £199 billion at 31 December 2001 to £219 billion at 31 December 2002. Excluding repurchase agreements and stock lending (“repos”), customer deposits grew by 7%, £13 billion.

Capital ratios at 31 December 2002 were 7.3% (tier 1) and 11.7% (total), against 7.1% (tier 1) and 11.5% (total) at 31 December 2001.

Profitability

The after-tax return on ordinary equity was 8.4% compared with 8.9% for 2001. This is based on profit attributable to ordinary shareholders and average equity shareholders’ funds.

Acquisitions

In May 2002, Lombard, the leasing arm of CBFM, completed the acquisition of Dixon Motors PLC for a consideration of £118 million.

In July 2002, Citizens announced the acquisition of Medford Bancorp Inc., a Massachusetts savings bank for a cash consideration of US$273 million and in September 2002 announced the acquisition of Pennsylvania-based commercial bank, Commonwealth Bancorp, Inc for a cash consideration of US$450 million. These acquisitions were completed in October 2002 and January 2003, respectively.

16



 

Analysis of results
Net interest income

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Interest receivable13,998 13,561 14,421 
Interest payable(5,697)(5,712)(7,575)






 
Net interest income8,301 7,849 6,846 
 




 
       
 % % % 






 
Gross yield on interest-earning assets of the banking business5.0 5.4 6.6 
Cost of interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business(2.3)(2.7)(4.0)






 
Interest spread of the banking business2.7 2.7 2.6 
Benefit from interest-free funds0.3 0.4 0.5 






 
Net interest margin of the banking business3.0 3.1 3.1 
 




 
       
Yields, spreads and margins of the banking business% % % 






 
Gross yield      
   Group5.0 5.4 6.6 
   UK5.2 5.6 6.6 
   Overseas4.4 5.0 6.4 
Interest spread      
   Group2.7 2.7 2.6 
   UK2.7 2.7 2.6 
   Overseas2.7 2.7 2.5 
Net interest margin      
   Group3.0 3.1 3.1 
   UK3.0 3.1 3.2 
   Overseas3.0 3.1 3.0 
       
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc base rate3.7 4.0 5.1 
London inter-bank three month offered rates:      
Sterling3.7 4.1 5.0 
   Eurodollar1.2 1.8 3.8 
   Euro2.3 3.3 4.3 






 

Notes:

(1) Gross yield is the interest rate earned on average interest-earning assets of the banking business.
(2) Interest spread is the difference between the gross yield and the interest rate paid on average interest-bearing liabilities of the banking business.
(3) Net interest margin is net interest income of the banking business as a percentage of average interest-earning assets of the banking business.

2003 compared with 2002

Net interest income increased by 6%, £452 million, to £8,301 million. Average interest-earning assets of the Group’s banking business increased by 12%, £29.1 billion, to £279.7 billion. Within this, average loans and advances to customers were up 12%, £23.3 billion, to £213.3 billion due to growth in both corporate and personal lending.

Interest spread for the Group as a whole was unchanged at 2.7%. Interest-free balances fell partly due to the outcome of the Competition Commission inquiry into SME banking. This, together with the lower interest rate environment contributed to the reduction in the benefit of interest-free funds from 0.4% to 0.3% giving a decline in net interest margin from 3.1% to 3.0%.

UK – Interest spread remained unchanged at 2.7% with product margins remaining stable despite growth in the relatively lower margin mortgage business. The reduced benefit of interest-free funds due to the rate and volume impact described above resulted in the decrease in net interest margin from 3.1% to 3.0%.

Overseas – Interest spread was unchanged at 2.7%. Asset spreads tightened in the US due to lower interest rates; however, this was offset by overall mix and volume improvements elsewhere. Lower interest rates led to a reduction in the benefit from interest-free funds, resulting in the decline in net interest margin from 3.1% to 3.0%.

2002 compared with 2001

Net interest income increased by 15%, £1,003 million, to £7,849 million. Average interest-earning assets of the Group’s banking business increased by 14%, £30.3 billion, to £250.6 billion. Within this, average loans and advances to customers were up 14%, £23.9 billion, to £190.0 billion due to growth in both corporate and personal lending.

Interest spread rose 0.1% to 2.7% with growth in higher-yielding customer lending offsetting the effects of the low interest rate environment.

Despite the increase in net interest-free funds of the banking business, up 28%, £8.6 billion, to £38.9 billion, the decline in interest rates led to a lower benefit from interest-free funds offsetting the rise in interest spread, leaving net interest margin of the banking business unchanged at 3.1%.

17




Operating and financial review continued

Average balance sheet and related interest


   2003     2002   
 
 
 
 Average
balance
£m
 Interest
£m
 Rate
%
 Average
balance
£m
 Interest
£m
 Rate
%
 

 
Assets            
Treasury and other eligible bills – UK1,378 48 3.5 910 24 2.6 
Treasury and other eligible bills – Overseas64 1 1.6 351 6 1.7 
Loans and advances to banks – UK13,724 459 3.3 13,439 532 4.0 
Loans and advances to banks – Overseas9,559 212 2.2 9,811 304 3.1 
Loans and advances to customers – UK168,390 9,519 5.7 154,202 9,141 5.9 
Loans and advances to customers – Overseas44,862 2,240 5.0 35,759 1,963 5.5 
Debt securities – UK23,810 754 3.2 17,950 675 3.8 
Debt securities – Overseas17,927 765 4.3 18,188 916 5.0 




   


   
Total interest-earning assets – banking business279,714 13,998 5.0 250,610 13,561 5.4 
   
     
   
Total interest-earning assets – trading business (3)96,648     78,380     


     
     
Total interest-earning assets376,362     328,990     
Non-interest-earning assets67,026     65,898     


     
     
Total assets443,388     394,888     
 
     
     
Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations32.4%    32.0%    
 
     
     
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity            
Deposits by banks – UK28,220 703 2.5 21,090 544 2.6 
Deposits by banks – Overseas9,565 218 2.3 9,058 215 2.4 
Customer accounts: demand deposits – UK64,469 1,028 1.6 58,618 1,062 1.8 
Customer accounts: demand deposits – Overseas9,166 70 0.8 8,275 99 1.2 
Customer accounts: savings deposits – UK18,653 503 2.7 16,002 463 2.9 
Customer accounts: savings deposits – Overseas16,310 260 1.6 11,742 229 2.0 
Customer accounts: other time deposits  – UK49,880 1,478 3.0 45,902 1,542 3.4 
Customer accounts: other time deposits  – Overseas16,642 374 2.2 16,264 462 2.8 
Debt securities in issue – UK29,977 914 3.0 24,154 965 4.0 
Debt securities in issue – Overseas9,630 119 1.2 8,693 209 2.4 
Loan capital – UK15,342 534 3.5 13,154 640 4.9 
Loan capital – Overseas154 16 10.4 166 17 10.2 
             
Internal funding of trading business – UK(21,258)(497)2.3 (20,129)(709)3.5 
Internal funding of trading business – Overseas(1,651)(23)1.4 (1,301)(26)2.0 




   


   
             
Total interest-bearing liabilities – banking business245,099 5,697 2.3 211,688 5,712 2.7 
   
     
   
Total interest-bearing liabilities – trading business (3)93,466     75,059     


     
     
Total interest-bearing liabilities338,565     286,747     
Non-interest-bearing liabilities            
Demand deposits – UK17,589     21,848     
Demand deposits – Overseas7,330     6,401     
Other liabilities51,793     52,600     
Shareholders’ funds – equity24,956     23,553     
Shareholders’ funds – non-equity3,155     3,739     


     
     
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity443,388     394,888     
 
     
     
             
Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations30.7%    30.4%    
 
     
     

Notes:

(1) The analysis into UK and Overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
(2) Loans and advances to customers include non-accrual loans. Interest income includes income on non-accruing loans only to the extent cash payments have been received.
(3) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in dealing profits.

18




 2001 
 
 
 Average
balance
£m
 Interest
£m
 Rate
%
 

 
Assets      
Treasury and other eligible bills – UK231 11 4.8 
Treasury and other eligible bills – Overseas277 8 2.9 
Loans and advances to banks – UK18,214 834 4.6 
Loans and advances to banks – Overseas7,467 421 5.6 
Loans and advances to customers – UK137,232 9,584 7.0 
Loans and advances to customers – Overseas28,847 1,981 6.9 
Debt securities – UK16,632 931 5.6 
Debt securities – Overseas11,427 651 5.7 

   
Total interest-earning assets – banking business220,327 14,421 6.6 
   
   
Total interest-earning assets – trading business (3)66,545     


     
Total interest-earning assets286,872     
Non-interest-earning assets63,385     


     
Total assets350,257     
 
     
       
Percentage of assets applicable to overseas operations27.1%    
 
     
       
Liabilities and shareholders’ equity      
Deposits by banks – UK18,360 760 4.1 
Deposits by banks – Overseas8,779 382 4.4 
Customer accounts: demand deposits – UK54,237 1,576 2.9 
Customer accounts: demand deposits – Overseas6,422 154 2.4 
Customer accounts: savings deposits – UK15,892 594 3.7 
Customer accounts: savings deposits – Overseas11,690 435 3.7 
Customer accounts: other time deposits – UK43,161 1,967 4.6 
Customer accounts: other time deposits – Overseas8,127 338 4.2 
Debt securities in issue – UK20,140 1,031 5.1 
Debt securities in issue – Overseas8,407 384 4.6 
Loan capital – UK10,779 657 6.1 
Loan capital – Overseas171 14 8.2 
Internal funding of trading business – UK(14,626)(654)4.5 
Internal funding of trading business – Overseas(1,576)(63)4.0 




   
Total interest-bearing liabilities – banking business189,963 7,575 4.0 
   
   
Total interest-bearing liabilities trading business (3)63,159     


     
       
Total interest-bearing liabilities253,122     
Non-interest-bearing liabilities      
Demand deposits – UK21,025     
Demand deposits – Overseas4,513     
Other liabilities46,249     
Shareholders’ funds – equity21,073     
Shareholders’ funds – non-equity4,275     


     
       
Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity350,257     
 
     
       
Percentage of liabilities applicable to overseas operations27.5%    
 
     

Notes:

(1) The analysis into UK and Overseas has been compiled on the basis of location of office.
(2) Loans and advances to customers include non-accrual loans. Interest income includes income on non-accruing loans only to the extent cash payments have been received.
(3) Interest receivable and interest payable on trading assets and liabilities are included in dealing profits.

19




Operating and financial review continued

Analysis of change in net interest income – volume and rate analysis

Volume and rate variances have been calculated based on movements in average balances over the period and changes in interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. Changes due to a combination of volume and rate are allocated pro rata to volume and rate movements.

 2003 over 2002 2002 over 2001 
 
 
 
 Increase/(decrease) due to changes in: Increase/(decrease) due to changes in: 
 Average
volume
 £m
 Average
rate
 £m
 Net
change
£m
 Average
volume
 £m
 Average
rate
 £m
 Net
change
£m
 

 
Interest-earning assets            
Treasury and other eligible bills            
    UK15 9 24 20 (7)13 
    Overseas(5) (5)2 (4)(2)
Loans and advances to banks            
    UK11 (84)(73)(199)(103)(302)
    Overseas(8)(84)(92)108 (225)(117)
Loans and advances to customers            
    UK820 (442)378 1,105 (1,548)(443)
   Overseas467 (190)277 423 (441)(18)
Debt securities            
   UK196 (117)79 69 (325)(256)
   Overseas(13)(138)(151)348 (83)265 












 
Total interest receivable of the banking business            
   UK1,042 (634)408 995 (1,983)(988)
   Overseas441 (412)29 881 (753)128 












 
 1,483 (1,046)437 1,876 (2,736)(860)
 










 
Interest-bearing liabilities            
Deposits by banks            
    UK(179)20 (159)(101)317 216 
    Overseas(12)9 (3)(12)179 167 
Customer accounts: demand deposits            
    UK(101)135 34 (119)633 514 
    Overseas(10)39 29 (36)91 55 
Customer accounts: savings deposits            
    UK(72)32 (40)(4)135 131 
    Overseas(78)47 (31)(2)208 206 
Customer accounts: other time deposits            
    UK(128)192 64 (119)544 425 
   Overseas(10)98 88 (257)133 (124)
Debt securities in issue            
   UK(205)256 51 (184)250 66 
   Overseas(20)110 90 (13)188 175 
Loan capital            
   UK(96)202 106 (130)147 17 
   Overseas1  1  (3)(3)
Internal funding of trading business            
   UK38 (250)(212)213 (158)55 
   Overseas6 (9)(3)(10)(27)(37)












 
Total interest payable of the banking business            
   UK(743)587 (156)(444)1,868 1,424 
   Overseas(123)294 171 (330)769 439 












 
 (866)881 15 (774)2,637 1,863 
 










 
Movement in net interest income            
    UK299 (47)252 551 (115)436 
   Overseas318 (118)200 551 16 567 












 
 617 (165)452 1,102 (99)1,003 
 










 

20






Non-interest income      
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Dividend income58 58 54 
Fees and commissions receivable5,755 5,308 4,735 
Fees and commissions payable(1,337)(965)(930)
Dealing profits1,793 1,462 1,426 
Other operating income1,598 1,209 1,052 






 
 7,867 7,072 6,337 






 
General insurance premium income      
Earned premiums3,565 2,383 1,804 
Reinsurance(504)(489)(429)






 
 3,061 1,894 1,375 






 
 10,928 8,966 7,712 
 




 

2003 compared with 2002
Non-interest income increased by 22%, or £1,962 million, to £10,928 million. Non-interest income now represents 57% of total income. Excluding general insurance premium income, non-interest income rose by 11% or £795 million to £7,867 million reflecting strong performances in CBFM, up 18% or £670 million and Retail Direct, up 17%, or £145 million.

Within non-interest income, fees and commissions receivable increased by 8% or £447 million, to £5,755 million. This reflected an increase in lending and transmission fees, and good growth in insurance brokerage, cards related fees and ATM income.

Fees and commissions payable increased by £372 million to £1,337 million reflecting higher brokerage costs in CBFM, fees paid in Retail Direct in support of higher volumes and commissions payable to brokers and intermediaries following the acquisition of Churchill.

Dealing profits at £1,793 million were up £331 million, 23% on 2002. This reflects strong growth in volumes in all product areas. The performance in the first half of the year benefited from the unusually high levels of demand for mortgage backed securities in the US.

Other operating income increased by 32% to £1,598 million. This was due to growth in income from rental assets (comprising operating lease assets and investment properties) and higher investment securities gains.

General insurance premium income, after reinsurance, rose by 62%, or £1,167 million to £3,061 million. Excluding the acquisition of Churchill Insurance the growth was 26% or £487 million reflecting volume growth in motor and home insurance products.

2002 compared with 2001
Non-interest income increased by 16%, or £1,254 million, to £8,966 million. Non-interest income accounted for 53% of total income. Excluding general insurance premium income, non-interest income rose by 12% or £735 million to £7,072 million reflecting strong performances in CBFM, up 12% or £384 million, Retail Direct, up 21%, or £145 million and Citizens, up £162 million of which £121 million related to acquisitions.

Within non-interest income, net fees and commissions increased by £538 million, 14% to £4,343 million. This reflected higher transmission fees in Retail Banking due to the growth in packaged accounts and in Citizens which benefited from acquisitions, increase in lending fees, particularly in CBFM and higher insurance income. Strong growth in Cards business and TPF also contributed to this increase.

Dealing profits at £1,462 million were up £36 million, 3% on the strong performance in 2001. The increase in dealing profits resulted from customer led business growth and higher revenues from trading in interest rate instruments.

Other operating income increased by 15% to £1,209 million. This was due to the significant growth in CBFM’s operating lease business, where income rose by 16%, £112 million, and higher profits from sale of investment securities.

General insurance premium income, after reinsurance, rose by 38%, or £519 million reflecting RBS Insurance’s organic growth and acquisitions in Continental Europe.

21





Operating and financial review continued

Operating expenses     
       
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Administrative expenses:      
Staff costs4,518 4,472 4,059 
Premises and equipment1,073 1,006 873 
Other administrative2,108 2,253 1,903 






 
Total administrative expenses7,699 7,731 6,835 
Depreciation of tangible fixed assets919 895 881 
Amortisation of goodwill763 731 651 






 
 9,381 9,357 8,367 
 




 

2003 compared with 2002
Operating expenses were in line with prior year at £9,381 million. Increased expenditure of £752 million in support of organic growth and customer service improvements was partly offset by a decrease in integration costs of £728 million.

Staff costs were up £46 million to £4,518 million reflecting an offsetting decrease in integration costs and increased staff costs in respect of acquisitions and underlying business growth. The number of staff increased by 9,100, 8% to 120,900. Acquisitions in the year added 9,700 staff of which 8,500 related to Churchill.

Premises and equipment expenses increased by £67 million to £1,073 million reflecting the continuing upgrade of the property portfolio in major UK centres to support the core business.

The decrease in other administrative expenses was due to lower integration costs being partially offset by higher expenses reflecting increased business volumes.

Continued income growth coupled with a rigorous approach to cost management further improved the Group’s cost:income ratio, to 48.8% from 55.6%.

2002 compared with 2001
Operating expenses rose by 12% or £990 million to £9,357 million. This reflected the effect of acquisitions and expenditure to support strong organic growth and customer service improvements.

Staff costs were up £413 million, 10% to £4,472 million reflecting acquisitions and business growth. The number of staff employed increased by 6,100, 6% to 111,800. Excluding acquisitions since 1 January 2001, staff numbers increased by 500.

Premises and equipment expenses increased by £133 million, 15% to £1,006 million reflecting higher operating lease rentals and higher utility costs supporting business expansion.

The increase in other administrative expenses reflected higher marketing expenditure, outsourcing costs and legal and professional fees.

Strong income growth coupled with tight cost management resulted in a further improvement in the Group’s cost income ratio, to 55.6% from 57.5%.

22





Integration costs      
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Staff costs125 530 598 
Premises and equipment31 127 64 
Other administrative expenses73 298 188 
Depreciation of tangible fixed assets 2 25 






 
 229 957 875 
 




 

All integration initiatives in relation to NatWest have been implemented. The programme’s annualised benefits, comprising £890 million revenue benefits and £1,440 million cost savings, were fully implemented less than three years after the acquisition of NatWest. Total costs for the integration programme were £2.3 billion.

Integration costs in relation to NatWest were £143 million in 2003, £810 million in 2002 and £847 million in 2001.

Citizens incurred £63 million of integration costs in 2003 in respect of completed acquisitions.

Expenditure of £134 million and £13 million was incurred in 2002 relating to the integration of Mellon Regional Franchise and Medford respectively compared with £28 million in respect of Mellon Regional Franchise in 2001. The transaction benefits are being delivered more quickly than was planned.

Integration costs in 2003 relating to other acquisitions were £23 million.

During 2002 and 2003, the Group committed to various integration initiatives following the acquisition of Churchill Insurance and various acquisitions by Citizens. Accruals in relation to these integration costs, together with NatWest related integration costs, are set out below.

 At 31 December
2002
£m
 Currency translation
adjustments
£m
 Charge to profit
and loss account
£m
 Utilised during
the year
£m
 At 31 December
2003
£m
 

 
Staff costs – redundancy71  58 (110)19 
Staff costs – other15 1 67 (56)27 
Premises and equipment  31 (29)2 
Other66 (2)73 (104)33 

 
 152 (1)229 (299)81 
 
 

23



Operating and financial review continued

Provisions      
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Gross new provisions1,566 1,408 1,071 
less: recoveries(72)(63)(80)






 
Charge to profit and loss account1,494 1,345 991 
 




 
       
Comprising:      
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts1,461 1,286 984 
Amounts written off fixed asset investments33 59 7 






 
Charge to profit and loss account1,494 1,345 991 
 




 

2003 compared with 2002
Gross new provisions were up 11%, £158 million to £1,566 million. Recoveries of amounts previously written off were up £9 million, 14%, to £72 million. Consequently the net charge to the profit and loss account was up £149 million, 11% to £1,494 million.

Bad debt provisions amounted to £1,461 million compared with £1,286 million in 2002, an increase of 14%. The increased charge was in line with the growth in lending during 2003. Amounts written off fixed asset investments, largely in the second half of the year, were down £26 million to £33 million compared with £59 million in 2002.

Total balance sheet provisions for bad and doubtful debts amounted to £3,929 million compared with £3,927 million at 31 December 2002. Total provision coverage (the ratio of total balance sheet provisions to total risk elements in lending) was 76% compared with 81% at 31 December 2002.

The ratio of total balance sheet provisions to total risk elements in lending and potential problem loans increased to 68% compared with 65% at 31 December 2002.

2002 compared with 2001
Gross new provisions were up 31%, £337 million to £1,408 million. The increase reflects growth in overall lending and as in the second half of 2001, provisions required in a number of specific corporate situations. Recoveries of amounts previously written off were down £17 million, 21%, to £63 million.Consequently the net charge to the profit and loss account was up £354 million, 36% to £1,345 million.

Bad debt provisions amounted to £1,286 million compared with £984 million in 2001. The charge reflects overall growth in lending and is particularly influenced by provisions required against a number of specific corporate situations. Amounts written off fixed asset investments, largely in the first half of the year, were £59 million against £7 million in 2001.

Total balance sheet provisions for bad and doubtful debts amounted to £3,927 million, up 8% from £3,653 million at 31 December 2001. Total provision coverage (the ratio of total balance sheet provisions to risk elements in lending) at 31 December 2002 was maintained at 81%.

Taxation      
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Tax on profit on ordinary activities1,910 1,556 1,537 
 




 
       
 % % % 






 
UK corporation tax rate30.0 30.0 30.0 
Effective tax rate31.0 32.7 36.1 






 

The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax charge computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Expected tax charge1,848 1,429 1,276 
Goodwill amortisation200 183 169 
Contributions to employee share schemes(35)(40)(48)
Non-deductible items231 179 251 
Non-taxable items(207)(163)(92)
Capital allowances in excess of depreciation(626)(340)(280)
Other13 7 (7)
Adjustments in respect of prior periods(77)(15)15 






 
Current tax charge for year1,347 1,240 1,284 
Deferred taxation:      
Origination and reversal of timing differences598 372 255 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods(35)(56)(2)






 
Actual tax charge1,910 1,556 1,537 
 




 

24



Divisional performance
The contribution of each division before goodwill amortisation and integration costs and, where appropriate, Manufacturing costs is detailed below.

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets*3,620 3,261 3,080 
Retail Banking3,126 3,019 2,807 
Retail Direct873 701 551 
Manufacturing*(1,875)(1,762)(1,646)
Wealth Management*438 454 481 
RBS Insurance468 355 261 
Ulster Bank273 244 229 
Citizens857 766 501 
Central items(629)(587)(486)






 
Profit before goodwill amortisation and integration costs7,151 6,451 5,778 
Goodwill amortisation(763)(731)(651)
Integration costs(229)(957)(875)






 
Profit on ordinary activities before tax6,159 4,763 4,252 
 




 
  
*Prior periods have been restated to reflect the transfer in 2003 of certain activities from Corporate Banking and Financial Markets and Wealth Management to Manufacturing. The performance of each of the divisions is reviewed on pages 26 to 37.

25




Operating and financial review continued

Corporate Banking and Financial Markets

 2003
 £m
 2002*
£m
 2001*
£m
 






 
      Net interest income excluding funding cost of rental assets2,653 2,631 2,338 
      Funding cost of rental assets(329)(282)(200)






 
      Net interest income2,324 2,349 2,138 






 
      Fees and commissions receivable1,537 1,394 1,250 
      Fees and commissions payable(220)(157)(165)
      Dealing profits (before associated direct costs)1,661 1,338 1,349 
      Income on rental assets1,088 931 748 
      Other operating income307 197 137 






 
      Non-interest income4,373 3,703 3,319 






 
      Total income6,697 6,052 5,457 






 
      Direct expenses      
         – staff costs1,410 1,230 1,091 
         – other394 375 350 
         – operating lease depreciation518 461 434 






 
 2,322 2,066 1,875 






 
      Contribution before provisions4,375 3,986 3,582 
      Provisions755 725 502 






 
      Contribution3,620 3,261 3,080 
 




 
   * prior periods have been restated following the transfer of certain activities to Manufacturing      
 £bn £bn £bn 






 
      Total assets**219.0 203.4 187.7 
      Loans and advances to customers** – gross      
         – banking book99.3 92.1 82.7 
         – trading book5.0 3.6 1.0 
      Rental assets10.1 7.0 5.5 
      Customer deposits**68.6 62.2 56.4 
      Weighted risk assets – banking140.0 125.2 105.8 
      Weighted risk assets – trading12.6 11.3 12.5 






 
** excluding repos and reverse repos      

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution increased by 11% or £359 million to £3,620 million. As well as in the UK, the division also achieved good growth in Europe and North America.

Total income was up 11% or £645 million to £6,697 million with strong growth across all business areas.

Average loans and advances to customers of the banking business increased by 9% or £7.5 billion to £94.3 billion. Lending margin was maintained. Average customer deposits within the banking businesses increased by 7% or £4.1 billion to £61.0 billion; however, the lower interest rate environment adversely affected deposit margins as it reduced the benefit of interest free funds. Net interest income was further impacted by the effect of implementing from 1 January 2003 the pricing remedies agreed following the Competition Commission inquiry into SME banking and by lower money market income, due to less favourable market conditions.

The asset rental business comprising operating leases and investment properties, grew strongly. Average rental assets increased to £8.1 billion and net income after deducting funding costs and operating lease depreciation increased by 28%, £53 million to £241 million.

Fees receivable rose by £143 million, 10% to £1,537 million due to growth in fees related to lending and from the expansion and success of capital markets activities. Fees payable including brokerage were up £63 million to £220 million due to higher volumes in Financial Markets.

Dealing profits which is income before associated direct costs from our role in servicing customer demand for interest and currency rate protection and mortgage backed securitisation rose by 24% to £1,661 million providing incremental profit contribution of some £170 million. There has been steady growth in underlying customer volumes in all product areas. While first half performance was particularly strong given the unusually high levels of demand for mortgage backed securities in the United States, dealing revenues in the second half were up 10% on the prior year period, in line with the growth in income for the division as a whole.

Other operating income was up £110 million, 56% to £307 million partially due to the full year effect of the inclusion of Dixon Motors’ gross profit.

Direct expenses increased by 12% or £256 million to £2,322 million. Excluding the effect of the acquisition of Nordisk Renting and Dixon Motors and operating lease depreciation,

26




operating expenses were up 10%, £161 million. This was due to performance related costs associated with the strong growth in trading revenues, expansion in all business areas and continued investment in capital market activities and in the growing overseas franchise.

The charge for provisions for bad debts and amounts written off fixed asset investments amounted to £755 million, an increase of £30 million. The charge in the second half of the year was £351 million, 13% lower than the first half. The increase in provisions of 4% over last year was less than the growth in lending of 9%, reflecting an improvement in credit quality and the economic environment during 2003.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 6% or £181 million to £3,261 million. Contribution before provisions was up by 11%, £404 million to £3,986 million.

Total income was up 11% or £595 million to £6,052 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added £67 million, total income increased 10%.

Net interest income rose by 10% or £211 million to £2,349 million, reflecting customer lending growth in Corporate Banking and continued good performance by FinancialMarkets from strong wholesale money market activity. Average loans and advances to customers of the banking business increased by 12%, £9.3 billion to £86.9 billion.

Non-interest income rose by 12% or £384 million to £3,703 million, mainly as a result of increased fees, reflecting growth in lending and in payment and electronic banking activities. Dealing profits benefited from continued customer led business growth and higher revenues from trading in interest rate instruments and matched the strong performance of 2001. Operating lease business expanded significantly during 2002 with average assets increasing by 23% from £3.5 billion to £4.3 billion resulting in higher income, up 16%, £112 million.

Direct expenses increased by 10% or £191 million to £2,066 million. Excluding acquisitions, expenses were up £131 million or 7%, of which £104 million was higher staff costs reflecting business growth and £27 million was higher operating lease depreciation.

Provisions amounted to £725 million compared with £502 million in 2001. The increase reflected growth in lending and, as in the second half of 2001, provisions required against a number of specific corporate situations, and higher investment provisions.

27




Operating and financial review continued

Retail Banking      
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Net interest income2,951 2,840 2,622 
Non-interest income1,452 1,353 1,277 






 
Total income4,403 4,193 3,899 






 
Direct expenses      
   – staff costs777 707 702 
   – other227 254 226 






 
 1,004 961 928 






 
Contribution before provisions3,399 3,232 2,971 
Provisions273 213 164 






 
Contribution3,126 3,019 2,807 
 




 
       
 £bn £bn £bn 






 
Total banking assets63.8 57.4 50.9 
Loans and advances to customers – gross      
   – mortgages36.6 32.1 28.5 
   – other25.2 23.5 20.5 
Customer deposits66.3 61.7 56.8 
Weighted risk assets42.9 38.8 35.2 






 

2003 compared with 2002
The division achieved strong volume growth across all personal product areas - current accounts, mortgages and loans and savings. Despite lower interest rates and the adverse effect of the pricing remedies agreed following the Competition Commission inquiry into SME banking which were implemented from 1 January 2003, income increased by 5% or £210 million to £4,403 million, and contribution by 4% or £107 million to £3,126 million.

Net interest income rose by 4% or £111 million to £2,951 million, reflecting the continued strong growth in customer advances and deposits which was partially offset by the implementation of the Competition Commission pricing remedies and the impact of a lower interest rate environment. Excluding the effect of the Competition Commission the increase was 8%. Average loans to customers, excluding mortgages, grew by 9% or £1.9 billion to £23.7 billion. Average mortgage lending grew by 12% or £3.6 billion to £33.7 billion. Average customer deposits increased by 6% or £3.7 billion to £60.9 billion.

Non-interest income rose by 7% or £99 million to £1,452 million. This reflected further growth in the customer base and a 15% growth in general insurance income to £301 million. Embedded value profits of the life assurance business increased by 14%, or £7 million to £57 million.

Direct expenses increased by 4% or £43 million to £1,004 million. Staff expenses increased 10% or £70 million to £777 million reflecting further investment in customer facing staff.

Other expenses decreased 11% or £27 million to £227 million, as a result of our rigorous approach to management of non-staff costs.

The charge for provisions for bad debts increased by £60 million to £273 million. The overall quality of the loan portfolio remains stable and the increased charge reflects growth in lending over recent years particularly in NatWest since its acquisition.

28



2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 8% or £212 million to £3,019 million.

Total income was up 8% or £294 million to £4,193 million. The increase in income reflected continued growth in customer numbers. The number of personal current accounts increased by 4% to 10.63 million. Retail Banking is the leading provider of services to small businesses and has 1.10 million customers.

Net interest income rose by 8% or £218 million to £2,840 million, reflecting strong growth in customer loans and deposits. Average loans to customers, excluding mortgages, grew by 14% or £2.7 billion to £21.8 billion. Average mortgage lending was up 10% or £2.7 billion to £29.8 billion. Average customer deposits increased by 6% or £3.1 billion to £57.2 billion.

Non-interest income rose by 6% or £76 million to £1,353 million, reflecting growth in packaged current accounts, transmission income and higher volumes of general insurance products sold through the Royal Bank and NatWest networks. Strong sales performance was seen in Bancassurance with new business up 30% although the sharp fall in equity markets depressed Bancassurance income.

Direct expenses increased by 4% or £33 million to £961 million. Staff costs were up £5 million, 1% to £707 million. Other costs rose £28 million, 12% to £254 million partly due to increased incidence of fraud losses.

Provisions increased by £49 million to £213 million, reflecting recent growth in lending.

29




Operating and financial review continued

Retail Direct      
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Net interest income849 749 674 
Non-interest income986 841 696 






 
Total income1,835 1,590 1,370 






 
Direct expenses      
      – staff costs211 190 164 
      – other454 418 400 






 
 665 608 564 






 
Contribution before provisions1,170 982 806 
Provisions297 281 255 






 
Contribution873 701 551 
 




 
       
 £bn £bn £bn 






 
Total assets21.9 19.4 17.1 
Loans and advances to customers – gross      
   – mortgages8.2 7.0 5.9 
   – other13.8 12.4 11.2 
Customer deposits4.4 4.4 4.3 
Weighted risk assets16.8 14.4 12.5 






 

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution increased by 25% or £172 million to £873 million.

Total income was up 15% or £245 million to £1,835 million, reflecting continued strong growth in supermarket banking (TPF), mortgages and cards. Net interest income was up 13% or £100 million to £849 million. Average lending rose by 15% to £20.3 billion of which average mortgage lending was 20% higher at £7.6 billion mainly in The One account. Average customer deposits were up 5% to £4.4 billion. During 2003, the total number of customer accounts increased by 1.7 million.

Non-interest income was up 17% or £145 million to £986 million. There was good growth in insurance and ATM income resulting from increased volumes, particularly in TPF and in the Cards Business.

Direct expenses increased by 9% or 7% excluding acquisitions, and other expenses increased by £36 million, 9% (7% excluding acquisitions), with increased processing and operational costs in support of the higher business levels.

The charge for provisions for bad debts increased by £16 million or 6% to £297 million, reflecting growth in lending volumes offset by higher recoveries. The indicators of credit quality remain stable.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 27% or £150 million to £701 million.

Total income was up 16% or £220 million to £1,590 million, reflecting continued strong growth in the Cards business and in TPF. The number of active credit card accounts increased during the year to 9.5 million. TPF continued its strong growth, increasing customer accounts across all products to 3.4 million.

Net interest income was up 11% or £75 million to £749 million. Average customer lending increased by 16% to £17.9 billion. In TPF, average personal loans rose by 29% to £1.1 billion and average customer deposits rose by 26% to £1.9 billion.

Average mortgage lending in The One account was 36% higher at £4.3 billion and in DLFS was up 10% to £2.3 billion. Average personal lending in DLFS and Lombard Direct increased by 20% to £2.0 billion.

Non-interest income was up 21% or £145 million to £841 million mainly as a result of higher fee income reflecting growth in volumes, especially in TPF, where the total number of general insurance policies increased during the year to 1.3 million.

Direct expenses increased by 8% or £44 million to £608 million reflecting increased volumes and higher marketing activity to support strong business expansion.

Provisions increased by £26 million to £281 million due to the growth in lending volumes.

30




Manufacturing      
 2003
 £m
 2002*
£m
 2001*
£m
 






 
Staff costs625 536 484 
Other costs1,250 1,226 1,162 






 
Total manufacturing costs1,875 1,762 1,646 
 




 
       
Analysis:      
Group Technology**651 613 572 
Group Purchasing and Property Operations**636 585 535 
Customer Support and other operations588 564 539 






 
Total manufacturing costs1,875 1,762 1,646 
 




 

* prior periods have been restated following the transfer of certain activities from Corporate Banking and Financial Markets and Wealth Management

** prior periods have also been restated to reflect the transfer of certain business units within Manufacturing

2003 compared with 2002
Manufacturing’s costs increased by 6% or £113 million, to £1,875 million.

Group Technology costs have increased by 6% or £38 million to £651 million. This reflects business as usual cost growth and a specific improvement programme, the majority of the cost of which will be borne by Group Technology. This is already providing benefits across the Group and further investment opportunities have been identified which will lead to further efficiency benefits across the Group in 2004 and again in 2005.

The cost base of Group Purchasing and Property Operations rose by 9% or £51 million to £636 million, largely as a result of the continuing upgrade of the property portfolio in major UK centres to support the Group’s core business.

Customer Support and other operations costs were £588 million, 4% or £24 million higher than the previous year. This reflects further expansion of business operations with increased expenditure in customer support areas of Lending, Telephony, Payments and Security. In telephony, the Royal Bank of Scotland customer service proposition has been introduced to NatWest customers who can now choose between speaking to their local branch, to a customer service officer or using the automated telephone service.

2002 compared with 2001
Total manufacturing costs at £1,762 million were 7% or £116 million higher than 2001.

The increase in costs reflected growth in business volumes arising from customer accounts, mortgage applications, personal loans and ATM transactions, and initiatives to enhance customer service, particularly in NatWest telephony.

Manufacturing successfully completed the integration of NatWest on to the RBS technology platform in October 2002, ahead of schedule.

31



Operating and financial review continued

Wealth Management      
 2003
 £m
 2002*
£m
 2001*
£m
 






 
Net interest income465 460 464 
Non-interest income414 447 469 






 
Total income879 907 933 






 
Expenses      
   – staff costs275 301 282 
   – other157 163 175 






 
 432 464 457 






 
Contribution before provisions447 443 476 
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts – charge/(release)9 (11)(5)






 
Contribution438 454 481 
 




 
       
 £bn £bn £bn 






 
Total assets15.2 13.4 12.5 
Investment management assets – excluding deposits27.3 20.5 21.4 
Customer deposits29.3 29.1 29.1 
Weighted risk assets9.1 8.4 7.8 






 

* Prior periods have been restated following the transfer of certain activities to Manufacturing.

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution was £438 million, £16 million or 4% lower than 2002. Excluding the acquisition and disposals, income was up 1%, with contribution before provisions up 4%. The charge for provisions for bad and doubtful debts was £9 million compared with a net release of £11 million in 2002.

Total income was down by 3% or £28 million to £879 million.

Net interest income increased by 1% or £5 million to £465 million. The benefit from growth in lending volumes was partly negated by the effect of lower interest rates which also caused a tightening of deposit margins.

Non-interest income declined by 7% or £33 million to £414 million. Excluding the acquisition and disposals the decrease was 1%. This reflects the impact of lower equity markets adversely affecting fees and commissions.

Investment management assets increased by £6.8 billion or 33% to £27.3 billion principally due to the acquisition of Bank von Ernst in the year.

Expenses were down by 7% or £32 million to £432 million reflecting tight cost control in difficult market conditions and the 7% reduction in staff numbers since 31 December 2002.

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts were £9 million compared with a net release of £11 million in 2002.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution at £454 million was £27 million, 6% lower primarily due to the effect of the fall in equity markets on the level of activity and ad valorem fee income.

Total income was down 3% or £26 million to £907 million.

Net interest income declined by 1% or £4 million to £460 million, as a result of a slight contraction in deposit margins due to lower interest rates. Average customer deposits increased from £28.5 billion to £28.7 billion.

Non-interest income was £22 million, 5% lower at £447 million. This reflected lower equity markets which continued adversely to affect fees and commissions. Investment management assets at £20.5 billion were £0.9 billion, 4% lower as new business inflow was more than offset by the significant decline in equity markets.

Expenses were up 2% or £7 million to £464 million.

Releases and recoveries of provisions exceeded gross new provisions required. As a result, there was a net release of provisions of £11 million, against a net release of £5 million in 2001.

32





RBS Insurance (formerly Direct Line)      
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Earned premiums3,565 2,383 1,804 
Reinsurers’ share(504)(489)(429)






 
Insurance premium income3,061 1,894 1,375 
Net fees and commissions(99)65 26 
Other income283 180 142 






 
Total income3,245 2,139 1,543 






 
Expenses      
   – staff costs241 178 152 
   – other341 256 182 






 
 582 434 334 






 
Gross claims2,644 1,693 1,263 
Reinsurers’ share(449)(343)(315)






 
Net claims2,195 1,350 948 






 
Contribution468 355 261 
 




 






 
In-force policies (000’s)      
   – Motor: UK8,086 4,668 4,017 
   – Motor: International1,541 1,224 601 
   – Home: UK5,154 1,587 1,360 
       
Combined operating ratio – UK (%)91.6 89.4 88.0 
Gross insurance reserves – total (£m)6,582 3,002 2,370 






 

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution increased by 32% or £113 million to £468 million. Excluding Churchill, contribution increased by 26% or £92 million.

Total income was up 52% or £1,106 million to £3,245 million. Excluding Churchill, total income grew by 25% or £525 million.

After reinsurance, insurance premium income was up 62% or £1,167 million to £3,061 million. Excluding Churchill, insurance premium income (net of reinsurance) grew by 26% or £487 million. The number of UK in-force motor insurance policies increased by 3.4 million of which 3.1 million was from Churchill, while the number of UK in-force home insurance policies increased by 3.6 million including 3.4 million from Churchill. The number of international in-force motor policies increased by 317,000 during the year.

Other income net of commissions payable was down from £245 million to £184 million. Excluding Churchill, which included £148 million commissions payable to brokers and intermediaries, other income was up 16% or £38 million due to higher investment income, embedded value profits and share of associates profits.

Expenses increased by 34% or £148 million to £582 million. Excluding Churchill, expenses increased by 9% or £40 million. Staff numbers, excluding Churchill, increased by 4% (400) to support growth in business volumes, particularly in the partnership business.

Net claims, after reinsurance, increased by 63% or £845 million to £2,195 million. Excluding Churchill, net claims increased by 29% or £393 million.

UK combined operating ratio was 91.6%. Excluding Churchill, the UK ratio improved from 89.4% to 89.2%.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 36% or £94 million to £355 million.

Total income was up 39% or £596 million to £2,139 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added £73 million, total income was up 34% or £523 million.

After reinsurance, insurance premium income was up 38% or £519 million to £1,894 million, reflecting strong growth in customer numbers. The leading position in the UK direct motor insurance market was maintained with motor insurance policies increasing 16%, or 651,000 to 4.67 million. The number of UK in-force home insurance policies increased by 17% or 227,000 to 1.59 million. The number of international in-force motor policies more than doubled to 1.22 million, including 280,000 from acquisitions.

Other income increased by 46% or £77 million to £245 million. Higher investment income and profit commissions contributed to this increase.

Expenses increased by 30% or £100 million to £434 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added £35 million, expenses were up by 20% or £65 million reflecting business expansion.

Net claims, after reinsurance, increased by 42% or £402 million to £1,350 million reflecting increased volumes.

33



Operating and financial review continued

Ulster Bank      
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Net interest income396 339 313 
Non-interest income185 181 170 






 
Total income581 520 483 






 
Expenses      
   – staff costs164 145 135 
   – other112 109 104 






 
 276 254 239 






 
Contribution before provisions305 266 244 
Provisions32 22 15 






 
Contribution273 244 229 
 




 
       
 £bn £bn £bn 






 
Total assets15.6 12.7 10.8 
Loans and advances to customers – gross11.6 9.1 7.6 
Customer deposits9.7 8.8 7.7 
Weighted risk assets11.0 9.0 7.7 
       
Average exchange rate – €/£1.445 1.591 1.609 
Spot exchange rate – €/£1.416 1.536 1.637 






 

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution increased by 12% or £29 million to £273 million driven by strong volume growth in both loan and deposit products. The number of customers increased in 2003 by 36,000.

Total income increased by 12% or £61 million to £581 million reflecting the strong volume growth, in particular residential mortgages.

Net interest income rose by 17% or £57 million to £396 million, reflecting strong growth in both average customer lending and deposits which increased by 26% or £2.1 billion, to £10.1 billion and by 13% or £1.0 billion, to £8.9 billion respectively.

Non-interest income increased by £4 million to £185 million. Strong growth in lending, transmission and card fee income was partially offset by lower dealing profits. Uncertainty in equity markets adversely affected brokerage fees in the stockbroking business which was sold in October 2003.

Expenses increased by 9% or £22 million to £276 million. This reflected the annual pay award and the additional costs to support increased business volumes.

The charge for provisions for bad debts was up £10 million to £32 million reflecting growth in lending.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 7%, or £15 million to £244 million.

Total income increased by 8%, £37 million to £520 million.

Net interest income rose by 8% or £26 million to £339 million, reflecting good growth in loans and deposits despite a less buoyant economic environment in the Republic of Ireland. Average customer lending and deposits of the banking business increased by 10%, £0.7 billion, to £8.0 billion, and by 7%, £0.5 billion, to £7.9 billion respectively. Average mortgage lending grew by 23% to £1.5 billion and the number of current accounts increased by 5%.

Non-interest income rose by 6% or £11 million to £181 million. Increases of £7 million in net fees and commissions and £6 million in other operating income were partially offset by a £2 million reduction in dealing profits.

Expenses increased by 6% or £15 million to £254 million to support higher business volumes and pay awards.

Provisions were up by £7 million to £22 million reflecting a small number of specific situations.

34



Citizens       
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Net interest income1,310 1,248 814 
Non-interest income514 468 306 






 
Total income1,824 1,716 1,120 






 
Expenses      
   – staff costs505 485 305 
   – other374 370 245 






 
 879 855 550 






 
Contribution before provisions945 861 570 
Provisions88 95 69 






 
Contribution857 766 501 
 




 
       
 $bn $bn $bn 






 
Total assets76.8 61.1 52.4 
Loans and advances to customers – gross43.5 31.4 26.3 
Customer deposits62.8 51.1 42.8 
Weighted risk assets50.8 38.8 35.8 
       
Average exchange rate – $/£1.635 1.503 1.440 
Spot exchange rate – $/£1.786 1.613 1.450 






 

2003 compared with 2002
Contribution which increased by 12% or £91 million to £857 million was diminished by the weakening of the US dollar in relation to sterling. In US dollar terms, contribution increased by 22% or $250 million to $1,401 million.

Total income was up 16% or $406 million to $2,984 million.

Net interest income increased by 14% or $268 million to $2,143 million. Excluding the acquisitions, net interest income was up 9% or $164 million (£100 million), reflecting strong organic growth in personal loans and deposits. Excluding the acquisitions, average loans were up 29% or $8.0 billion and average deposits were up 20% or $9.1 billion. The benefit of this growth was reduced by a narrowing interest margin due to reductions in US interest rates.

Non-interest income rose by 20% or $138 million to $841 million. Excluding the acquisitions, non-interest income was up 16% or $115 million (£70 million).

Expenses increased by 12% or $153 million to $1,438 million. Excluding the acquisitions, expenses increased by 8% or $102 million (£62 million), to support higher business volumes and expansion of Citizens’ supermarket banking programme.

Provisions were up $3 million from $142 million to $145 million. Excluding the acquisitions, provisions were $2 million (£1 million), or 1%, lower than 2002. Credit quality metrics remain strong and total non-performing loans were 0.40% of total loans and advances at 31 December 2003 compared with 0.57% at the end of 2002.

In 2003, Citizens increased its personal customer base by 376,000 accounts and its business customers by 36,000 due to growth through both traditional and supermarket branches, and the acquisition of Commonwealth Bancorp, Inc., Port Financial Corp. and Community Bancorp, Inc.

2002 compared with 2001
Contribution increased by 53% or £265 million to £766 million. In US dollar terms, contribution increased by 60% or $431 million to $1,151 million. Excluding the incremental contribution of $331 million from the Mellon Regional Franchise and Medford (the “acquisitions”), the contribution increased by 14% or $100 million (£67 million).

Total income was up 60% or $966 million to $2,578 million. Excluding acquisitions, organic income growth was up 15% or $238 million.

Net interest income rose by 60% or $703 million to $1,875 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added $546 million, net interest income was up 14% or $157 million (£104 million), as a result of strong organic growth in customer loans and deposits.

Non-interest income rose by 60% or $263 million to $703 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added $183 million, non-interest income was up 19% or $80 million (£53 million), as a result of growth in deposit service charges and mortgage banking.

Expenses increased by 62% or $492 million to $1,285 million. Excluding acquisitions, which added $385 million, expenses increased by 14% or $107 million (£71 million), to support higher business volumes. Citizens increased its in-store banking activities by opening new branches in 58 Stop&Shop supermarkets. The cost of establishing presence in these stores contributed to the increase in operating expenses.

Provisions were up from $99 million to $142 million. Excluding the Mellon Regional Franchise which added $15 million, provisions were broadly consistent with the second half of 2001.

35



Operating and financial review continued

Central items       
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Funding costs215 215 211 
Departmental and corporate costs414 372 275 






 
Total Central items629 587 486 
 




 

2003 compared with 2002
Total Central items increased by £42 million to £629 million.

Funding costs at £215 million, were unchanged. Increased income from higher shareholders’ funds was offset by the funding costs associated with the acquisition of Churchill in September 2003 and the £1.5 billion AVS dividend paid in December 2003.

Central departmental costs and other corporate items at £414 million were £42 million or 11% higher than 2002. This is partly due to staff costs and other costs relating to certain departments such as Customer Relations which have been centralised and additional resources devoted to Group wide projects such as preparations for the implementation of Basel II and International Accounting Standards.

2002 compared with 2001
Total Central items increased by £101 million to £587 million.

Funding costs, which include interest on the perpetual regulatory tier one securities issued in August 2001 of £60 million (2001 – £23 million) were similar to the previous year. This reflected the benefit of retained earnings and lower interest rates.

Central departmental costs and other corporate items increased to £372 million compared with £275 million in 2001, which benefited from certain one off items.

36



Employee numbers at 31 December       
 2003 2002 2001 






 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets*15,900 16,900 12,800 
Retail Banking30,700 30,100 30,500 
Retail Direct7,300 7,000 6,200 
Manufacturing*21,800 21,900 22,800 
Wealth Management*5,600 6,000 6,600 
RBS Insurance19,400 10,500 9,200 
Ulster Bank4,400 4,400 4,500 
Citizens14,100 13,300 11,500 
Centre1,700 1,700 1,600 






 
Group total120,900 111,800 105,700 
Acquisitions in the year9,700 5,600 5,000 






 
Underlying111,200 106,200 100,700 
 




 

* Prior periods have been restated to reflect the transfer in 2003 of certain activities from Corporate Banking and Financial Markets and Wealth Management to Manufacturing.

2003 compared with 2002
The number of employees increased by 9,100, 8% to 120,900. The acquisition of Churchill added 8,500 staff in RBS Insurance.

2002 compared with 2001
The number of employees increased by 6,100, 6% to 111,800 reflecting business growth and 5,600 from acquisitions, offset by staff reductions from integration.

37



Operating and financial review continued

Consolidated balance sheet
at 31 December 2003
    
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Assets    
Cash and balances at central banks3,822 3,481 
Items in the course of collection from other banks2,501 2,741 
Treasury bills and other eligible bills4,846 11,459 
Loans and advances to banks51,891 44,296 
Loans and advances to customers252,531 223,324 
Debt securities79,949 67,042 
Equity shares2,300 1,886 
Interests in associated undertakings106 94 
Intangible fixed assets13,131 12,697 
Tangible fixed assets13,927 10,485 
Settlement balances2,857 4,102 
Other assets18,436 16,929 
Prepayments and accrued income5,421 4,353 




 
 451,718 402,889 
Long-term assurance assets attributable to policyholders3,557 9,111 




 
Total assets455,275 412,000 
 


 
     
Liabilities    
Deposits by banks67,323 54,720 
Items in the course of transmission to other banks958 1,258 
Customer accounts236,963 219,161 
Debt securities in issue41,016 33,938 
Settlement balances and short positions21,369 19,412 
Other liabilities20,584 20,754 
Accruals and deferred income13,173 8,626 
Provisions for liabilities and charges2,522 2,164 
Subordinated liabilities16,998 13,965 
Minority interests    
– equity(11)(11)
– non-equity2,724 1,850 
Shareholders’ funds    
– equity25,176 23,545 
– non-equity2,923 3,507 




 
 451,718 402,889 
Long-term assurance liabilities attributable to policyholders3,557 9,111 




 
Total liabilities455,275 412,000 
 


 
     
Analysis of repurchase agreements included above    
     
Reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing    




 
Loans and advances to banks26,522 20,578 
Loans and advances to customers24,069 21,941 




 
 50,591 42,519 
 


 
     
Repurchase agreements and stock lending    




 
Deposits by banks27,044 20,097 
Customer accounts27,021 25,060 




 
 54,065 45,157 
 


 

38



Overview of consolidated balance sheet

Total assets of £455.3 billion at 31 December 2003 were up £43.3 billion, 11%, compared with 31 December 2002, reflecting business growth.

Treasury bills and other eligible bills decreased by £6.6 billion, 58%, to £4.8 billion, reflecting liquidity management.

Loans and advances to banks rose £7.6 billion, 17%, to £51.9 billion. Growth in bank placings, up £1.7 billion, 7% to £25.4 billion, and reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing (“reverse repos”), up £5.9 billion, 29%, to £26.5 billion, were due in part to a switch from treasury bills and other eligible bills.

Loans and advances to customers were up £29.2 billion, 13%, to £252.5 billion. Within this, reverse repos increased by 10%, £2.1 billion to £24.1 billion. Excluding reverse repos, lending increased by £27.1 billion, 13% to £228.4 billion with growth in all divisions.

Debt securities increased by £12.9 billion, 19%, to £79.9 billion, principally due to increased holdings in Financial Markets together with growth in Wealth Management’s investment portfolio of investment grade asset-backed securities, Citizens’ portfolio of US government and agency securities and the acquisition of Churchill.

Equity shares rose £0.4 billion, 22% to £2.3 billion largely to support an increase in Financial Markets equity derivatives business.

Intangible fixed assets increased by £0.4 billion, 3% to £13.1 billion. Goodwill arising on the acquisitions made during the year amounted to £1.5 billion, principally in respect of Churchill, £0.8 billion and Citizens’ acquisitions, £0.4 billion. This was partially offset by goodwill amortisation, £0.8 billion and the adverse effect of exchange rate movements, £0.3 billion.

Tangible fixed assets were up £3.4 billion, 33% to £13.9 billion, primarily due to growth in operating lease assets, up £1.1 billion, 20% to £6.4 billion, and the acquisition of various investment properties.

Other assets rose by £1.5 billion, 9% to £18.4 billion, mainly due to growth in the mark-to-market value of trading derivatives.

Long-term assurance assets and liabilities declined £5.6 billion, 61% to £3.6 billion, resulting from the transfer of the pension managed fund business of NatWest Life to another third party life company.

Deposits by banks increased by £12.6 billion, 23% to £67.3 billion to fund business growth, with repurchase agreements and stock lending (“repos”) up £6.9 billion, 35%, to £27.0 billion and inter-bank deposits up £5.7 billion, 16% to £40.3 billion.

Customer accounts were up £17.8 billion, 8% at £237.0 billion. Within this, repos were up £2.0 billion, 8% to £27.0 billion. Excluding repos, deposits rose by £15.8 billion, 8%, to £210.0 billion with growth mainly in CBFM, £6.4 billion, Retail Banking, £4.6 billion, Citizens, £3.2 billion and Ulster Bank £0.9 billion. In $ terms, Citizens grew US$11.7 billion, 23%, of which, US$3.2 billion related to acquisitions.

Debt securities in issue were up £7.1 billion, 21%, at £41.0 billion primarily to meet the Group’s funding requirements.

Subordinated liabilities were up £3.0 billion, 22% to £17.0 billion. This reflected the issue of £1.6 billion (2,250 million) euro denominated and £0.7 billion (US$1,100 million) US$ denominated dated loan capital, and £1.1 billion sterling denominated and £0.5 billion (US$850 million) US$ denominated, undated loan capital. This was partially offset by the £0.4 billion (US$500 million and £40 million) redemption of dated loan capital and the effect of exchange rate movements, £0.5 billion.

Minority interests increased by £0.9 billion, 48%, to £2.7 billion, mainly reflecting the issues by subsidiaries of the Group of US$850 million (£0.5 billion) Series I non-cumulative trust preferred securities in May 2003 and US$650 million (£0.4 billion) Series II non-cumulative trust preferred securities in December 2003.

Shareholders’ funds rose £1.0 billion, 4% to £28.1 billion principally due to retentions of £0.8 billion and the issue of £0.8 billion of equity shares in respect of scrip dividends and the exercise of share options, partly offset by the redemption of £0.4 billion non-equity preference shares in January 2003 and the adverse effect of exchange rate movements on share premium account, £0.2 billion.

39



Operating and financial review continued

Cash flow      
 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Net cash inflow from operating activities19,708 13,737 7,287 
Dividends received from associated undertakings9 1 1 
Returns on investments and servicing of finance(956)(1,103)(1,048)
Taxation(1,454)(1,107)(1,209)
Capital expenditure and financial investment(6,965)(9,185)(10,337)
Acquisitions and disposals(1,571)(281)(1,653)
Equity and AVS dividends paid(2,235)(1,527)(1,052)
Financing4,128 2,711 4,411 






 
Increase/(decrease) in cash10,664 3,246 (3,600)
 




 

2003
The major factors contributing to the net cash inflow of £19,708 million from operating activities in 2003 were the profit before tax of £6,159 million, increases in deposits and debt securities in issue of £33,935 million, increases in short positions and settlement balances of £3,202 million and decreases in treasury and other eligible bills of £6,626 million, partially offset by the net increase in loans and advances of £23,343 million and increases in securities of £9,871 million.

Interest on subordinated liabilities of £557 million and dividends of £399 million to preference and minority shareholders were paid during the year.

Net purchases of investment securities of £3,056 million and fixed assets of £3,909 million, including operating lease assets and investment properties, comprised the net cash outflow from capital expenditure and financial investment.

Equity and Additional Value Shares (‘AVS’) dividends paid includes the final dividend on the AVS of £1,463 million.

The issue of £883 million trust preferred securities and £3,817 million subordinated debt, partially offset by the redemption of preference shares of £364 million and repayment of £336 million of subordinated debt were the main contributors to the net cash inflow from financing of £4,128 million.

2002
The major factors contributing to the net cash inflow of £13,737 million from operating activities in 2002 were the profit before tax of £4,763 million and an increase in deposits, debt securities in issue and other liabilities of £40,981 million, which were partially offset by the increase in loans and advances of £35,426 million.

Interest on subordinated liabilities of £674 million and dividends of £429 million to preference and minority shareholders were paid during the year.

Net purchases of investment securities of £6,629 million and fixed assets of £2,556 million, including operating lease assets,comprised the net cash outflow from capital expenditure and financial investment.

Equity and AVS dividends paid includes the second dividend on the AVS of £798 million.

The issue of £1,242 million trust preferred securities and £2,157 million subordinated debt, partially offset by the redemption of preference shares of £600 million and repayment of £202 million of subordinated debt were the main contributors to the net cash inflow from financing of £2,711 million.

2001
Profit before tax of £4,252 million and an increase of £27,450 million in deposits and debt securities in issue together with an increase in short positions and settlement balances of £3,644 million, partially offset by increases in loans and advances of £22,823 million and in treasury and other eligible bills of £6,796 million, were the major factors in the net cash inflow from operating activities of £7,287 million.

Interest on subordinated liabilities of £652 million and dividends of £396 million to preference and minority shareholders were paid during the year.

Net cash outflow from capital expenditure and financial investment consisted of net purchases of investment securities of £6,959 million and fixed assets, including operating lease assets, of £3,378 million.

Equity and AVS dividends paid includes the first dividend on the AVS of £399 million.

The issue of £2,705 million of subordinated debt and £2,131 million proceeds from the issue of shares, including a market placing of £2,007 million, in July 2001, to fund the acquisition of the Mellon Regional Franchise, were the main contributors to the net cash inflow from financing of £4,411 million.

40



UK GAAP compared with US GAAP

The Group’s financial statements are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP, which differs in certain material respects from US GAAP as described on pages 136 to 148.

The net income available for ordinary shareholders under US GAAP was £2,564 million, £249 million higher than profit attributable to ordinary shareholders under UK GAAP of £2,315 million. The principal reasons for the increase are:

  • Goodwill amortisation is charged to the profit and loss under UK GAAP, whereas under US GAAP only intangible assets other than goodwill are amortised, resulting in an increase in net income before tax of £721 million.

  • Certain software development costs have been charged to the profit and loss account under UK GAAP; under US GAAP such costs are capitalised and depreciated over the estimated useful life of the software, resulting in a net decrease in net income before tax of £300 million.

Capital resources

The following table analyses the Group’s regulatory capital resources at the period end:

 31 December
 2003
 £m
 31 December
 2002
 £m
 31 December
 2001
 £m
 31 December
 2000
 £m
 30 September
1999
 £m
 










 
Capital base          
Tier 1 capital19,399 17,155 15,052 12,071 4,605 
Tier 2 capital16,439 13,271 11,734 10,082 3,256 
Tier 3 capital  172 167  










 
 35,838 30,426 26,958 22,320 7,861 
           
Less: investments in insurance
subsidiaries, associated undertakings
and other supervisory deductions
(4,618)(3,146)(2,698)(2,228)(1,011)










 
Total capital31,220 27,280 24,260 20,092 6,850 
 








 
           
Weighted risk assets          
Banking book:          
   On-balance sheet214,400 193,800 176,000 146,600 51,200 
   Off-balance sheet36,400 28,700 22,000 16,200 4,200 
Trading book12,900 11,500 12,500 12,400 1,400 










 
 263,700 234,000 210,500 175,200 56,800 
 








 
           
Risk asset ratios% % % % % 










 
Tier 17.4 7.3 7.1 6.9 8.1 
Total11.8 11.7 11.5 11.5 12.1 










 

It is the Group’s policy to maintain a strong capital base, to expand it as appropriate and to utilise it efficiently throughout its activities to optimise the return to shareholders while maintaining a prudent relationship between the capital base and the underlying risks of the business. In carrying out this policy, the Group has regard to the supervisory requirements of the Financial Services Authority (“FSA”). The FSA uses Risk Asset Ratio (“RAR”) as a measure of capital adequacy in theUK banking sector, comparing a bank’s capital resources with its weighted risk assets (the assets and off-balance sheet exposures are ‘weighted’ to reflect the inherent credit and other risks); by international agreement, the RAR should be not less than 8% with a tier 1 component of not less than 4%. At 31 December 2003, the Group’s total RAR was 11.8% (2002 –11.7%) and the tier 1 RAR was 7.4% (2002 – 7.3%).

41



Operating and financial review continued

Risk management

Framework

A number of high-level committees support the Board in the effective measurement and management of risk. Board subcommittees have the following roles and responsibilities for managing risk, capital and liquidity:

  • Group Audit Committee – is a non-executive committee that supports the Board in carrying out its responsibilities for internal control and risk assessment. The Group Audit Committee monitors the ongoing process of the identification, evaluation and management of all significant risks throughout the Group. The Committee provides an independent review of risk management and controls. The Committee is supported by Group Internal Audit which provides an independent assessment of the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls.

  • Advances Committee – is an executive committee that deals with all transactions that exceed the Group Credit Committee’s delegated authority, which in turn approves facility limits in excess of the authorities delegated to divisional credit committees.

In addition to the responsibilities at Board level outlined above, operational authority and oversight is delegated to the Group Executive Management Committee (“GEMC”), which is responsible for implementing a risk management framework consistent with the Board's risk appetite. The GEMC, in turn, is supported by:

  • Group Risk Committee (“GRC”), which recommends and approves limits, processes and policies in respect of the effective management of all material risks across the Group.

  • Group Asset and Liability Management Committee (“GALCO”) which is responsible for reviewing the balance sheet, funding and capital implications of the Group's strategy and operations. In addition, GALCO monitors and reviews legal, regulatory and accounting developments affecting balance sheet risks and capital. It also reviews the effect of external, economic and environmental changes on the Group's balance sheet, risks, margins and capital.
  • Group Risk Management (“GRM”) reports to the GEMC through the Group Finance Director and is responsible for credit, market and enterprise risk measurement and controls across the Group. An assessment of the adequacy and effectiveness of each divisional risk management team is undertaken by GRM on a continuous basis to ensure effective control of risks. Each divisional risk function has a direct reporting line to the Director of Group Risk Management, which reinforces these controls and ensures independence of risk management within each division.

  • Group Treasury (“GT”) also reports to the GEMC through the Group Finance Director, and is responsible for the management of the Group’s balance sheet, capital raising, liquidity and hedging policies. GT assesses and monitors the effectiveness of the divisional asset and liability management teams.

GRM and GT also respond to various regulatory developments affecting risk, capital and liquidity management. This includes working with international and domestic trade associations, being active with various regulators, especially the FSA, and encouraging discussions with the main regulatory and political groups, such as the Basel Committee and the EU Commission.

The principal risks that the Group manages are as follows:

  • Credit risk

  • Liquidity risk

  • Market risk

  • Insurance risk

  • Enterprise risk

42




Credit risk

Credit risk is the risk arising from the possibility that the Group will incur losses from the failure of customers to meet their obligations.

The credit risk framework

The management of credit risk is undertaken within an agreed and regulated Credit Risk Framework which is defined in the Group’s ‘Principles for Managing Credit Risk’. These set out minimum standards for managing credit risk including principles for maintaining the credit risk framework, approving credit risk taken by the Group, credit stewardship and reviewing the effectiveness of the credit culture. These standards are used to manage the Group’s portfolio of risk assets.

All credit risk exposures require approval by authorised individuals or credit committees, independent of business revenue generation. Existing credit risk exposures are monitored and reviewed periodically against approved risk limits. Review occurs at least annually with the lower quality exposures being subject to greater frequency of analysis and assessment. Exposures below specified thresholds and meeting specific criteria can be approved through authorised largely automated processes.

Different credit approval processes exist for each customer type in order to ensure appropriate skills and resources are employed in credit assessment and approval. Risk exposures are aggregated to determine the appropriate level of credit approval required and to facilitate consolidated credit risk management:

  • Retail and personal businesses employ market best practice credit scoring techniques to process small scale, large volume credit decisions. Insights from such systems are combined with management judgement to ensure an effective ongoing process of approval, review and enhancement. Credit decisions for loans above specified thresholds, including lending to SMEs, are individually assessed.

  • Corporate businesses are assessed using the judgement of the relationship managers, supported by an independent internal dedicated analysis team. A range of risk rating models have been developed to facilitate risk assessments for both borrower and transaction risk. Specialist internal credit risk departments independently oversee the credit process and make decisions or recommendations to the appropriate credit committee. Credit authority is not extended to relationship managers.

  • Financial Markets counterparties are approved by a dedicated credit function, with expertise in traded market product risk and which also specialises in the analysis and assessment of financial market counterparties.

GRM and the GEMC review the reports on the Group’s portfolio of credit risks on a monthly basis.

43




Operating and financial review continued

Credit risk (continued)

Risk asset quality

Internal reporting and oversight of risk assets is principally differentiated by credit ratings. Internal ratings are used to assess the credit quality of borrowers. Customers are assigned credit ratings, based on statistical and judgemental rating systems that map to a Group asset quality scale reflecting the probability of default.

Asset qualityS&P equivalent

   AQ1AAA to BBB-
   AQ2BB+ to BB
   AQ3BB- to B+
   AQ4B+ to B
   AQ5B and below

As at December 2003, exposure to investment grade counterparties (AQ1) accounted for over half of risk assets. Over 97% of exposures were to counterparties rated AQ4 or higher.

Loans and advances

The Group’s loan portfolio consists of loans (including overdraft facilities), instalment credit and finance lease receivables. The value of loans and advances to customers as at 31 December 2003 was £256,453 million (2002 – £227,244 million), representing an increase of £29,209 million (13%) over the year. Including banks, total loans and advances at 31 December 2003 was £308,351 million (2002 –£271,547 million), an increase of 14%.

Loans and advances – gross2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Loans and advances to customers by division – gross      
CBFM128,124 117,365 95,096 
Retail61,809 55,619 49,026 
Retail Direct22,024 19,350 17,081 
Wealth Management7,894 7,267 6,815 
Ulster Bank11,633 9,111 7,608 
Citizens24,384 19,457 18,138 
Other585 (925)373 






 
Loans and advances to customers – gross256,453 227,244 194,137 
       
Loans and advances to banks – gross51,898 44,303 38,521 






 
Total loans and advances – gross308,351 271,547 232,658 
 




 

44




•  Industry analysis

Industry analysis plays an important part in assessing concentrations within the loan portfolio. Particular attention is given to industry sectors where the Group believes there is a higher degree of risk or potential for volatility in the future.

Loans and advances to customers by industry2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Central and local government2,100 2,385 1,419 
Finance38,936 34,079 21,462 
Individuals – home mortgages61,960 49,986 41,641 
                 – other35,027 30,021 22,403 
Other commercial and industrial comprising:      
Manufacturing12,769 14,715 15,427 
Construction5,839 5,152 5,199 
Service industries and business activities50,772 48,155 49,118 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing3,081 3,026 2,940 
Property31,629 26,593 22,380 
Finance leases and instalment credit14,340 13,132 12,148 






 
Total loans and advances to customers – gross256,453 227,244 194,137 
 




 
       
       
Together, corporates, financial institutions and sovereigns, account for 62% of loans and advances. The remaining exposures, accounting for 38% of loans and advances, relate to personal and retail customers, especially mortgage lending and other small loans that are intrinsically highly diversified.

•  Geographic analysis

Although the Group is active in over twenty different countries, its principal focus is on the UK, US and Europe.

Geographically, 92% of loans and advances to customers fall within the UK or US, both of which have experienced stable or improving economic growth. Europe accounts for about 8% of exposures.

Loans and advances to customers by geography2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
UK194,545 168,931 151,814 
US40,373 41,008 29,230 
Europe19,842 15,572 11,627 
Rest of the World1,693 1,733 1,466 






 
Total loans and advances to customers – gross256,453 227,244 194,137 
 




 
Notes: 
(1) The geographic analysis is based on location of office. The UK includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

45



Operating and financial review continued

Credit risk (continued)

•  Cross border exposures

Cross border exposures are defined as loans to banks and customers (including finance lease and instalment credit receivables) and other monetary assets, including non-local currency claims of overseas offices on local residents.

The Group monitors the geographical breakdown of these exposures based on the country of domicile of the borrower or guarantor of ultimate risk.

The table below sets out the Group’s cross border outstandings in excess of 0.75% of Group total assets (including acceptances), which totalled £455.9 billion (2002 – £414.4 billion; 2001 – £371.7 billion). None of these countries has experienced repayment difficulties that have required refinancing of outstanding debt.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Geographical analysis:      
   Germany15,073 10,464 7,969 
   United States14,618 11,658 8,901 
   France7,524 5,971 4,930 
   Netherlands6,830 6,318 4,596 
   Cayman Islands6,666 6,897 5,501 
   Japan4,141 3,156 * 
   Spain3,421 * * 
   Italy* 3,867 * 
   Switzerland* * 3,646 






 

* Less than 0.75% of Group total assets (including acceptances).

Selected country exposures

The Group devotes particular attention to those countries that have been adversely affected by global economic pressure. The table below details exposures to countries that are considered as having a higher credit and foreign exchange risk.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Argentina      
   Bank26 30 39 
   Non-bank4 15 12 
Brazil      
   Bank15  158 
   Non-bank2 14 22 
Turkey      
   Bank5 25 38 
   Non-bank65 65 102 
Venezuela      
   Bank   
   Non-bank87 115 99 






 

46



Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans

The table below sets out the Group’s loans that are classified as non-accrual, accruing past due and restructured loans (together risk elements in lending (REIL)) or potential problem loans (PPL) as defined by the SEC in the US. The figures incorporate estimates and are stated before the value of security held or related provisions.

REIL and PPL2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Non-accrual loans (2)4,432 4,175 3,566 
Accrual loans past due 90 days (3)642 492 785 
Troubled debt restructurings83 204 142 






 
Total REIL5,157 4,871 4,493 
       
PPL (4)591 1,183 1,080 






 
Total REIL and PPL5,748 6,054 5,573 
 




 
Notes: 
(1) The classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not necessarily indicate that the principal of the loan is uncollectable in whole or in part. Collection depends in each case on the individual circumstances of the loan, including the adequacy of any collateral securing the loan and therefore classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not always require that a provision be made against such a loan. In accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts, it is considered that adequate provisions for the above risk elements in lending have been made.
(2) The Group’s UK banking subsidiary undertakings account for loans on a non-accrual basis from the point in time at which the collectability of interest is in significant doubt. Certain subsidiary undertakings of the Group, principally Citizens, generally account for loans on a non-accrual basis when interest or principal is past due 90 days.
(3) Overdrafts generally have no fixed repayment schedule and consequently are not included in this category.
(4) Loans which are current as to the payment of principal and interest but in respect of which management have serious doubts about the ability of the borrowers to comply with contractual repayment terms. Substantial security is held in respect of these loans and appropriate provisions have already been made in accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts.
  
  

REIL increased to £5,157 million (a rise of 6% compared with 2002). REIL as a proportion of total loans and advances to customers was 2.01% in 2003 (2002 – 2.14%; 2001 – 2.31%), reflecting active risk management and improvements in the economic environment in the Group’s key markets.

These factors also contributed to a reduction of 5% in the aggregate amount of PPL and REIL which together account for 2.24% of loans and advances to customers (2002 – 2.66%; 2001 – 2.87%).

47




Operating and financial review continued

Credit risk (continued)
Provisions
The Group provides for losses in its loan portfolio so as to record impaired loans and advances at their expected ultimate net realisable value. The objective is to set provisions based on the current understanding of the portfolio. To reach this understanding, retail and corporate loans and advances are treated separately.

The Group’s retail portfolios which consist of small value, high volume credits have highly efficient largely automated processes for identifying problem credits and very short timescales, typically three months, before resolution or adoption of various recovery measures.

Corporate portfolios consist of higher value, lower volume credits, which tend to be structured to meet individual customers requirements. These portfolios do not have an automated provisioning process, relying on individual expert judgement, controls and oversight to identify problems.

Early and proactive management of problem exposures ensures that credit losses are minimised. Specialised units are used for different customer types to ensure that the appropriate risk mitigation is taken in a timely manner.

Specific and general provisions
Provisions fall into one of two categories, specific or general:

  • Specific provisions: arise when the creditworthiness of a borrower has undergone a significant deterioration and the recovery of the advance is in significant doubt. The amount of specific provision will reflect the financial condition of the borrower, the realisable value of security and the costs of recovery.

  • General provisions: cover losses that have not yet been specifically identified but are known from experience to be present in any portfolio of loans. The level of general provision reflects the size and diversity of the Group’s loan portfolio, past experience, the current state of the economies in which the Group operates and the scope of specific provisioning procedures.
Summary of provisions2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Specific provision13,356 3,323 3,031 
General provision566 597 614 






 
Total bad and doubtful debt provisions3,922 3,920 3,645 
 




 
       
Total loans and advances to customers256,453 227,244 194,137 
 




 
       
Specific provision as a percentage of loans and advances to customers1.31%1.46%1.56%
General provision as a percentage of loans and advances to customers0.22%0.26%0.32%






 
Total provisions as a percentage of loans and advances to customers1.53%1.72%1.88%
 




 
       
Closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts expressed as a:      
% of REIL76%81%81%
% of REIL and PPL68%65%66%






 

(1) Excludes specific provisions against loans and advances to banks of £7 million (2002 – £7 million; 2001 – £8 million)

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts at the end of 2003 were broadly unchanged from the previous year end. The increase in provisions of £1,461 million through the charge to the profit and loss account was substantially offset by the amounts written-off, net of recoveries, of £1,447 million. This, coupled with the growth in the portfolio, led to a reduction in the ratio of provisions to loans and advances to customers from 1.72% at the end of 2002 to 1.53%.

The coverage ratio of closing provisions as a percentage of REIL has reduced to 76% from 81% at the end of 2002. This isdue to a slight shift in the composition of REIL away from larger corporate customers, against which the Group typically holds less security and thus requires higher provisions proportionately, and into smaller mid-corporate customers against which the Group tends to hold higher levels of security.

The coverage ratio of total closing provisions as a percentage of PPL and REIL has increased to 68% from 65% and 66% at the end of 2002 and 2001 respectively.

48



Analysis of specific provisions
The table below shows specific provisions by industry and geographic area.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Industry:      
    Finance65 125 109 
    Individuals – home mortgages37 67 69 
    Individuals – other1,159 955 924 
    Other commercial and industrial2,095 2,176 1,929 






 
 3,356 3,323 3,031 
 




 
Geography:      
   UK2,507 2,615 2,376 
   US609 556 494 
   Europe224 110 82 
   Rest of the World16 42 79 






 
 3,356 3,323 3,031 
 




 
Notes: 
(1) Excludes specific provisions against loans and advances to banks of £7 million (2002 – £7 million; 2001 – £8 million).
(2) The geographic analysis is based on location of office. The UK includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

Amounts written off and recovered
The table below shows the amounts written off by industry and geographical area.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Industry:      
    Finance66 44 10 
    Individuals – home mortgages2 2 3 
    Individuals – other415 391 333 
    Other commercial and industrial1,036 598 483 






 
 1,519 1,035 829 
 




 
       
Geography:      
   UK1,333 803 669 
   US156 164 85 
   Europe15 40 20 
   Rest of the World15 28 55 






 
Total amounts written off1,519 1,035 829 
 




 
Notes: 
(1) Excludes amounts written off in respect of banks of nil (2002 – £1 million; 2001 – £6 million).
(2) The geographic analysis is based on location of office. The UK includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

The following table shows amounts previously written off and subsequently recovered during the year by industry and geographical area.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Industry:      
    Finance1  1 
    Individuals – other42 41 52 
    Other commercial and industrial29 22 27 






 
 72 63 80 
 




 
       
Geography:      
   UK38 37 55 
   US25 21 17 
   Europe4 4 7 
   Rest of the World5 1 1 






 
Total recoveries72 63 80 
 




 
Notes: 
(1)The geographic analysis is based on location of office. The UK includes domestic transactions and transactions conducted through the offices in the UK which service international banking transactions.

49



Operating and financial review continued

Liquidity risk
Liquidity management
Liquidity management within the Group focuses on both overall balance sheet structure and the control, within prudent limits, of risk arising from the mismatch of maturities across the balance sheet and from commitments and contingent obligations.

The management of liquidity risk within the Group is undertaken within limits and other policy parameters set by GALCO, who review monthly and receive on an exception basis reports detailing compliance with those policy parameters. A weekly report is also provided to the Group’s executive management. Compliance is monitored and co-ordinated daily under the stewardship of the Group Treasury function, both in respect of internal policy and the regulatory requirements of the Financial Services Authority. Detailed liquidity position reports are compiled each day by Group Treasury and reviewed daily and weekly with Financial Markets, who manage day-to-day and intra-day market execution within the policy parameters set.

In addition to their consolidation within the Group’s daily liquidity management processes, it is also the responsibility of all Group subsidiaries and branches outside the UK to ensure compliance with any separate local regulatory liquidity requirements where applicable.

The structure of the Group’s balance sheet is managed to maintain substantial diversification, to minimise concentration across its various deposit sources, and to contain the level of reliance on total and net short-term wholesale sources of funds within prudent levels.

The short-term maturity structure of the Group’s assets and liabilities is also managed on a daily basis to ensure that contractual cash flow obligations, and potential cash flows arising from undrawn commitments and other contingent obligations, can be met as they arise day to day, either from cash inflows from maturing assets, new borrowing or from the sale or repurchase of debt securities held.

Short-term liquidity risk is managed on a consolidated basis for the whole Group excluding the activities of Citizens and insurance businesses in the UK, which are subject to regulatory regimes that necessitate the separate management of liquidity.

Internal liquidity mismatch limits are set for all other subsidiaries and non-UK branches which have material local treasury activities in external markets, to ensure those activities do not compromise daily maintenance of the Group’s overall liquidity risk position within the Group’s policy parameters.

The level of large deposits taken from banks, corporate customers, non-bank financial institutions and other customers and significant cash outflows are also reviewed to monitor concentrations and identify any adverse trends.

The degree of maturity mismatch within the overall long-term structure of the Group’s assets and liabilities is also managed within internal policy limits, to ensure that term asset commitments may be funded on an economic basis over their life. In managing its overall term structure, the Group analyses and takes into account the effect of retail and corporate customer behaviour on actual asset and liability maturities where they differ materially from the underlying contractual maturities.

The Group also periodically evaluates various scenarios and undertakes stress tests to analyse the potential impact on its liquidity risk. Contingency plans are maintained to anticipate and respond to any approaching or actual material deterioration in market conditions.

50



Sources of funding
Excluding capital and other liabilities, customer accounts continue to provide a substantial majority of the Group’s funding and represent a well diversified and stable source of funds from a wide range of retail, corporate and non-bank institutional customers.

 2003
 £m
 % 2002
 £m
 % 2001
 £m
 % 












 
Customer accounts (excluding repos):            
   Repayable on demand141,560 39 127,320 39 115,054 41 
   Time deposits68,382 19 66,781 21 66,486 23 












 
Total customer accounts (excluding repos)209,942 58 194,101 60 181,540 64 
Repo agreements with customers27,021 7 25,060 8 17,455 6 
Deposits by banks (including repos)67,323 19 54,720 17 40,038 14 
Debt securities in issue41,016 11 33,938 10 30,669 11 
Short positions19,128 5 16,381 5 14,622 5 












 
Total364,430 100 324,200 100 284,324 100 
 
 

Customer accounts, excluding repo agreements, grew by £15,841 million (8%), and represent 58% of the Group’s funding excluding capital and other liabilities. In reflection of the higher rate of growth in customer loans and advances excluding reverse repos, up £27,081 million (13%), the proportion of funding from wholesale sources has increased.

Repo agreements with corporate and institutional customers are undertaken primarily by RBS Greenwich Capital in the US and by Financial Markets. Repo activity with customers represented 7% of the Group’s funding excluding capital and other liabilities at 31 December 2003.

Deposits by banks increased by £12,603 million to represent 19% of the Group’s funding, excluding capital and other liabilities. Deposits by banks are taken from a wide range of counterparties, with the largest single depositor continuing to represent less than 1% of the Group’s total funding.

Debt securities in issue increased by £7,078 million to represent 11% of the Group’s funding, excluding capital and other liabilities, at 31 December 2003. Total debt securities in issue at 31 December 2003 includes £9,187 million (2002 – £6,035 million) with a maturity of over one year, reflecting the activity of the Group in raising term funds through its Euro Medium Term Note programme and other term issues.

The Group remains well placed to access various wholesale funding sources from a wide range of counterparties and markets, and the changing mix evident between customer repos, deposits by banks and debt securities in issue primarily reflects comparative pricing and investor/counterparty demand rather than a material perceived trend.

Net customer activity
Net customer lending rose by £11,240 million as the growth in loans and advances to customers exceeded the growth in customer accounts, thus increasing wholesale market funding to support loan growth. Structural liquidity risk continues to be maintained well within the Group’s policy parameters.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Loans and advances to customers (gross, excluding reverse repos)232,384 205,303 182,549 
Customer accounts (excluding repos)209,942 194,101 181,540 






 
Customer lending less customer accounts22,442 11,202 1,009 
 




 
       
Customer accounts as % of loans and advances to customers
     (gross, excluding repos)
90.3%94.5%99.4%
 




 

In prevailing economic conditions and with interest rates at historically low levels in the UK, US and Europe, the growth in demand for borrowing by customers may in the medium term continue to exceed customer deposits received, thus increasing net customer lending further. The Group hasevaluated a range of balance sheet management strategies and has developed plans to increase gradually over time short term and longer term funding from various wholesale market sources, whilst maintaining its overall funding structure within its normal prudent liquidity risk policy parameters.

51



Operating and financial review continued

Liquidity risk (continued)
Net wholesale market activity
Overall structural liquidity risk remains well within the Group’s policy parameters. The Group’s net surplus of wholesale assets reduced by £8,372 million to £6,274 million.

 2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Deposits by banks (excluding repos):      
   repayable on demand10,232 12,703 6,155 
   less than 3 months maturity26,689 18,547 17,557 
   over 3 months maturity3,358 3,373 5,880 






 
Total deposits by banks (excluding repos)40,279 34,623 29,592 
       
Repo agreements with banks and customers54,065 45,157 27,901 
Debt securities in issue41,016 33,938 30,669 
Short positions19,128 16,381 14,622 






 
Total wholesale liabilities154,488 130,099 102,784 






 
       
Loans and advances to banks (gross, excluding reverse repos):      
   repayable on demand6,029 6,433 3,895 
   less than 3 months maturity11,287 10,485 12,500 
   over 3 months maturity8,060 6,807 4,405 






 
Total loans and advances to banks (gross, excluding reverse repos)25,376 23,725 20,800 
       
Reverse repo agreements with banks and customers50,591 42,519 29,309 
Debt securities, treasury bills and other eligible bills84,795 78,501 74,176 






 
Total wholesale assets160,762 144,745 124,285 






 
       
Net surplus of wholesale assets6,274 14,646 21,501 
 




 

Excluding repo and reverse repos, the comparison of the maturity and level of deposits by banks with that of loans and advances to banks shows an increased reliance on inter-bank funding but of slightly longer maturity.

52



Sterling liquidity
Over 51% of the Group’s total assets are denominated in Sterling. The FSA requires the Group, on a consolidated basis, to maintain daily a minimum ratio of 100% between:

 1. a stock of qualifying high quality liquid assets (primarily UK government securities, treasury bills, eligible bank bills, and cash held in branches) and
   
 2. the sum of:
    • Sterling wholesale net outflows contractually due within 5 working days (offset up to a limit of 50%, by 85% of sterling certificates of deposit held which mature beyond five working days); and
    • 5% of retail deposits with a residual contractual maturity of five working days or less.

The Group has exceeded the minimum ratio requirement throughout 2003.

The FSA also sets an absolute minimum level for the stock of qualifying liquid assets that the Group is required to maintain each day. The Group has exceeded that minimum stock requirement at all times during 2003.

The Group’s operational processes are actively managed to ensure that both the minimum Sterling liquidity ratio and the minimum stock requirement are achieved or exceeded at all times.

Liquidity in non-sterling currencies
For non-Sterling currencies, no specific regulatory liquidity requirement is set for the Group by the FSA. However, the importance of managing prudently the liquidity risk in its non-Sterling activities is recognised and the Group manages its non-Sterling liquidity risk daily within net mismatch limits set for the 0-8 calendar day and 0-1 month periods as a percentage of the Group’s total deposit liabilities.

In measuring its non-sterling liquidity risk, due account is taken of the marketability within a short period of the wide range of debt securities held. Appropriate adjustments are applied in each case, dependent on various parameters, to determine the Group’s ability to realise cash at short notice via the sale or repo of such marketable assets if required to meet unexpected outflows.

The level of contingent risk from the potential drawing of undrawn or partially drawn commitments, back-up lines, standby lines and other similar facilities is also actively monitored and reflected in the measures of the Group’s non-Sterling liquidity risk. Particular attention is given to the US$ commercial paper market and the propensity of the Group’s corporate counterparties (who are active in raising funds from that market) to switch to take up facilities offered by the Group in the event of either counterparty specific difficulties or a significant widening of interest spreads generally in the commercial paper market.

The Group also provides liquidity back-up facilities to both its own conduits and certain other conduits which take funding from the US$ commercial paper market. Limits sanctioned for such facilities totalled less than £4,000 million at 31 December 2003. The short-term contingent liquidity risk in providing such back-up facilities is also mitigated by the spread of maturity dates, typically over a three-month period of the commercial paper taken by the conduits.

The Group has operated within its non-Sterling liquidity policy mismatch limits at all times during 2003 and operational processes are actively managed to ensure that is the case going forward.

Contingency plans are also maintained to enable the Group to respond effectively to unforeseen market liquidity or major payment systems problems that may emerge from time to time.

53



Operating and financial review continued

Market risk
The Group is exposed to market risk because of positions held in its trading portfolios and its non-trading business including the Group’s treasury operations.

The Group manages the market risk in its trading and treasury portfolios through its Market Risk Management framework, which is based on value-at-risk (“VaR”) limits, together with, but not limited to, stress testing, scenario analysis, and position and sensitivity limits. Stress testing measures the impact of abnormal changes in market rates and prices on the fair value of the Group’s trading portfolios. GEMC approves the high-level VaR and stress limits for the Group. The Group Market Risk function, independent from the Group’s trading businesses, is responsible for setting and monitoring the adequacy and effectiveness of the Group’s market risk management processes.

Value-at-risk
VaR is a technique that produces estimates of the potential negative change in the market value of a portfolio over a specified time horizon at given confidence levels. For internal risk management purposes, the Group’s VaR assumes a time horizon of one day and a confidence level of 95%. The Group uses historical simulation models in computing VaR. This approach, in common with many other VaR models, assumes that risk factor changes observed in the past are a good estimate of those likely to occur in the future and is, therefore, limited by the relevance of the historical data used. The Group’s method, however, does not make any assumption about the nature or type of underlying loss distribution.

The Group typically uses the previous two years of market data. The Group’s VaR should be interpreted in light of the limitations of the methodology used. These limitations include:

  • Historical data may not provide the best estimate of the joint distribution of risk factor changes in the future and may fail to capture the risk of possible extreme adverse market movements which have not occurred in the historical window used in the calculations.

  • VaR using a one-day time horizon does not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be liquidated or hedged within one day.

  • VaR using a 95% confidence level does not reflect the extent of potential losses beyond that percentile.

The Group largely computes the VaR of trading portfolios at the close of business and positions may change substantially during the course of the trading day. Controls are in place to limit the Group’s intra-day exposure; such as the calculation of the VaR for selected portfolios.

These limitations and the nature of the VaR measure mean that the Group cannot guarantee that losses will not exceed the VaR amounts indicated. For a discussion of the Group’s accounting policies for, and information with respect to, its exposures to derivative financial instruments, see Accounting policies and Note 39 on the accounts.

54



Trading
The principal focus of the Group’s trading activities is client facilitation - providing products to the Group’s client base at competitive prices. The Group also undertakes: market making – quoting firm bid (buy) and offer (sell) prices with the intention of profiting from the spread between the quotes; arbitrage –entering into offsetting positions in different but closely related markets in order to profit from market imperfections; and proprietary activity – taking positions in financial instruments asprincipal in order to take advantage of anticipated market conditions. The main risk factors are interest rates, credit spreads and foreign exchange.

Financial instruments held in the Group’s trading portfolios include, but are not limited to, debt securities, loans, deposits, securities sale and repurchase agreements and derivative financial instruments (futures, forwards, swaps and options).

The VaR for the Group’s trading portfolios segregated by type of market risk exposure is presented in the tables below.

Trading VaRPeriod
end
£m
 Maximum
£m
 Minimum
£m
 Average(1)
£m
 








 
2003        
Interest rate 27.4 14.5 5.7 9.4 
Currency0.8 2.5 0.7 1.3 
Equity0.4 1.4 0.2 0.5 
Diversification effects(1.2)      



      
Total7.4 14.2 5.6 9.4 
 
 
         
2002        
Interest rate 28.4 11.6 6.0 9.0 
Currency1.2 2.5 0.4 1.2 
Equity0.6 1.0 0.2 0.5 
Diversification effects(1.8)      



      
Total8.4 11.8 5.6 9.1 
 
 
Notes: 
(1)Calculated as the arithmetic average of daily VaR figures.
(2) Includes credit spreads.

55



Operating and financial review continued

Market risk (continued)
Non-trading
The principal market risks arising from the Group's non-trading activities are interest rate risk, currency risk and equity risk. Treasury activity and mismatches between the repricing of assets and liabilities in its retail and corporate banking operations account for most of the non-trading interest rate risk. Non-trading currency risk derives from the Group's investments in overseas subsidiaries, associates and branches. The Group's venture capital portfolio, investments held by its general insurance business and its strategic equity investments are the principal sources of non-trading equity price risk. The Group's portfolios of non-trading financial instruments mainly comprise loans (including finance leases), debt securities, equity shares, deposits, certificates of deposits and other debt securities issued, loan capital and derivatives. To reflect their distinct nature, the Group's long-term assurance assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders have been excluded from these market risk disclosures.

•  Interest rate risk
Treasury
The Group’s treasury activities include its money market business and the management of internal funds flow within the Group’s businesses. Money market portfolios include cash instruments (principally debt securities, loans and deposits) and related hedging derivatives. VaR for the Group’s treasury portfolios, which relates mainly to interest rate risk was £8.1 million at 31 December 2003 (2002 – £6.5 million). During the year the maximum VaR was £11.0 million (2002 – £6.7 million), the minimum £5.6 million (2002 – £3.5 million) and the average £8.3 million (2002 – £4.4 million).

Retail and corporate banking
Structural interest rate risk arises in these activities where assets and liabilities have different repricing dates. It is the Group’s policy to minimise the sensitivity of net interest income to changes in interest rates and where interest rate risk is retained to ensure that appropriate resources, measures and limits are applied.

Structural interest rate risk is calculated in each division on the basis of establishing the repricing behaviour of each asset and liability product. For many products, the actual interest rate repricing characteristics differ from the contractual repricing. In most cases, the repricing maturity is determined by the market interest rate that most closely fits the historical behaviour of the product interest rate. For non-interest bearing current accounts, the repricing maturity is determined by the stability of the portfolio. The repricing maturities used are approved by Group Treasury and divisional asset and liability committees at least annually. Key conventions are reviewed annually by GALCO.

A static maturity gap report is produced as at the month-end for each division, in each functional currency based on the behaviouralised repricing for each product. It is Group policy to include in the gap report, non-financial assets and liabilities, mainly tangible fixed assets and the Group’s capital and reserves, spread over medium and longer term maturities. This report also includes hedge transactions, principally derivatives.

Any residual non-trading interest rate exposures are controlled by limiting repricing mismatches in the individual balance sheets. Potential exposures to interest rate movements in the medium to long term are measured and controlled using a version of the same VaR methodology that is used for the Group’s trading portfolios but without discount factors. Net interest income exposures are measured and controlled in terms of sensitivity over time to movements in interest rates.

Non-trading interest rate VaR
Non-trading interest rate VaR for the Group’s treasury and retail and corporate banking activities was £78.1 million at 31 December 2003 (2002 – £34.7 million) with the major exposure being to changes in longer term US dollar interest rates. During the year, the maximum VaR was £78.1 million (2002 – £34.7 million), the minimum £29.9 million (2002 – £9.7 million) and the average £51.7 million (2002 – £14.5 million).

56



Citizens was the main contributor to the Group’s non-trading interest rate VaR in 2002 and 2003. It invests its surplus retail deposits in a portfolio of highly rated and liquid investments principally mortgage-backed securities. This balance sheet management approach is common for US retail banks where mortgages are originated and then sold to Federal agencies for funding through the capital markets. The significant increase in VaR during 2003 reflects substantial growth in retail deposits in Citizens and asset growth in home equity loans and mortgage backed securities.

VaR, like all interest rate risk measures, has its limitations when applied to retail banking books and the management of Citizens’ interest rate exposures involves a number of other interest rate risk measures and related limits. Two measures that are reported both to Citizens ALCO and Board are:

  • the sensitivity of their net interest income to a series of parallel movements in interest rates; and

  • economic value of equity (“EVE”) limits.

These limits are set to parallel movements of +/-1% and +/-2%.

The EVE methodology captures deposit re-pricing strategies and the embedded option risks that exists within both the investment portfolio of mortgage-backed securities and the consumer loan portfolio. EVE is the present value of the cash flows generated by the current balance sheet. EVE sensitivity to a 2% parallel movement upwards and downwards in US interest rates is shown below.

 Percent increase/(decrease) in EVE 
 
 
20032% parallel upward
movement in
US interest rates
%
 2% parallel downward
movement in US interest
rates (no negative
rates allowed)
%
 

Period end(9.4)(8.8)
Maximum(11.4)(14.2)
Minimum3.2 (0.6)
Average(4.4)(6.4)


 Percent increase/(decrease) in EVE 
 
 
20022% parallel upward
movement in
US interest rates
%
 2% parallel downward
movement in US interest
rates (no negative
rates allowed)
%
 

Period end(5.7)(7.4)
Maximum(8.7)(9.5)
Minimum8.7 (0.3)
Average(4.6)(6.3)

At Group level, the other major structural interest rate risk arises from a low interest rate environment, particularly in sterling, sustained for a number of years. In such a scenario deposit pricing may reach effective floors below which it is not reasonable to reduce rates further whilst variable rate asset pricing continues to decline. A sustained low rate scenario would also generate progressively reduced income from the medium and long term hedging of non-interest bearing liabilities. GALCO regularly reviews the impact of successive declines in rates to ensure that appropriate risk management strategies are employed. This may involve execution of derivatives, product development and tactical pricing changes.

Note 40 includes, on pages 125 to 126, tables that summarise the Group’s interest rate sensitivity gap for its non-trading book at 31 December 2003 and 31 December 2002. The tables show the contractual re-pricing for each category of asset liability and for off-balance sheet items and do not reflect the behaviouralised repricing used in the Group’s asset and liability management methodology and the non-trading interest rate VaR presented above.

57



Operating and financial review continued

Market risk (continued)
Non-trading (continued)
•  Currency risk
The Group does not maintain material non-trading open currency positions other than the structural foreign currency translation exposures arising from its investments in overseas subsidiaries and associated undertakings and their related currency funding. The Group’s policy in relation to structural positions is to match fund the structural foreign currency exposure arising from net asset value, including goodwill, inoverseas subsidiaries, equity accounted investments and branches, except where doing so would materially increase the sensitivity of either the Group’s or the subsidiary’s regulatory capital ratios to currency movements. The policy requires structural foreign exchange positions to be reviewed regularly by GALCO. Gains or losses on foreign currency investments net of any gains or losses on related foreign currency funding or hedges are recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses.

The tables below set out the Group’s structural foreign currency exposures.

2003Net investments
in overseas
operations
£m
 Foreign
currency
borrowings
hedging net
investments
£m
 Structural
foreign
currency
exposures
£m
 

 
US dollar5,329 5,198 131 
Euro1,422 826 596 
Swiss franc357 357  
Other non-sterling118 114 4 






 
 7,226 6,495 731 
 




 
       
2002      

 
US dollar5,190 5,107 83 
Euro1,019 558 461 
Swiss franc306 295 11 
Other non-sterling35 30 5 

 
 6,550 5,990 560 
 




 

The structural foreign currency exposure in euros is principally due to Ulster Bank running an open structural foreign exchange position to minimise the sensitivity of its capital ratios to possible movements in the Euro exchange rate against Sterling.

•  Equity risk
Non-trading equity risk arises principally from the Group’s strategic investments, its venture capital activities and its general insurance business. The reserves of the Group’s general insurance business are invested in cash, debt securities and equity shares. The VaR of the equity element of this portfolio was £9.9 million at 31 December 2003 (2002 – £8.6 million). During 2003, the maximum VaR was £11.1 million (2002 – £8.6 million), the minimum £8.3 million (2002 – £6.8 million) and the average £9.6 million (2002 – £7.4 million).

VaR is not an appropriate risk measure for the Group’s venture capital investments, comprising a mix of quoted and unquoted investments, or its portfolio of strategic investments. At 31 December 2003, equity shares held as investment securities had a book value of £1,821 million (2002 – £1,783 million) and a valuation of £2,238 million (2002 – £1,699 million).

58



Insurance risk
The Group is exposed to insurance risk, either directly through its businesses or through using insurance as a tool to reduce other risk exposures:

  • Insurance is a source of risk where the Group sells and underwrites general insurance and life assurance. The essence of an insurance contract is the transfer of risk from the policyholder to the insurer.

The management of insurance risk is overseen by a Pricing Committee that meets weekly to review underwriting factors, e.g. car groups, terms and conditions, claims experience. This is supplemented by a range of system controls and processes including risk acceptance, with regular independent reviews of underwriting across the business. Primary focus is on high volume and relatively straightforward products for example home and motor. This facilitates the generation of comprehensive underwriting and claims data, which is used to monitor and accurately price the risks accepted. This attention to data analysis is reinforced by tight controls on costs and claims handling procedures.

Underwriting concentrations and catastrophe exposure are reviewed and, where necessary, mitigated by reinsurance which is spread across a number of reinsurers. Reviews of the Group’s general insurance reserves by external actuaries are conducted annually.

Investment strategy reflects the maturity of underwriting liabilities and is governed through Investment Management Committees, with involvement and oversight from Group Treasury. The Group’s underwriting experience, the level of retained risk and solvency are monitored at divisional and Group level.

  • The Insurance Sourcing Department is responsible for the Group-wide purchase of insurance as a means of reducing other risk exposures. As such, it is a key component of the Group Insurance Risk Management process and reports its activities to the GEMC.

Enterprise risk
In order to adequately identify and manage the full range of Enterprise risk, the Group has separately defined operational and external risk:

Operational risk is defined as the risk arising from within the organisation from:

  • People – risks arising from an inappropriate level of staff, inadequately skilled or managed people.

  • Process – risk caused by inadequate or failed internal processes.

  • Systems – risks of inadequately designed or maintained systems.

  • Assets – risk of damage, misappropriation or theft of the Group’s physical, logical and intangible assets.

External risk is defined as the risk arising from outside of the organisation in three main areas:

  • Business – risks arising from product performance, competitor activity, supplier unreliability or customer activity.

  • Political – risks caused by political unrest or uncertainty, activity by public interest groups or extremists, and non-compliance with, or changes to, current legislation.

  • Environment – risks arising due to demographic, macro economic, technical, cultural or environmental change.

Enterprise risk also includes the potential or actual impact on corporate reputation arising from any of the Group’s activities.

Enterprise risk management is achieved through monitoring the Group’s exposure to direct or indirect loss using a range of policies, procedures, data, analytical tools and reporting techniques. In particular, Group-wide risk management processes ensure that Enterprise risk issues are quickly escalated and resolved, that the risks inherent in new products are fully evaluated, and that emerging external risks are actively monitored.

Operational risk exposures and loss events for each division are captured through monthly Risk and Control returns, which provide details on the change of risk exposures for each risk category in the light of improving/deteriorating trends and the risk profile of each division.

59



 

Make it happen

 

60




Governance

Contents  
   
Board of directors and secretary62 
   
Report of the directors64 
   
Corporate governance68 
   
Directors’ remuneration report72 
   
Directors’ interests in shares82 
   
Statement of directors’ responsibilities83 

61



Board of directors and secretary

62



Chairman
Sir George Mathewson (age 63)
CBE, DUniv, LLD, FRSE, FCIBS
C (Chairman), N (Chairman)

Appointed to the Board in September 1987 and as Chairman in April 2001, Sir George has a wide background in finance, technology and management and spent some of his career in the United States. He became Group Chief Executive in January 1992 and in March 2000, he was appointed Executive Deputy Chairman. He is president of the British Bankers’ Association and a director of Santander Central Hispano, S.A., The Scottish Investment Trust PLC and the Institute of International Finance, Inc. He was chief executive of the Scottish Development Agency from 1981 to 1987.

Vice-chairmen
Sir Iain Vallance (age 60)
FCIBS
C

Appointed to the Board in January 1993 and as Vice-Chairman in March 1994, Sir Iain is an experienced businessman who is currently chairman of the European Service Forum and a director of the supervisory board of Siemens AG. He is also a member of the European Advisory Council of the Rothschild Group and the European Advisory Committee of the NYSE. He has also held a range of other positions including president of the CBI, chairman of British Telecommunications Plc and deputy chairman of the Financial Reporting Council. He was also a member of the board of directors of the Mobil Corporation.

Sir Angus Grossart (age 66)
CBE, DBA, LLD, FRSE, DL, FCIBS
C

Appointed to the Board in September 1985 and as Vice-Chairman in April 1996, Sir Angus is an advocate and chartered accountant with a career in merchant banking. He is chairman of Noble Grossart Limited, Scottish Daily Record and Sunday Mail Limited and Edinburgh US Tracker Trust plc. His directorships of public companies include Scottish and Newcastle Plc and Trinity Mirror Plc. He is a trustee of the National Heritage Memorial Fund and a former chairman of the trustees of the National Galleries of Scotland. He has also served on the boards of a wide range of other companies in the UK, the USA and Canada.

Executive directors
Fred Goodwin (age 45)
DUniv, FCIBS, FCIB
Group Chief Executive
C

Appointed to the Board in August 1998, Mr Goodwin is a chartered accountant. He was formerly chief executive and director, Clydesdale Bank PLC and Yorkshire Bank PLC. He is chairman of The Prince’s Trust and a former president of the Chartered Institute of Bankers in Scotland.

Lawrence Fish (age 59)
Chairman, President and Chief Executive Officer
of Citizens Financial Group, Inc.

Appointed to the Board in January 1993, Mr Fish is an American national. He is a career banker and a director of Textron Inc. and the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston. He is also a director of the Financial Services Roundtable, a trustee of The Brookings Institution and a director of numerous community organisations in the USA.

Norman McLuskie (age 59)
FCIBS
Chairman, Retail Direct

Appointed to the Board in June 1992, Mr McLuskie is a chartered accountant. He is also chairman of MasterCard Europe SPRL and a member of the board of MasterCard International Inc. He was formerly chief executive, Retail Direct.

Gordon Pell (age 53)
FCIBS, FCIB
Chairman, Retail Banking and Wealth Management

Appointed to the Board in March 2000, Mr Pell was formerly group director of Lloyds TSB UK Retail Banking before joining National Westminster Bank Plc as a director in February 2000 and then becoming chief executive, Retail Banking. He is currently also a director of Race for Opportunity and Southampton University Development Trust.

Fred Watt (age 43)
FCIBS
C
Group Finance Director

Appointed to the Board in September 2000, Mr Watt is a chartered accountant. He was formerly finance director of Wassall plc.

Non-executive directors
Emilio Botin (age 69)

Appointed to the Board in February 1989, Mr Botin is a Spanish national. He is chairman of Santander Central Hispano, S.A. and several Santander Central Hispano Group subsidiaries and a director of a number of Spanish companies including BANKINTER S.A. Mr Botin is chairman of Universia.net, an internet venture between Santander Central Hispano and 650 universities in Spain, Portugal and the main countries in Latin America. He is also a director of Shinsei Bank Limited, a Japanese bank.

Colin Buchan* (age 49)
A (Acting Chairman), R

Appointed to the Board in June 2002, Mr Buchan was educated in South Africa and spent the early part of his career in South Africa and the Far East. He has considerable international investment banking experience, as well as experience in very large risk management in the equities business. He was formerly a member of the group management board of UBS AG and head of equities of UBS Warburg. He is a director of Merrill Lynch World Mining Trust Plc, Merrill Lynch Gold Limited, Royal Scottish National Orchestra Society Limited, Standard Life Investments Limited, UBS Securities Canada Inc. and World Mining Investment Company Limited.

Jim Currie* (age 62)
D.Litt
R

Appointed to the Board in November 2001, Dr Currie is a highly experienced senior international civil servant who spent many years working in Brussels and Washington. He was formerly director general at the European Commission with responsibility for the EU’s environmental policy and director general for Customs and Excise and Indirect Taxation. He is also a director of British Nuclear Fuels PLC,an international adviser to Eversheds and a consultant to Butera & Andrews UK Limited.

Juan Inciarte (age 51)

Appointed to the Board in February 1998, Mr Inciarte is a Spanish national. He is a general manager of Santander Central Hispano Group in charge of Europe and consumer finance. He is a director of several Santander Central Hispano Group subsidiaries and a number of Spanish and European companies including CC-Bank AG. He was a director of First Wachovia and San Paolo – IMI S.P.A.

Eileen Mackay* (age 60)
CB, FCIBS
A, R

Appointed to the Board in May 1996, Miss Mackay is a former senior UK civil servant who held posts in Scotland, HM Treasury and the Cabinet Office and was principal finance officer at The Scottish Office. She is a director of Edinburgh Investment Trust plc, Scottish Financial Enterprise and the British Library. She is also chairman of the trustees of the David Hume Institute and a trustee of the Carnegie Trust for the Universities of Scotland.

Iain Robertson (age 58)
CBE, FCIBS
Chairman, Corporate Banking and Financial Markets

Appointed to the Board in January 1993, Mr Robertson is a chartered accountant. He is chairman of British Empire Securities and General Trust plc.

Sir Steve Robson* (age 60)
A

Appointed to the Board in July 2001, Sir Steve is a former senior UK civil servant, with responsibility for a wide variety of Treasury matters. His early career included the post of Private Secretary to the Chancellor of the Exchequer and secondment to ICFC, (now 3i). He was also a Second Permanent Secretary of HM Treasury, where he was managing director of the Finance and Regulation Directorate. He is a non-executive director of Cazenove Group Plc, Xstrata Plc and Partnerships UK plc.

Bob Scott* (age 62)
CBE
C, N, R (Chairman)

Appointed to the Board in January 2001, Mr Scott is an Australian national. He is the senior independent director. Mr Scott has many years experience in the international insurance business and played a leading role in the consolidation of the UK insurance industry. He is a former group chief executive of CGNU plc and chairman of the board of the Association of British Insurers. He is chairman of Yell Group plc, a non-executive director of Swiss Reinsurance Company (Zurich), Jardine Lloyd Thompson Group plc and Focus Wickes Group Limited, and a trustee of the Crimestoppers Trust.

Peter Sutherland* (age 57)
KCMG
N

Appointed to the Board in January 2001, Mr Sutherland is an Irish national. He is a former attorney general of Ireland and from 1985 to 1989 was the European commissioner responsible for competition policy. He is chairman of BP Plc and Goldman Sachs International and a director of Investor AB and Telefonaktiebolaget LMEricsson. He was formerly chairman of Allied Irish Bank and a director general of GATT and the World Trade Organisation.

Group Secretary and General Counsel
Miller McLean (age 54)
FCIBS
C

Mr McLean was appointed group secretary in August 1994. He is a trustee of the Industry and Parliament Trust, a non-executive chairman of The Whitehall and Industry Group and a director of The Scottish Parliament and Business Exchange. He is a former vice-chairman of Banco Santander, Portugal S.A.

A member of the Audit Committee
C member of the Chairman’s Advisory Group
N member of the Nominations Committee
R member of the Remuneration Committee
  * independent non-executive director

63



Report of the directors

The directors have pleasure in presenting their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2003.

Profit and dividends
The profit attributable to the ordinary shareholders of the company for the year ended 31 December 2003 amounted to £2,315 million (after preference dividends of £261 million and the Additional Value Shares dividend of £1,463 million) compared with £1,971 million for the year ended 31 December 2002, as set out in the consolidated profit and loss account on page 91.

An interim dividend of 14.6p per ordinary share was paid on 10 October 2003 totalling £431 million (2002 – £368 million). The directors now recommend that a final dividend of 35.7p per ordinary share totalling £1,059 million (2002 – £899 million) be paid on 4 June 2004 to members on the register at the close of business on 12 March 2004. If this recommendation is approved by shareholders at the annual general meeting on 29 April 2004, the retained profit for the year will amount to £825 million (2002 – £704 million). Subject to the approval of the dividend by shareholders at the annual general meeting, shareholders will be offered the choice of taking ordinary shares in lieu of cash in respect of the final dividend.

The final dividend of 55p per share on the Additional Value Shares issued in connection with the acquisition of NatWest was paid on 1 December 2003, totalling £1.5 billion.

Activities and business review
The company is a holding company owning the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Royal Bank, the principal direct operating subsidiary undertaking of the company. The “Group” comprises the company and all its subsidiary and associated undertakings, including the Royal Bank and NatWest. The Royal Bank and NatWest and their subsidiary undertakings are engaged principally in providing a comprehensive range of banking, insurance and other financial services. Details of the principal subsidiary undertakings of the company are shown in Note 17. A review of the business for the year to 31 December 2003, of recent events and of likely future developments is contained in the operating and financial review.

Business developments
In January 2003, 49% of the Royal Bank’s economic interest in Royal Bank of Scotland Unit Trust Management was sold to Aviva plc.

In January 2003, the entire issued ordinary share capital of NatWest was transferred from the company to the Royal Bank.

In January 2003, Citizens completed the acquisition of Pennsylvania-based commercial bank, Commonwealth Bancorp, Inc.

In June 2003, RBS completed the acquisition of Nordisk Renting AB, a Swedish leasing company.

In July 2003, Citizens completed the acquisition of Port Financial Corp., the holding company of the Massachusetts savings bank, CambridgePort Bank.

In July 2003, RBS completed the purchase of the credit card and personal loans portfolios of Frankfurt-based Santander Direkt Bank.

In July 2003, RBS completed the sale of the Miami-based Latin American private banking operations of Coutts Group.

In September 2003, RBS completed the acquisition of Churchill Insurance Group PLC.

In September 2003, Citizens announced the acquisition of Thistle Group Holdings, Co., the holding company of Pennsylvania-based Roxborough Manayunk Bank. This acquisition was completed in January 2004.

In October 2003, RBS announced that it had agreed terms for a recommended acquisition for cash of First Active plc. This acquisition was completed in January 2004.

In October 2003, Citizens completed the acquisition of Community Bancorp, Inc., the holding company of Massachusetts-based Community National Bank.

In November 2003, Coutts Bank (Switzerland) Limited completed the acquisition of Zurich-based private bank, Bank von Ernst & Cie AG.

Going concern
The directors are satisfied that the Group has adequate resources to continue in business for the foreseeable future. For this reason, they continue to adopt the ‘going concern’ basis for preparing the accounts.

64



Ordinary share capital
During the year ended 31 December 2003, the ordinary share capital was increased by the following issues:

(a) 13.3 million ordinary shares allotted as a result of the exercise of options under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and a further 6.2 million ordinary shares allotted in respect of the exercise of options under the NatWest executive and sharesave schemes which had been exchanged for options over the company’s shares following the acquisition of NatWest in 2000;
  
(b) 40.1 million ordinary shares allotted in lieu of cash dividends; and
  
(c) 2.9 million ordinary shares allotted under the company’s profit sharing (share ownership) scheme.

The total consideration for ordinary shares issued during the year amounted to £775 million.

Details of the authorised and issued ordinary share capital at 31 December 2003 are shown in Note 33.

Preference share capital
In January 2003, the company redeemed the 8 million Series B and the 16 million Series C, non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each, at a total cost of US$600 million.

Details of the authorised and issued preference share capital at 31 December 2003 are shown in Note 33.

Non-voting deferred shares
Following the payment of the final dividend on the Additional Value Shares on 1 December 2003, they were de-listed from the London Stock Exchange, converted to Non-voting Deferred Shares and transferred to RBS NVDS Nominees Limited.

Trust preferred securities
In May 2003, a subsidiary of the company issued 850,000 Series I non-cumulative trust preferred securities of US$1,000 per security, the net proceeds being US$841 million.

In December 2003, a subsidiary of the company issued 650,000 Series II non-cumulative trust preferred securities of US$1,000 per security, the net proceeds being US$644 million.

Subordinated liabilities
In March 2003, the Royal Bank issued £500 million 5.125% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being £490 million.

In April 2003, the Royal Bank issued 750 million 4.875% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being 749 million.

In June 2003, the company issued US$850 million 5.75% Exchangeable capital securities, the net proceeds being US$827 million, and the Royal Bank issued £200 million 5.625% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being £211 million.

In July 2003, the company issued US$350 million 4.7% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being US$348 million.

In October 2003, the Royal Bank issued 1 billion subordinated floating rate notes, the net proceeds being 998 million and £400 million 5.625% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being £396 million.

In November 2003, the company issued US$750 million 5% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being US$744 million, and NatWest redeemed US$500 million 9.375% guaranteed capital notes.

In December 2003, the Royal Bank issued 500 million 4.5% subordinated notes, the net proceeds being 498 million.

Details of the subordinated liabilities are shown in Notes 30 and 31.

Shareholdings
As at 18 February 2004, the company had been notified of the following interests in its shares, in accordance with section 198 of the Companies Act 1985:

 Number
of shares
 % held   Number
of shares
 % held 

 
Ordinary shares:    5 ½% cumulative preference shares:     
   Santander Central Hispano S.A.149,528,735 5.15 Commercial Union Assurance plc 91,429 22.86 
   Legal & General Group plc98,761,695 3.40 Axa S.A. 81,000 20.25 
   Barclays PLC89,927,387 3.05 Bassett-Patrick Securities Limited* 46,255 11.56 
11% cumulative preference shares:    Mr P. S. and Mrs J. Allen 35,999 9.00 
   Guardian Royal Exchange    E M Behrens Charitable Trust 20,000 5.00 
      Assurance plc129,830 25.97 Mrs Gina Wild 19,800 4.95 
   Windsor Life Assurance    Trustees of The Stephen Cockburn      
      Company Limited51,510 10.30   Limited Pension Scheme 19,879 4.97 
   Mr S. J. and Mrs J. A. Cockburn30,810 6.16 Miss Elizabeth Hill 16,124 4.03 
   Cleaning Tokens Limited25,500 5.10 Mr W. T. Hardison Jr. 13,532 3.38 

 
* Notification has been received on behalf of Mr A. W. R. Medlock and Mrs H. M. Medlock that they each have an interest in the holding of 5 ½% cumulative preference shares registered in the name of Bassett-Patrick Securities Limited noted above and that there are further holdings of 5,300 and 5,000 shares, respectively, of that class registered in each of their names.  

65



Report of the directors continued

Directors
The names and brief biographical details of the directors are shown on page 63. All directors, except Mr Bill Wilson who died on 25 December 2003, served throughout the year and to the date of signing of the financial statements. Sir George Mathewson, Sir Angus Grossart, Sir Iain Vallance, Mr Emilio Botin, Mr Lawrence Fish, Mr Gordon Pell and Mr Iain Robertson will retire and offer themselves for re-election at the forthcoming annual general meeting. Sir Angus Grossart and Sir Iain Vallance have indicated that they would not wish to submit themselves for re-election in 2005. Details of the service agreements for Mr Fish, Mr Pell and Mr Robertson are set out on page 76. No other director seeking re-election has a service agreement.

Directors’ interests
The interests of the directors in the shares of the company at 31 December 2003 are shown on page 82. None of the directors held an interest in the loan capital of the company or in the shares and loan capital of any of the subsidiary undertakings of the company, during the period from 1 January 2003 to 18 February 2004.

Employee proposition
The company encourages employees to contribute to the Group’s performance through Total Reward, one of the most comprehensive remuneration and benefits packages in financial services. The elements of Total Reward include; salary; selectable benefits; bonus and share schemes; and pensions.

RBSelect, the Group’s benefits choice programme, attracted some 43,000 employees in 2003, allowing them to increase the overall value of their Total Reward package as well as tailoring it to suit their lifestyle. Employees can choose from a range of options including subsidised childcare, discounted shopping vouchers, private medical insurance, additional pension contributions and telephone legal advice.

Employees can also participate in a bonus scheme or incentive plan specific to their business. Employees are also able to share in the Group’s success through profit sharing, Buy As You Earn and Sharesave schemes, aligning their interests with those of shareholders.

In each of the last five years the success of the Group has given eligible employees a further ten percent of their basic salary through Group profit sharing.

In 2003, the Group introduced the Buy As You Earn Plan allowing employees to buy shares in the Group on a monthly basis.

The Group provides pension scheme membership for the majority of staff in the UK and overseas. The largest scheme is The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund, which has some 74,000 employee members. This is a non-contributory, defined benefit fund and is open to full-time and part-time employees, including fixed-term contractors.

Development and training are given a high priority in the Group and significant importance is placed on having strong leadership capability across the organisation, proactively developing future leaders and succession plans for senior and executive management roles. A core component of this is the Executive Leadership Programme provided by Harvard Business School. There has also been strong demand for the Group’s graduate programme, with 185 participants in 2003.

The Group encourages professional development and lifelong learning. Through Learning Awards it offers a financial incentive to employees who take the banking qualifications offered by The Chartered Institute of Bankers in Scotland and The Institute of Financial Services.

As part of the Group’s relationship with the Prince’s Trust, UK-based employees are encouraged to become involved in the Trust’s work with young people which offers personal development opportunities. This also contributes to the Group’s aims in respect of Community Investment and Corporate Responsibility.

Employee communication
The Group encourages employee involvement through a process of communication and consultation. This involves internal communication through a corporate intranet, an in-house magazine, team meetings led by line managers, briefings held by senior managers and regular dialogue with employees and employee representatives.

The Group Chief Executive and other senior Group executives regularly communicate directly with employees through ‘Question Time’ style programmes, broadcast on the Group’s internal television network. The Group Chief Executive also meets employees during frequent visits to Group offices.

Short films explaining the Group’s annual and interim financial results are broadcast through the internal television network which is also used for staff training and development.

Employee consultation
The importance the Group places on consultation with employees is evidenced by its annual, Group-wide employee opinion survey, which seeks views and feedback on a variety of key topics. The latest survey took place in January 2003 and with an overall response rate of 83%, the Group is confident that staff value the survey as a method of expressing their views and of initiating change in the organisation.

The Group has established an European Employee Communication Council to facilitate dialogue amongst employee representatives in the European Economic Area on employment matters.

66



Diversity
The Group is committed to recognising diversity in all areas of recruitment, employment, training and promotion. The Group’s business model is based on meritocracy and inclusiveness, which allows all employees to develop their full potential, irrespective of their race, gender, marital status, age, disability, religious belief, political opinion or sexual orientation.

In 2003 the Group participated in a number of programmes and activities in support of its approach to diversity and good people management.

The Group’s benchmark ratings for age and race diversity improved in 2003 and silver ratings in both Opportunity Now and Race for Opportunity were achieved. The Group sponsored the launch of the Age Audit toolkit by the Employers Forum on Age, which had been piloted earlier in the year. The Group was also a sponsor of the Guardian “Diversity in Britain” Conference and the Opportunity Now Annual Awards.

Health, Safety & Security
The health, safety and security of employees and customers is of paramount importance to the Group.

The Group has a continuous programme of reviewing its health and safety policies in light of current legislation and best practice, as well as to ensure that they meet the operational needs of the business.

Corporate responsibility
Business excellence requires that the Group meets changing customer, shareholder, investor, employee and supplier expectations and the Group believes that meeting high standards of environmental, social and ethical responsibility is key to the way it does business.

The Board regularly considers corporate responsibility issues and receives a formal report on these matters twice each year. Further details of the Group’s corporate responsibility policies will be contained in the 2003 Corporate Responsibility Report.

Code of ethics
The Group has adopted a code of ethics that is applicable to all of the Group’s employees and a copy is available upon request.

Charitable contributions
In 2003 the cost of the Group’s Community Investment programmes increased to £40.1 million (2002 – £33.7 million). The total amount given for charitable purposes by the company and its subsidiary undertakings during the year ended 31 December 2003 was £14.7 million (2002 – £14.7 million).

Corporate governance
The company is committed to high standards of Corporate governance. Details are given on pages 68 to 71.

Political donations
No political donations were made during the year.

At the annual general meeting in 2002 shareholders gave authority for the company and certain of its subsidiaries to make political donations and incur political expenditure up to a maximum aggregate sum of £675,000 as a precautionary measure in light of the wide definitions in The Political Parties, Elections and Referendums Act 2000, for a period of four years. These authorities have not been used and it is not proposed that the Group’s longstanding policy of not making contributions to any political party be changed.

Policy and practice on payment of creditors
In the year ending 31 December 2004, the Group will continue to adhere to the payment policy set out below in respect of all suppliers. The Group is committed to maintaining a sound commercial relationship with its suppliers. Consequently, it is the Group’s policy to negotiate and agree terms and conditions with its suppliers, which includes the giving of an undertaking to pay suppliers within 30 days of receipt of a correctly prepared invoice submitted in accordance with the terms of the contract or such other payment period as may be agreed.

At 31 December 2003, the Group’s trade creditors represented 27 days (2002 – 27 days) of amounts invoiced by suppliers. The company does not have any trade creditors.

Auditors
On 1 August 2003, Deloitte & Touche, the company’s auditors transferred their business to Deloitte & Touche LLP, a limited liability partnership incorporated under the Limited Liability Partnership Act 2000. The company’s consent has been given to treating the appointment of Deloitte & Touche as extending to Deloitte & Touche LLP with effect from 1 August 2003 under the provisions of section 26(5) of the Companies Act 1989. A resolution to re-appoint Deloitte & Touche LLP as the company’s auditor will be proposed at the forthcoming annual general meeting.

By order of the Board.

Miller McLean
Secretary
18 February 2004

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
is registered in Scotland No. 45551.

67




Corporate governance

The company is committed to high standards of corporate governance, business integrity and professionalism in all its activities.

Throughout the year ended 31 December 2003, the company has complied with all of the provisions set out in section 1 of the Combined Code issued by the London Stock Exchange in June 1998. In addition, the company has complied with the provisions set out in the revised Combined Code issued by the Financial Reporting Council in July 2003 (the ‘Code’) except in relation to:

  • the requirement that at least half of the Board should comprise independent non-executive directors, which is explained below in the paragraph headed ‘Board balance and independence.’

  • the authority reserved to the Board to make the final determination of the remuneration of the executive directors, which is explained below in the paragraph headed ‘Remuneration Committee’.

Under the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002, enhanced standards of corporate governance and business and financial disclosure apply to companies, including the company, with securities registered in the US. All changes necessary to comply with the new standards have been implemented.

Board of directors
The Board is the principal decision making forum for the company. It has overall responsibility for leading and controlling the company and is accountable to shareholders for financial and operational performance. The Board approves Group strategy and monitors performance. The Board has adopted a formal schedule of matters detailing key aspects of the company’s affairs reserved to it for its decision. This schedule is reviewed annually.

The roles of the Chairman and Group Chief Executive are distinct and separate, with a clear division of responsibilities. The Chairman leads the Board and ensures the effective engagement and contribution of all non-executive and executive directors. The Group Chief Executive has responsibility for all Group businesses and acts in accordance with the authority delegated from the Board of directors. Responsibility for the development of policy and strategy and operational management is delegated to the Group Chief Executive and other executive directors.

All directors participate in discussing strategy, performance and financial and risk management of the company and meetings of the Board are structured to allow open discussion. The Board meets at least eight times each year. It is supplied with comprehensive papers in advance of each Board meeting including financial and business reports covering the Group’s principal business activities. Members of the executive management attend and make regular presentations at meetings of the Board.

Board balance and independence
The Board currently comprises the Chairman, five executive directors and 11 non-executive directors. The Board functions effectively and efficiently and is considered to be of an appropriate size in view of the scale of the company and the diversity of its businesses. The directors provide the Group with the knowledge, mix of skills, experience and networks of contacts required. The Board Committees contain directors with a variety of relevant skills and experience so that no undue reliance is placed on any one individual.

The non-executive directors combine broad business and commercial experience with independent and objective judgement. The balance between non-executive and executive directors enables the Board to provide clear and effective leadership and maintain the highest standards of integrity across the company’s business activities. The names and biographies of all Board members are set out on page 63.

The Code requires the Board to determine whether its non-executive members are independent. The Board considers that all non-executive directors are independent for the purposes of the Code, with the following exceptions:

  • Mr Emilio Botin and Mr Juan Inciarte, who are representatives of Santander Central Hispano S.A.

  • Sir Angus Grossart and Sir Iain Vallance, who have served on the Board for 18 and 11 years, respectively.

  • Mr Iain Robertson who was formerly an executive director of the company.

As a result, in terms of the Code, the Board comprises six independent and 10 non-independent directors (including executive directors), in addition to the Chairman.

The composition of the Board is subject to continuing review and the provisions of the Code will be taken into account in respect of the balance of the Board. It is the Board’s intention to have a majority of independent directors. Sir Angus Grossart and Sir Iain Vallance have agreed to offer themselves for reelection at the company’s annual general meeting on 29 April 2004. However, they have indicated that they would not wish to submit themselves for re-election in April 2005.

Mr Bob Scott has been nominated as the senior independent director and would be consulted when necessary on the concerns of shareholders.

Re-election of directors
At each annual general meeting, one third of the directors will retire and offer themselves for re-election and each director must stand for re-election at least once every three years. Any non-executive directors who have served for more than nine years will also stand for annual re-election. The proposed reelection of directors is subject to prior review by the Board.

68



The names of directors standing for re-election at the 2004 annual general meeting are contained on page 66 and further information will be given in the Chairman’s letter to shareholders in relation to the company’s annual general meeting.

Information, induction and professional development
The Chairman ensures that all directors receive accurate, timely and clear information on all relevant matters. Any requests for further information or clarification are dealt with or co-ordinated by the Group Secretary.

The Group Secretary is responsible for advising the Board, through the Chairman, on all governance matters. All directors have access to the advice and services of the Group Secretary who is responsible to the Board for ensuring that Board procedures are followed and that applicable rules and regulations are complied with. In addition, all directors are able, if necessary, to obtain independent professional advice at the company’s expense.

Each new director receives a formal induction, including visits to all the Group’s major businesses and meetings with senior management. The induction is tailored to the director’s specific requirements. Existing directors undertake such professional development as they consider necessary in assisting them to carry out their duties as directors.

Performance evaluation
Building on the internal review conducted in 2001, a performance evaluation of the Board and its Committees was undertaken in the autumn of 2003. The review was conducted by the Group Secretary using a detailed questionnaire and meetings with each of the directors to discuss the performance of the Board and its Committees.

In addition, each director discussed his or her own performance with the Chairman and the senior independent director met individually with the executive directors and with the non-executive directors as a group without the Chairman present, to consider the Chairman’s performance. The report on the Board evaluation, which was designed to assist the Board in further improving its performance, was considered and discussed by the Board as a whole and specific actions are currently being implemented. A performance review will be conducted on an annual basis.

Board Committees
In order to provide effective oversight and leadership, the Board has established a number of Committees with particular responsibilities. The Committee chairmanship and membership is refreshed on a regular basis.

Audit Committee
The Audit Committee is responsible for assisting the Board in discharging its responsibilities in relation to the financial affairs of the Group, the arrangements for accounting and financial reporting and regulatory compliance, the standards of internal control, and arrangements for internal audit, risk management and the external auditors. The Audit Committee meets executive directors and management and the external and internal auditors privately.

In January 2003, the Audit Committee established its policy on the engagement of the external auditors to supply audit and non-audit services, taking into account relevant legislation regarding the provision of such services by an external audit firm. This policy is reviewed annually by the Audit Committee which also reviews and monitors the independence of the external auditors when it approves non-audit work to be carried out by them, taking into consideration relevant ethical guidance. To safeguard auditor objectivity and independence in the provision of non-audit services, a detailed submission is made by management to the Audit Committee prior to appointment. The submission contains, in particular, details as to why the proposed appointment would not breach auditor independence.

The Audit Committee undertakes an annual evaluation to assess the independence and objectivity of the external auditors and the effectiveness of the audit process, taking into consideration relevant professional and regulatory requirements. The Audit Committee will make recommendations in relation to the reappointment, remuneration and terms of engagement of the external auditors at the annual general meeting on 29 April 2004.

All members of the Audit Committee are independent non-executive directors. The Board is satisfied that the Committee members have recent and relevant financial experience. Although the Board has determined that each member of the Audit Committee is an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ as defined in the SEC rules under the US Securities Exchange Act, the members of the Audit Committee are selected with a view to the expertise and experience of the Audit Committee as a whole, and the Audit Committee reports to the Board as a single entity. The designation of a director or directors as an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ does not impose on any such director any duties, obligations or liability that are greater than the duties, obligations and liability imposed on such director as a member of the Audit Committee and Board in the absence of such a designation. Nor does the designation of a director as an ‘Audit Committee Financial Expert’ affect the duties, obligations or liability of any other member of the Board.

Remuneration Committee
The Remuneration Committee is responsible for formulating and reviewing the Group’s executive remuneration policy and making recommendations to the Board on the remuneration arrangements for its directors. The Directors’ Remuneration report is contained on pages 72 to 81. All members of the Remuneration Committee are independent non-executive directors.

Responsibility for determining the remuneration of executive directors has not been delegated to the Remuneration Committee, and in that sense the provisions of the Code have not been complied with. The Board as a whole reserves the authority to make the final determination of the remuneration of directors as it considers that this two stage process allows greater consideration and evaluation and is consistent with the unitary nature of the Board. No director is involved in decisions regarding his or her own remuneration.

69



Corporate governance continued

Nominations Committee
The Nominations Committee comprises independent non-executive directors, under the chairmanship of the Chairman. The Nominations Committee is responsible for assisting the Board in the formal selection and appointment of directors and considers succession planning for the Board. It also considers potential candidates and recommends appointments of new directors to the Board. The appointments are based on merit and against objective criteria including the time available, and commitment which will be required of, the potential director.

The Board is aware of the other commitments of its directors and is satisfied that these do not conflict with their duties as non-executive directors of the company.

Meetings
The number of meetings of the Board and the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees and individual attendance by members is shown below.

 Board Audit Remuneration Nominations 








 
Total number of meetings        
in 20038 6 3 2 








 
Number of meetings        
attended in 2003        








 
Sir George Mathewson8   2 








 
Sir Iain Vallance8   2 








 
Sir Angus Grossart8   2 








 
Mr Fred Goodwin8    








 
Mr Emilio Botin4    








 
Mr Colin Buchan7 6 1* 








 
Mr Jim Currie7  3  








 
Mr Lawrence Fish5    








 
Mr Juan Inciarte8    








 
Miss Eileen Mackay8 6 3  








 
Mr Norman McLuskie8    








 
Mr Gordon Pell8    








 
Mr Iain Robertson8    








 
Sir Steve Robson8 6 - - 








 
Mr Bob Scott8  3 1 








 
Mr Peter Sutherland6    








 
Mr Fred Watt8    








 
Mr Bill Wilson6 6 2 1 








 

* Mr Buchan was appointed to the Remuneration Committee on 29 October 2003

Relations with shareholders
The company communicates with shareholders through the annual report and by providing information in advance of the annual general meeting. Individual shareholders can raise matters relating to their shareholdings and the business of the Group at any time. Furthermore, shareholders are given the opportunity to ask questions at the annual general meeting or submit written questions in advance. The chairmen of the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees are available to answer questions at the annual general meeting.

The Board is proactive in obtaining an understanding of shareholder preferences and all directors receive regular reports. Communication with the company’s largest institutional shareholders is undertaken as part of the company’s investor relations programme. The mechanisms used to communicate with shareholders were considered as part of the Board evaluation and will be reviewed annually.

The Chairman and Group Chief Executive and, if appropriate, the senior independent director communicate shareholder views to the Board as a whole. In addition, the senior independent director will attend the results presentations.

The terms of reference of the Audit, Remuneration and Nominations Committees and the standard terms and conditions of the appointment of non-executive directors are available on the Group’s website (www.rbs.co.uk) and copies are available on request.

70



Internal control
The Board of directors is responsible for the Group’s system of internal control that is designed to facilitate effective and efficient operations and to ensure the quality of internal and external reporting and compliance with applicable laws and regulations. In devising internal controls, the Group has regard to the nature and extent of the risk, the likelihood of it crystallising and the cost of controls. A system of internal control is designed to manage, but not eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against the risk of material misstatement, fraud or losses.

The Board has established an ongoing process for the identification, evaluation and management of the significant risks faced by the Group, which operated throughout the year ended 31 December 2003 and to 18 February 2004, the date the directors approved the Report and Accounts. This process is regularly reviewed by the Board and meets the requirements of the guidance ‘Internal Control: Guidance for Directors on the Combined Code’ issued by the Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales in 1999.

The effectiveness of the Group’s internal control system is reviewed regularly by the Board and the Audit Committee. Executive management committees or boards of directors in each of the Group’s businesses receive quarterly reports on significant risks facing their business and how they are being controlled. These reports are combined and submitted to the Board as quarterly risk and control assessments. Additional details of the Group’s approach to risk management are given in the ‘Risk management’ section of the ‘Operating and financial review’ on pages 42 to 59. The Audit Committee also receives regular reports from Group Risk Management and Group Internal Audit. In addition, the Group’s independent auditors present to the Audit Committee reports that include details of any significant internal control matters which they have identified. The system of internal controls of the authorised institutions and other regulated entities in the Group are also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas.

Disclosure controls and procedures
The Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, after evaluating the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in the rules under the US Securities Exchange Act) have concluded and been authorised by the Board to certify that as at 31 December 2003, the company’s disclosure controls and procedures were adequate and effective and designed to ensure that material information relating to the company and its consolidated subsidiaries would be made known to them by others within those entities.

Changes in internal controls
There were no significant changes in the company’s internal controls over financial reporting or, to the knowledge of the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, in other factors that could significantly affect those internal controls as at 31 December 2003.

71



Directors’ remuneration report

The Remuneration Committee
The following directors, all of whom are independent non-executive directors, were members of the Remuneration Committee during the year ended 31 December 2003.

Bob Scott (Chairman)
Colin Buchan (from 29 October 2003)
Jim Currie
Eileen Mackay
Bill Wilson (deceased 25 December 2003)

During the accounting period, the Remuneration Committee confirmed the appointment of Ernst & Young and appointed Mercer Human Resource Consulting to provide advice on matters relating to directors’ remuneration in the UK and US respectively. In addition, the Remuneration Committee has taken account of the views of the Chairman and the Group Chief Executive on performance assessment.

In addition to advising the Remuneration Committee, Ernst & Young provided professional services in the ordinary course of business including actuarial and corporate recovery advice. Mercer Human Resource Consulting provided advice in connection with a range of healthcare, actuarial and investment matters.

Remuneration policy
The executive remuneration policy is kept under review by the Remuneration Committee and is set out below. There have been no material changes to the policy which was approved by shareholders at the company’s annual general meeting in 2003.

The objective of the executive remuneration policy is to provide, in the context of the company’s business strategy, remuneration in form and amount which will attract, motivate and retain high calibre executives. In order to achieve this objective, the policy is framed around the following core principles:

  • Total rewards will be set at levels that are competitive within the relevant market, taking each executive director’s remuneration package as a whole.

  • Total potential rewards will be earned through achievement of demanding performance targets based on measures consistent with shareholder interests over the short, medium and longer-term.

  • Remuneration arrangements will strike an appropriate balance between fixed and performance related rewards. Performance related elements will comprise the major part of executive remuneration packages.

  • Incentive plans and performance metrics will be structured to be robust through the business cycle.
  • Remuneration arrangements will be designed to support the company’s business strategy, to promote appropriate teamwork and to conform to best practice standards.

The non-executive directors’ fees are reviewed annually by the Board, on the recommendation of the Chairman. The level of remuneration reflects the responsibility and time commitment of directors and the level of fees paid to non-executive directors of comparable major UK companies. Non-executive directors do not participate in any incentive or performance plan.

The Remuneration Committee approves the remuneration arrangements of senior executives below Board level who are members of the Group Executive Management Committee, on the recommendation of the Group Chief Executive, and reviews all long-term incentive arrangements which are operated by the Group.

Components of executive remuneration
UK based directors
Salary
Salaries are reviewed annually as part of total remuneration, having regard to remuneration packages received by executives of comparable companies. The Remuneration Committee uses a range of survey data from remuneration consultants and reaches individual salary decisions taking account of the remuneration environment and the performance and responsibilities of the individual director.

Benefits
UK-based executive directors are eligible to participate in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (‘the RBS Fund’). The RBS Fund is a non-contributory defined benefit fund which provides pensions and other benefits within Inland Revenue limits. Certain directors receive additional pension and life assurance benefits in excess of Inland Revenue limits. Details of pension arrangements of directors are shown on page 81.

Executives directors are eligible to receive a choice of various employee benefits or a cash equivalent, on a similar basis to other employees. In addition, like other employees, executive directors are eligible also to participate in Sharesave, Buy As You Earn and the Group profit sharing scheme, which currently pays up to 10 per cent of salaries, depending on the Group’s performance. These schemes are not subject to performance conditions since they are operated on an all-employee basis. Executive directors also receive death in service benefits.

Short-term annual incentives
This typically focuses from year to year on the delivery of a combination of appropriate Group and individual financial and operational targets approved by the Remuneration Committee. Individual UK-based executive directors normally have a maximum annual bonus potential of 100 per cent of salary

72



(150 per cent in the case of the Group Chief Executive), although for exceptional performance, as measured by the achievement of significant objectives, bonuses up to 200 per cent of salary may be awarded.

Long-term incentives
The company provides long-term incentives in the form of share options and share or share equivalent awards. Their objective is to encourage the creation of value over the long-term and to align the rewards of the executive directors with the returns to shareholders.

Medium-term performance plan
The medium-term performance plan was approved by shareholders in April 2001. Each executive director is eligible for an annual award under the plan in the form of share or share equivalent awards, within the overall limit of one and a half times earnings. The awards made in 2003 were up to one and a half times salary.

The plan is highly geared to the company’s relative performance. All awards under the plan are subject to three-year performance targets. First, the annual growth in the company’s earnings per share (‘EPS’) must exceed the annualised growth of the Retail Prices Index (‘RPI’) plus three per cent. If this condition is satisfied, the company’s total shareholder return (‘TSR’) is compared with the TSR of a comparator group of certain companies in the financial services sector, referred to below. Awards under the plan will not vest if the company’s TSR is below the median of the comparator group. Achievement of the EPS target and median TSR performance against the comparator companies will result in the vesting of up to 50 per cent of the award, increasing on a sliding scale up to 100 per cent at upper quartile performance and up to 200 per cent at upper decile performance. This combination of EPS and TSR performance targets measures the underlying financial performance of the company and ensures a direct link between the value delivered to shareholders and the levels of incentive payment.

The companies in the comparator group are Abbey National plc; Aviva plc; Barclays PLC; Citigroup; HBOS plc; HSBC Holdings plc; Legal & General Group plc; Lloyds TSB Group plc; Prudential plc and Standard Chartered PLC. In choosing the comparator group, it was recognised that while the company has significant international business, the bulk of its operations are UK-based. Consequently the comparator group for the award in 2001 focused on the UK financial services sector. In respect of grants made in 2002 and subsequent years, the comparator group was reviewed and, following the merger of Halifax with Bank of Scotland, Citigroup was added to the group.

Options
The executive share option scheme was approved by shareholders in January 1999. Each executive director is eligible for the annual grant of an option, typically equal to 1.25 times salary, over shares at the market value at date of grant. No payment is made by the executive on the grant of an option award.

All executive share options are subject to a performance target, which is currently that the options are not exercisable unless the growth in the company’s EPS over three years has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus nine per cent. This EPS performance target, which is consistent with market practice, measures underlying financial performance and represents a stretching long-term test of performance. For awards made in 2004 and in future, there will be no re-testing of the performance condition. The condition is reviewed annually. No previous awards have been subject to re-testing.

73



Directors’ remuneration report continued

US based director – Mr Lawrence Fish
Salary
Mr Fish’s salary is reviewed annually as part of his total remuneration, having regard to levels of remuneration paid to executives of comparable US companies and Mr Fish’s performance.

Benefits
Mr Fish accrues pension benefits under a number of arrangements in the US. Details are provided on page 81. In addition, Mr Fish is entitled to receive other benefits on a similar basis to other employees.

Short-term annual incentives
Mr Fish’s short-term performance rewards take the form of an annual incentive plan which rewards the achievement of Group, business unit and individual financial and non-financial targets. In line with US market practice, the maximum annual bonus potential is normally 200 per cent of salary, although additional amounts to a maximum of an additional 200 per cent of salary may be awarded, at the discretion of the Board, for exceptional performance as measured by the achievement of significant objectives.

Longer term incentives
Mr Fish currently participates in two long term incentive plans established for executives of Citizens and may be eligible to participate in the company’s long tem incentive plans. The Remuneration Committee believes that it is appropriate to include, as part of his total remuneration package, an element of reward which is based on the value created in Citizens. It is also necessary to ensure that Mr Fish’s total remuneration package is competitive for the US market.

Citizens Long Term Incentive Plan
Mr Fish is eligible for an annual award under the Citizens Long Term Incentive Plan, a cash compensation plan designed to reward participants for achieving long-term financial results. A separate three-year cycle commences each year. The maximum award payable to him annually is 105 per cent of his average salary over the previous three-year period. These awards are not, in normal circumstances, payable until the relevant three-year performance target has been met. Each three-year performance target is based on the annual pre-tax income target for Citizens. For the maximum award to be paid in respect of each three-year target, Citizens must achieve 130 per cent of the three-year aggregate budgeted profit figure. This performance target has been chosen because it focuses on the profit targets of Citizens, which the Remuneration Committee believes are challenging, and aligns Mr Fish’s reward with the performance of Citizens. This performance target is measured by taking the pre-tax income for Citizens, which is a simple and transparent method of measuring a profit figure target.

Citizens Phantom 2000 Plan
Mr Fish has received two annual grants of awards under the Phantom 2000 Plan and, in line with the grant schedule put in place when the plan was approved by shareholders in 2000, no further awards will be made to him. Under this plan, units are awarded which are a cash-based proxy for share options. The value of the units at the time of vesting is performance-linked and depends on a formula, based on the absolute cumulative levels of economic profit generated by Citizens, the trend in economic profit earnings, and on the external market trends in the US banking sector, using the price/earnings ratios of comparator banks. This performance target has been chosen because it establishes a clear link between the level of potential incentive and the performance of Citizens. It is designed to provide competitive executive rewards in the US environment. Mr Fish may, in normal circumstances, exercise the award only between four and five years from the date of grant.

74



The performance graph
The undernoted performance graph illustrates the performance of the company over the past five years in terms of total shareholder return compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 index. This index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies. The total shareholder return for the company and the FTSE 100 have been rebased to 0 for 1998.

Total shareholder return

Service contracts
The company’s policy in relation to the duration of contracts with directors is that executive directors’ contracts generally continue until termination by either party, subject to the required notice, or until retirement date. The notice period under the service contracts of executive directors will not normally exceed 12 months. However, the notice period may exceed 12 months if existing service contracts have notice periods greater than 12 months and the Remuneration Committee considers it appropriate not to reduce the existing notice period. In relation to newly recruited executive directors, subject to the prior approval of the Remuneration Committee, the notice period from the employing company required to terminate the contract will not normally exceed 12 months unless there is a clear case for this. Where a longer period of notice is initially approved on appointment, it will normally be structured such that it will automatically reduce to 12 months in due course.

All new service contracts for executive directors will be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee. It will be the norm to include in those contracts standard clauses covering the performance review process, the company’s normal disciplinary procedure, and terms for dismissal in the event of failure to perform or in situations involving actions in breach of the Group’s policies.

Any compensation payment made in connection with the departure of an executive director will be subject to approval by the Remuneration Committee, having regard to the terms of the service contract and the reasons for termination.

75



Directors’ remuneration report continued

Information regarding executive directors’ service contracts is summarised in the table and notes below.

Name Date of current contract/
Employing company
 Normal retirement
age
 Notice period –
from company
 Notice period –
from executive
 

 
Fred Goodwin 1 August 1998 60 12 months 6 months 
  The Royal Bank of Scotland plc       
Norman McLuskie 9 October 1997 60 3 months 3 months 
  The Royal Bank of Scotland plc       
Gordon Pell 22 May 2002 60 12 months 6 months 
  National Westminster Bank Plc       
Fred Watt 28 September 2000 60 12 months 6 months 
  The Royal Bank of Scotland plc       
Lawrence Fish 18 February 2004 65 12 months 12 months 
  Citizens Financial Group Inc       
Iain Robertson See note below    

 

Except as noted below, in the event of severance of contract where any contractual notice period is not worked, the employing company may pay a sum to the executive in lieu of this period of notice. Any such payment would, at maximum, comprise base salary and a cash value in respect of fixed benefits (including pension plan contributions). In the event of failure to perform, or in situations involving breach of the employing company’s policies resulting in dismissal, reduced or no compensation will be paid to the executive. Depending on the circumstances of the termination of employment, the executive may be entitled, or the Remuneration Committee may exercise its discretion to allow, the executive to exercise outstanding awards under long-term incentive arrangements. Exceptions to these severance arrangements are as follows:

  • lf Mr McLuskie’s contract is terminated by the Royal Bank before he reaches age 60, he is entitled to a payment of three months’ base salary, annual bonus and benefits in lieu of notice plus up to 57 weeks’ pay (subject in some circumstances to mitigation) and an immediate pension without actuarial reduction. If his contract is terminated by the Royal Bank within 12 months of a change of control, he is entitled to a payment equal to twice his annual salary at the time of such notice, and an immediate pension. Mr McLuskie is due to retire in August 2004 when he reaches age 60.

  • If Mr Pell’s contract is terminated early by NatWest without notice, he is entitled to a compensation payment of base salary relating to the notice period, his annual bonus to the date of termination, a payment equal to the average annual bonus over the previous three years, payment in lieu of contractual benefits and allowances including pension and extra payments by way of funded or unfunded pension and death in service contributions relating to the notice period.
  • If Mr Watt’s contract is terminated through redundancy, he is entitled to payment in lieu of notice and a cash payment calculated by reference to his age and length of service. Currently this entitlement is equal to nine months’ salary, and an additional payment of 2.13 weeks’ pay.

  • Under Mr Fish’s previous contract dated 1 July 1996, the notice period on termination by the company was 24 months. Following review, during which Mr Fish’s normal retirement date was confirmed to be at the age of 65, Mr Fish has entered into a revised contract under which this notice period has been reduced to 12 months. No compensation has been paid or will be payable as a result of this change. The provisions of Mr Fish’s previous contract dealing with termination following a change of control of Citizens, the company or the Royal Bank have been eliminated from the contract. If his contract is terminated without cause, or if Mr Fish terminates the contract for good reason (as defined in the contract), he is entitled to a lump sum payment to compensate him for the loss of salary and annual bonus (and, in the case of a termination during 2004, long-term bonus) in relation to the period he would have worked had notice been given by Citizens. Mr Fish would also be entitled to receive for this period health, life insurance and long term disability coverage and any other benefits determined in accordance with the plans, policies and practices of Citizens at the time of termination.

  • Mr Robertson ceased his full-time employment with the Royal Bank on 25 June 2003 but continued as a director of the company in a non-executive capacity. Details of his contract as a non-executive director are set out on page 78.

76



Chairman and non-executive directors
The original date of appointment as a director of the company and the scheduled date for the next re-election is as follows:

 Date first appointedNext re-election

Sir George Mathewson1.9.8729.4.04
Sir Iain Vallance14.1.9329.4.04
Sir Angus Grossart30.9.8529.4.04
Emilio Botin4.2.8929.4.04
Colin Buchan1.6.022006
Jim Currie28.11.012005
Juan Inciarte25.2.982005
Eileen Mackay16.5.962006
Iain Robertson14.1.9329.4.04
Sir Steve Robson25.7.012005
Bob Scott31.1.012006
Peter Sutherland31.1.012006



Other than Mr Robertson, the non-executive directors do not have service contracts or notice periods, although under the company’s articles of association, all directors must retire by rotation and seek re-election by shareholders at least every three years.

Mr Robertson entered into a new contract to reflect his role as a non-executive director, which took effect on 25 June 2003. Under this contract, Mr Robertson’s appointment will terminate at the company’s annual general meeting in April 2005, unless terminated earlier by either party on one month’s written notice.

No compensation would be paid to the Chairman or to any non-executive director in the event of early termination.

The tables and explanatory notes on pages 78 to 81 report the remuneration of each director for the year ended 31 December 2003 and have been audited by the company’s auditors, Deloitte & Touche LLP.

77



Directors’ remuneration report continued

Directors’ remuneration

 Salary/
fees
£000
 Performance
bonus*
£000
 Benefits
£000
 2003
Total
£000
 2002
Total
£000
 

 
Chairman          
Sir George Mathewson497  41 538 468 
           
Executive directors          
Fred Goodwin898 990 28 1,916 2,580 
Lawrence Fish612 1,223 24 1,859 3,352 
Norman McLuskie498 539 11 1,048 1,375 
Gordon Pell626 676 5 1,307 1,725 
Iain Robertson(until 25 June 2003)159  8 167 1,353 
Fred Watt531 578 1 1,110 1,433 

 

* includes 10% profit sharing

Basic salary is the only component of the remuneration package which is pensionable.

Non-executive directorsBoard fees
£000
 Board
committee fees
£000
 2003
Total
£000
 2002
Total
£000
 

 
Vice-chairmen        
Sir Iain Vallance100  100 100 
Sir Angus Grossart100  100 100 
         
Emilio Botin44  44 44 
Colin Buchan44 12 56 28 
Jim Currie44 10 54 52 
Juan Inciarte44  44 44 
Eileen Mackay44 20 64 63 
Iain Robertson(from 25 June 2003)50  50  
Sir Steve Robson44 10 54 54 
Bob Scott44 23 67 67 
Peter Sutherland44  44 44 
Bill Wilson44 38 82 82 

 
 
From 25 June 2003, Mr Robertson has carried out his role as Chairman, Corporate Banking and Financial Markets and as a director in a non-executive capacity. He also provides general advice on business issues to the Board and Board Committees as appropriate, including attendance as required at the Group Audit Committee and the Advances Committee. For these services Mr Robertson receives a fee of £100,000 per annum.

No director received any expense allowances chargeable to UK income tax or compensation for loss of office/termination payment. The non-executive directors did not receive any bonus payments or benefits.

78



Share options
Options to subscribe for ordinary shares of 25p each in the company granted to, and exercised by, directors during the year to 31 December 2003 are included in the table below:

     Options exercised in 2003       
     
       
 Options held
at 1 January
2003
 Options
granted in
2003
 Number Market price at
date of exercise
£
 Option price
£
 Options held at 31 December 2003 

Number Exercise period














 
Sir George Mathewson69,257       9.33 69,257 11.05.01 – 10.05.08 
 147,247       7.81 147,247 29.03.03 – 28.03.10 
 150       12.40 150 09.08.03 – 08.08.06*
 20,100       17.18 20,100 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 
 1,347       13.64 1,347 01.10.08 – 31.03.09*
 19,500       18.18 19,500 14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
   36,400     12.37 36,400 13.03.06 – 12.03.13 

 
 257,601 36,400       294,001   

 
Fred Goodwin164,571       8.75 164,571 07.12.01 – 06.12.08 
 2,963       11.18 2,963 04.03.02 – 03.03.09 
 27,306       11.97 27,306 03.06.02 – 02.06.09 
 153,648       7.81 153,648 29.03.03 – 28.03.10 
 150       12.40 150 09.08.03 – 08.08.06*
 43,700       17.18 43,700 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 
 1,713       9.85 1,713 01.10.05 – 31.03.06*
 41,300       18.18 41,300 14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
   72,800     12.37 72,800 13.03.06 – 12.03.13 

 
 435,351 72,800       508,151   

 
Lawrence Fish107,877       9.33 107,877 11.05.01 – 10.05.08 
 150       12.40 150 09.08.03 – 08.08.06*

 
 108,027         108,027   

 
Norman McLuskie16,613       9.33 16,613 11.05.01 – 10.05.08 
 8,860       11.18 8,860 04.03.02 – 03.03.09 
 11,356       11.97 11,356 03.06.02 – 02.06.09 
 33,291       7.81 33,291 29.03.03 – 28.03.10 
 150       12.40 150 09.08.03 – 08.08.06*
 90   90 15.92 9.85    
 23,300       17.18 23,300 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 
 335       13.64 335 01.10.04 – 31.03.05*
 22,100       18.18 22,100 14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
 335       12.35 335 01.10.05 – 31.03.06*
   39,700     12.37 39,700 13.03.06 – 12.03.13 

 
 116,430 39,700 90     156,040   

 
Gordon Pell51,216       7.81 51,216 29.03.03 – 28.03.10 
 150   150 16.26 12.40    
 29,100       17.18 29,100 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 
 27,600       18.18 27,600 14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
   49,800     12.37 49,800 13.03.06 – 12.03.13 

 
 108,066 49,800 150     157,716   

 
Iain Robertson56,635       9.33 56,635 11.05.01 – 10.05.08 
 82,654       11.18 82,654 04.03.02 – 03.03.09 
 128,040       7.81 128,040 29.03.03 – 28.03.10 
 150   150 16.26 12.40    
 393       9.85 393 01.10.03 – 31.03.04*
 36,400       17.18 36,400 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 

 
 304,272   150     304,122   

 
Fred Watt70,148       12.83 70,148 04.09.03 – 03.09.10 
 23,300       17.18 23,300 14.08.04 – 13.08.11 
 710       13.64 710 01.10.04 – 31.03.05*
 22,100       18.18 22,100 14.03.05 – 13.03.12 
   42,500     12.37 42,500 13.03.06 – 12.03.13 

 
 116,258 42,500       158,758   

 

* Options held under the sharesave and option 2000 schemes, which are not subject to performance conditions.

79



Directors’ remuneration report continued

No options had their terms and conditions varied during the accounting period to 31 December 2003. No payment is required on the award of an option.

The executive share options which are exercisable from March 2002 onwards are subject to the satisfaction of an EPS growth target such that no option is exercisable unless the growth in the company’s EPS over three years has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus 9%. In respect of executive share options exercisable before March 2002 the performance condition is that the growth in the company’s EPS over three years has exceeded the growth in the RPI plus 6%.

The market price of the company’s ordinary shares at 31 December 2003 was £16.46 and the range during the year to 31 December 2003 was £12.37 to £17.80.

In the ten year period to 31 December 2003, awards made using new issue shares under the company’s share plans represented 4.2% of the company’s issued ordinary share capital, leaving an available dilution headroom of 5.8%.

Medium Term Performance Plan

   Awards granted in 2003   Awards vested in 2003   
   
   
   
  Scheme interests
(share equivalents)
at
 1January
2003
 Scheme interests
(share equivalents)
awarded
 Market price
on award
£
 End of the period
for
qualifying
conditions
to be fulfilled
 No of
interests
vested*
 Market price
on vesting
£
 Value of
interests vested
£
 Interests at
31 December
2003
 

 
Fred Goodwin68,807   16.35 31.12.03 93,040 16.46 1,531,438 93,040 
 44,378   18.59 31.12.04       44,378 
   78,398 17.22 31.12.05       78,398 

 
 113,185             215,816 

 
Norman McLuskie36,697   16.35 31.12.03 49,621 16.46 816,762 49,621 
 23,399   18.59 31.12.04       23,399 
   28,456 17.22 31.12.05       28,456 

 
 60,096             101,476 

 
Gordon Pell45,871   16.35 31.12.03 62,026 16.46 1,020,948 62,026 
 29,585   18.59 31.12.04       29,585 
   35,715 17.22 31.12.05       35,715 

 
 75,456             127,326 

 
Iain Robertson57,339   16.35 31.12.03 77,533 16.46 1,276,193 77,533 

 
Fred Watt36,697   16.35 31.12.03 49,621 16.46 816,762 49,621 
 24,744   18.59 31.12.04       24,744 
   30,488 17.22 31.12.05       30,488 

 
 61,441             104,853 

 

*Awards were granted on 17 June 2001 and vested at 135.22% at the end of the performance period on 31 December 2003.
No variation was made to any of the terms of the plan during the year. The performance measures are detailed on page 73.

Phantom 2000 Plan

   Awards granted during year       
   
       
 Phantom 2000
units at

1 January 2003
 Units awarded
during year
 Market price
on award
 End of the period
for qualifying
conditions
to be fulfilled
 Benefits received
during the year
 Phantom 2000
units at
31 December
2003
 

 
Lawrence Fish1,000,000   01.01.04     1,000,000 
 1,000,000   01.01.05     1,000,000 

 
 2,000,000         2,000,000 

 

No variation was made to any of the terms of the plan during the year. The performance measures are detailed on page 74.

Citizens Long Term Incentive Plan

 Interests at 1 January 2003 Awards granted during year Benefits received during the year Interests at 31 December 2003

Lawrence FishLTIP* awards for the LTIP award for the LTIP award for the LTIP* awards for the
 3 year periods: 3 year period: 3 year period: 3 year periods:
 01.01.00 – 31.12.02 01.01.03 – 31.12.05 01.01.00 – 31.12.02 01.01.01 – 31.12.03
 01.01.01 – 31.12.03   was $970,885 01.01.02 – 31.12.04
 01.01.02 – 31.12.04     01.01.03 – 31.12.05

*Under the cash LTIP, target payment is 60% of average salary over the three year period, maximum payment is 105% of average salary. No variation was made to any of the terms of the plan during the year. The performance measures are detailed on page 74.

80



Directors’ pension arrangements
During the year, Mr Goodwin, Mr McLuskie, Mr Pell,Mr Robertson and Mr Watt participated in The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (‘the RBS Fund’). The RBS Fund is a defined benefit fund which provides pensions and other benefits within Inland Revenue limits.

The pension entitlements of Mr Goodwin, Mr Pell, Mr Robertson, and Mr Watt within the RBS Fund are restricted by Inland Revenue limits as set out in the Finance Act 1989. Additional life assurance cover in excess of these limits is provided by a separate arrangement. Arrangements have been made to provide Mr Goodwin and Mr Pell with additional pension benefits on a defined benefit basis outwith the RBS Fund. The figures shown below include the accrual in respect of these arrangements. Mr Watt is provided with additional pension benefits on a defined contribution basis and contributions made in the year are shown below.

Sir George Mathewson receives life insurance cover under an individual arrangement. The non-executive directors do not accrue pension benefits, other than Mr Robertson who continued to accrue benefits in the RBS Fund after his appointment as a non-executive director.

Mr Fish accrues pension benefits under a number of arrangements in the USA. Defined benefits are built up under the Citizens’ Qualified Plan, Excess Plan and Supplemental Executive Retirement Arrangement. In addition, he is a member of two defined contribution arrangements – a Qualified 401(k) Plan and an Excess 401(k) Plan.

As in the 2002 Report and Accounts, disclosure of these benefits has been made in accordance with the Stock Exchange Listing Rules and the Combined Code and with the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002.

Defined benefit arrangementsAge at
31 December
2003
  Accrued
entitlement at
31 December
2003
000 p.a.
  Additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2003
000 p.a.
  Additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2003
000 p.a.
*

 Transfer
value as at
31 December
2003
000
  Transfer
value as at
31 December
2002
000
  Increase
in transfer
value during
year ended
31 December
2003
000
  Transfer value
for the additional
pension
earned
during the
year ended
31 December
2003
000
*


 
Fred Goodwin45  £325  £49  £44  £2,674  £1,900  £774  £365 
Norman McLuskie59  £194  £28  £25  £3,358  £2,624  £734  £433 
Gordon Pell53  £229  £17  £14  £2,930  £2,366  £564  £178 
Iain Robertson58  £28  £3  £2  £449  £353  £96  £39 
Fred Watt43  £5  £1  £1  £40  £23  £17  £12 
Lawrence Fish59  $883  $240  $240  $9,966  $6,648  $3,318  $2,713 

 

* net of statutory revaluation applying to deferred pensions

Notes:  
(1) There is a significant difference in the form of disclosure required by the Combined Code and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002. The former requires the disclosure of the additional pension earned during the year and the transfer value equivalent to this pension based on stock market conditions at the end of the year. The latter requires the disclosure of the difference between the transfer value at the start and end of the year and is therefore dependent on the change in stock market conditions over the course of the year. The above disclosure has been made in accordance with the Combined Code and the Directors’ Remuneration Report Regulations 2002.
(2) The figures for Mr Pell include an additional pension secured by a transfer from his previous employer which increases in line with statutory revaluation, not salary inflation.
(3) The transfer values disclosed above do not represent a sum paid or payable to the individual director. Instead they represent a potential liability of the company /pension scheme.

Contributions and allowances paid in the year ended 31 December 2003 under defined contribution arrangements were:

 2003
000
 2002
000
 

 
Fred Watt£109 £93 
Lawrence Fish$90 $90 

 

 

Bob Scott, Chairman of the Remuneration Committee
18 February 2004

81



Directors’ interests in shares

Ordinary shares
The following directors held a beneficial interest in the company’s ordinary shares:

 31 December
2003
 1 January 2003
or date of
appointment if later
   31 December
2003
 1 January 2003
or date of
appointment if later
 

 
Colin Buchan5,000  Gordon Pell 582 432 
Lawrence Fish11,120 11,120 Iain Robertson 125,139 120,904 
Fred Goodwin64,718 64,703 Bob Scott 1,445 1,445 
Eileen Mackay6,140 6,086 Sir Iain Vallance 2,500 2,500 
Sir George Mathewson247,978 247,948 Fred Watt 7,453 7,223 
Norman McLuskie154,508 150,037       

 

No other director had an interest in the company’s ordinary shares during the year.

Additional Value shares
The following directors held a beneficial interest in the company’s Additional Value Shares:

 31 December
2003
 1 January 2003
or date of
appointment if later
   31 December
2003
 1 January 2003
or date of
appointment if later
 

 
Lawrence Fish 10,950 Norman McLuskie  26,584 
Fred Goodwin 64,703 Iain Robertson  112,747 
Eileen Mackay 6,086 Sir Iain Vallance  2,500 
Sir George Mathewson 173,674       

 

No other director had an interest in the company’s Additional Value Shares during the year.

Following the final dividend payment on the Additional Value Shares on 1 December 2003, the Additional Value Shares were de-listed from the London Stock Exchange, converted to Non-voting Deferred Shares and transferred to RBS NVDS Nominees Limited. None of the directors has an interest in the Non-voting Deferred Shares.

Preference shares
Mr Fish held 20,000 non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each at 31 December 2003 (2002 – 20,000). No other director had an interest in the preference shares during the year.

Loan notes
No director had an interest in loan notes during the year.

The company’s Register of Directors’ Interests, which is open to inspection, contains full details of directors’ shareholdings and options to subscribe.

On 7 January 2004 and 9 February 2004, eight and seven ordinary shares of 25p each, respectively, were acquired by Mr Goodwin under the Group’s Buy As You Earn share scheme.

On 7 January 2004 and 9 February 2004, eight and seven ordinary shares of 25p each, respectively, were acquired by Mr McLuskie under the Group’s Buy As You Earn share scheme.

No director held a non-beneficial interest in the shares of the company at 31 December 2003, at 1 January 2003 or date of appointment if later.

82



Statement of directors’ responsibilities

United Kingdom company law requires the directors to prepare accounts for each financial year which give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company and of the Group as at the end of the financial year and of the profit or loss of the Group for that year. In preparing those accounts, the directors are required to:

  • select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

  • make judgements and estimates that are reasonable and prudent; and

  • state whether applicable accounting standards have been followed, subject to any material departures disclosed and explained in the accounts.

The directors are responsible for keeping proper accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Group and to enable them to ensure that the accounts comply with the Companies Act 1985. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of the company and the Group and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and detection of fraud and other irregularities.

 

By order of the Board.

 

Miller McLean
Secretary
18 February 2004

83



 

Make it happen

 

84




Financial statements

Contents  
   
Independent auditors’ report86 
   
Accounting policies87 
   
Consolidated profit and loss account91 
   
Consolidated balance sheet92 
   
Statement of consolidated total  
recognised gains and losses93 
   
Reconciliation of movements in  
consolidated shareholders’ funds93 
   
Consolidated cash flow statement94 
   
Balance sheet – the company95 
   
Notes on the accounts96 

85



Independent auditors’ report to the members of
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc

We have audited the financial statements of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc (“the company”) and its subsidiaries (together “the Group”) for the year ended 31 December 2003 which comprise the accounting policies, the profit and loss account, the balance sheets, the cash flow statement, the statement of total recognised gains and losses, the reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds and the related notes 1 to 53. These financial statements have been prepared under the accounting policies set out therein. We have also audited the information in the part of the directors’ remuneration report that is described as having been audited.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditors

As described in the ‘Statement of directors’ responsibilities’, the company’s directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial statements in accordance with applicable United Kingdom law and accounting standards. They are also responsible for the preparation of the other information contained in the Annual Report on Form 20-F including the directors’ remuneration report. Our responsibility is to audit the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited in accordance with relevant United Kingdom legal and regulatory requirements and auditing standards.

We report to you our opinion as to whether the financial statements give a true and fair view and whether the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985. We also report to you if, in our opinion, the directors’ report is not consistent with the financial statements, if the company has not kept proper accounting records, if we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit, or if information specified by law regarding directors’ remuneration and transactions with the company and other members of the Group is not disclosed.

We review whether the corporate governance statement reflects the company's compliance with the seven provisions of the Combined Code specified for our review by the Listing Rules of the Financial Services Authority, and we report if it does not. We are not required to consider whether the Board's statements on internal control cover all risks and controls, or form an opinion on the effectiveness of the Group's corporate governance procedures or its risk and control procedures.

We read the directors’ report and the other information contained in the Annual Report on Form 20-F as described in the contents section including the unaudited part of the directors’ remuneration report and consider the implications for our report if we become aware of any apparent misstatements or material inconsistencies with the financial statements.

Basis of audit opinion

We conducted our audit in accordance with United Kingdom auditing standards issued by the Auditing Practices Board and with generally accepted auditing standards in the United States of America. An audit includes examination, on a test basis, of evidence relevant to the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited. It also includes an assessment of the significant estimates and judgements made by the directors in the preparation of the financial statements and of whether the accounting policies are appropriate to the circumstances of the company and the Group, consistently applied and adequately disclosed.

We planned and performed our audit so as to obtain all the information and explanations which we considered necessary in order to provide us with sufficient evidence to give reasonable assurance that the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited are free from material misstatement, whether caused by fraud or other irregularity or error. In forming our opinion, we also evaluated the overall adequacy of the presentation of information in the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited.

UK Opinion

In our opinion the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the company and the Group as at 31 December 2003 and of the profit and cash flows of the Group for the year then ended and the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report described as having been audited have been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 1985.

US Opinion

In our opinion, the financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Group as at 31 December 2003 and 2002 and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2003 in conformity with accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom.

Accounting principles generally accepted in the United Kingdom vary in certain significant respects from accounting principles generally accepted in the United States of America. The application of the latter would have affected the determination of net income for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2003 and the determination of shareholders’ equity as at 31 December 2003 and 2002, to the extent summarised in Note 53 to the financial statements.

Deloitte & Touche LLP
Chartered Accountants and Registered Auditors
Edinburgh
18 February 2004

86




Accounting policies

The accounts have been prepared in accordance with applicable Accounting Standards in the UK and the Statements of Recommended Accounting Practice issued by the British Bankers’ Association and by the Finance and Leasing Association. The Statement of Recommended Practice issued by the Association of British Insurers (1998) has been followed by the insurance members of the Group; they have been consolidated in the recognised manner for banking groups, in particular, by using the embedded value method for life business. A summary of the more important accounting policies is set out below. The consolidated accounts are prepared in accordance with the special provisions of Part VII of the Companies Act 1985 (“the Act”) relating to banking groups.

The accounts of the company are prepared in accordance with section 226 of, and Schedule 4 to, the Act and, as permitted by section 230(3) of the Act, no profit and loss account is presented.

1 Accounting convention and bases of consolidation
The accounts are prepared under the historical cost convention modified by the periodic revaluation of premises and certain investments. To avoid undue delay in the presentation of the Group’s accounts, the accounts of certain subsidiary undertakings have been made up to 30 November. There have been no changes in respect of these subsidiary undertakings, in the period from their balance sheet dates to 31 December, that materially affect the view given by the Group’s accounts.

2 Revenue recognition
Interest is credited to the profit and loss account as it accrues unless there is significant doubt that it can be collected (as described in the accounting policy on loans and advances).

Fees in respect of services are recognised as the right to consideration accrues through performance to customers. Services are in respect of financial services related products, the arrangement is generally contractual, the cost of providing this service is incurred as the service is rendered and the price is usually fixed and always determinable.

The application of the Group’s policy to significant fee types is outlined below.

Loan origination fees: up-front lending fees are recognised as income when receivable except where they are charged in lieu of interest or charged to cover the cost of a continuing service to the borrower, in which case they are credited to income over the life of the advance.

Commitment and utilisation fees: these are generally determined as a percentage of the outstanding used or unused facility. They are usually charged to the customer in arrears and recognised when charged.

Payment services: this comprises income received for payment services including cheques cashed, direct debits, Clearing House Automated Payments (the UK electronic settlementsystem) and BACS payments (the automated clearing house that processes direct debits and direct credits). These are generally charged on a per transaction basis. The income is earned when the payment or transaction occurs. Payment services income is usually charged to the customer’s account, monthly or quarterly in arrears. Accruals are raised for services provided but not charged at period end.

Card related services: fees from credit card business include:

Commission received from retailers for processing credit and debit card transactions: income is accrued to the profit and loss account as the service is performed.

Interchange received: as issuer, the Group receives a fee (interchange) each time a cardholder purchases goods and services. The Group also receives interchange fees from other card issuers for providing cash advances through its branch and Automated Teller Machine networks. These fees are accrued once the transaction has taken place.

An annual fee payable by a credit card holder is charged at the beginning of each year but is deferred and taken to income over the period of the service i.e. 12 months.

Insurance brokerage: this is made up of fees and commissions received from the agency sale of insurance. Commission on the sale of an insurance contract is earned at the inception of the policy as the insurance has been arranged and placed. However, provision is made where commission is refundable in the event of policy cancellation in line with estimated cancellations.

Securities and derivatives held for trading are recorded at fair value. Changes in fair value are recognised in dealing profits together with dividends from, and interest receivable and payable on, trading business assets and liabilities.

3 Goodwill
Goodwill is the excess of the cost of acquisition of subsidiary and associated undertakings over the fair value of the Group’s share of net tangible assets acquired. Goodwill arising on acquisitions of subsidiary and associated undertakings after 1 October 1998 is capitalised on the balance sheet and amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful economic life, currently over periods up to 20 years.Capitalised goodwill is reviewed for impairment at the end of the first full year following an acquisition and subsequently if events or changes in circumstances indicate that its carrying value may not be recoverable in full. Goodwill arising on acquisitions of subsidiary and associated undertakings prior to 1 October 1998, previously charged directly against profit and loss account reserves, was not reinstated under the transitional provisions of FRS 10 ‘Goodwill and Intangible Assets’. It will be written back only on disposal and reflected in the calculation of the gains or losses arising.

87



Accounting policies continued

4 Foreign currencies
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated into sterling at the rates of exchange ruling at the balance sheet date. Profit and loss accounts of overseas branches and subsidiary undertakings are translated at the average rates of exchange for the period. Exchange differences arising from the application of closing rates of exchange to the opening net assets of overseas branches and subsidiary undertakings and from restating their results from average to period-end rates are taken to profit and loss account reserves, together with exchange differences arising on related foreign currency borrowings. All other exchange differences are included in operating profit.

5 Pensions and other post-retirement benefits
The Group provides post-retirement benefits in the form of pensions and healthcare plans to eligible employees. The cost of defined benefit pension schemes and healthcare plans is assessed by independent professionally qualified actuaries and recognised on a systematic basis over employees’ service lives. Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised in the profit and loss account when payable.

6 Leases
Contracts to lease assets are classified as finance leases if they transfer substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset to the customer. Other contracts to lease assets are classified as operating leases. Total gross earnings under finance leases are allocated to accounting periods using the actuarial after tax method to give a constant periodic rate of return on the net cash investment. Finance lease receivables are stated in the balance sheet at the amount of the net investment in the lease. Rental income from operating leases is credited to the profit and loss account on a receivable basis over the term of the lease. Balance sheet carrying values of finance lease receivables and operating lease assets include amounts in respect of the residual values of the leased assets. Unguaranteed residual values are subject to regular review to identify potential impairments. Provisions are made for impairment arising on specific asset categories.

7 General insurance
General insurance comprises short-duration contracts and include principally property and liability insurance contracts. Due to the nature of the products sold – retail based property and casualty, motor, home and personal health insurance contracts – the insurance protection is provided on an even basis throughout the term of the policy.

In calculating operating profit from general insurance activities, premiums (net of reinsurance premiums) are recognised in the accounting period in which they begin. Unearned premiums represent the proportion of the net premiums that relate to periods of insurance after the balance sheet date and are calculated over the period of exposure under the policy, on a daily basis, 24th’s basis or allowing for the estimated incidence of exposure under policies which are longer than twelve months. Provision is made where necessary for the estimatedamount required over and above unearned premiums net of reinsurance, including that in respect of future written business on discontinued lines under the run-off of delegated underwriting authority arrangements. It is designed to meet future claims and related expenses and is calculated across related classes of business on the basis of a separate carry forward of deferred acquisition expenses after making allowance for investment income.

Acquisition expenses relating to new and renewed business for all classes are deferred over the period during which the premiums are unearned. The principal acquisition costs so deferred are commissions payable, direct advertising expenditure, costs associated with the telesales and underwriting staff and prepaid claims handling costs in respect of delegated claims handling arrangements for claims which are expected to occur after the balance sheet date.

Claims (net of reinsurance) are recognised in the accounting period in which the loss occurs. Provision is made for the full cost (net of reinsurance) of settling outstanding claims at the balance sheet date, including claims estimated to have been incurred but not yet reported at that date, and claims handling expenses.

8 Long-term life assurance business
The Group’s long-term assurance business includes whole-life, guaranteed renewable term life, endowment, annuity and universal life contracts that are expected to remain in force for an extended period of time, generally five to forty years.

The value placed on the Group’s long-term life assurance business comprises the net assets of the Group’s life assurance subsidiaries, including its interest in the surpluses retained within the long-term assurance funds, and the present value of profits inherent in in-force policies. In calculating the value of in-force policies, future surpluses expected to emerge are estimated using appropriate assumptions as to future mortality, persistency and levels of expenses, which are then discounted at a risk-adjusted rate. Changes in this value, which is determined on a post-tax basis, are included in operating profit, grossed up at the underlying rate of taxation.

Long-term assurance assets attributable to policyholders are valued on the following bases: equity shares and debt securities at market price; investment properties and loans at valuation. These assets are held in the life funds of the Group’s life assurance companies, and although legally owned by them, the Group only benefits from these assets when surpluses are declared. To reflect the distinct nature of the long-term assurance assets, they are shown separately on the consolidated balance sheet, as are liabilities attributable to policyholders.

The Group has reinsured contracts that transfer significant insurance risk. Within net assets, the reinsurance cash flows are recognised when they become payable. For most contracts this effectively spreads the cost of reinsurance over the life of the reinsured contracts. In some cases, the acquisition costs

88



are financed by the reinsurer offering a nil premium payment period. In these cases, the acquisition costs incurred on the underlying insurance contracts are compared with the benefit arising with respect to the nil premium paying period on the reinsurance contract.

9 Loans and advances
The Group makes provisions for bad and doubtful debts, through charges to the profit and loss account, so as to record impaired loans and advances at their expected ultimate net realisable value.

Specific provisions are made against individual loans and advances that the Group no longer expects to recover in full. For the Group’s portfolios of smaller balance homogeneous advances, such as credit card receivables, specific provisions are established on a portfolio basis taking into account the level of arrears, security and past loss experience. For loans and advances that are individually assessed, the specific provision is determined from a review of the financial condition of the borrower and any guarantor and takes into account the nature and value of any security held.

The general provision is made to cover bad and doubtful debts that have not been separately identified at the balance sheet date but are known to be present in any portfolio of advances. The level of general provision is determined in the light of past experience, current economic and other factors affecting the business environment and the Group’s monitoring and control procedures, including the scope of specific provisioning procedures.

Specific and general provisions are deducted from loans and advances. When there is significant doubt that interest receivable can be collected, it is excluded from the profit and loss account and credited to an interest suspense account. Loans and advances and suspended interest are written off in part or in whole when there is no realistic prospect of recovery.

10 Taxation
Provision is made for taxation at current enacted rates on taxable profits taking into account relief for overseas taxation where appropriate. Timing differences arise where gains and losses are accounted for in different periods for financial reporting purposes and for taxation purposes. Deferred taxation is accounted for in full for all such timing differences, except in relation to revaluations of fixed assets where there is no commitment to dispose of the asset, taxable gains on sales of fixed assets that are rolled over into the tax cost of replacement assets, and unremitted overseas earnings. Deferred tax assets are only recognised to the extent that it is considered more likely than not that they will be recovered. Deferred tax amounts are not discounted.

11 Debt securities and equity shares
Debt securities and equity shares intended for use on a continuing basis in the Group’s activities are classified as investment securities and are stated at cost less provision forany permanent diminution in value. The cost of dated investment securities is adjusted for the amortisation of premiums or discounts over periods to redemption and the amortisation is included in interest receivable. Other debt securities and equity shares are carried at fair value, with changes in fair value recognised in the profit and loss account.

12 Shares in subsidiary undertakings
The company’s shares in subsidiary undertakings are stated in the balance sheet of the company at directors’ valuation that takes account of the subsidiary undertakings’ net asset values.

13 Interests in associated undertakings
Interests in associated undertakings are accounted for by the equity method and are stated in the consolidated balance sheet at the Group’s share of their net tangible assets. The Group’s share of the results of associated undertakings is included in the consolidated profit and loss account. For this purpose, the latest available audited accounts are used together with available unaudited interim accounts.

14 Tangible fixed assets
Freehold and long leasehold properties are revalued on a rolling basis, each property being revalued at least every five years. Other tangible fixed assets are stated at cost less depreciation and provisions for impairment. Costs of adapting premises for the use of the Group are separately identified and depreciated.

Tangible fixed assets are depreciated to their residual value over their estimated useful economic lives on a straight-line basis, as follows:

Freehold and long leasehold buildings50 years
Short leaseholdsunexpired period of the lease
Property adaptation costs10 to 15 years
Computer equipmentup to 5 years
Other equipment4 to 15 years

Assets on operating leases are depreciated over their estimated useful lives on a straight-line or reverse-annuity basis. Land has an unlimited life and is not depreciated.

Investment properties are revalued annually to open market value. No depreciation is charged on freehold investment properties, in accordance with the requirements of Statement of Standard Accounting Practice 19 ‘Accounting for investment properties’. This is a departure from the requirements of the Companies Act 1985 which requires all tangible fixed assets to be depreciated. Investment properties are held not for consumption but for investment and the directors consider that to depreciate them would not give a true and fair view. It is not practicable to assess estimated useful lives for investment properties, and accordingly the effect of not depreciating them cannot be reasonably quantified.

89



Accounting policies continued

15 Derivatives
The Group enters into derivative transactions including futures, forwards, swaps and options principally in the interest rate, foreign exchange and equity markets. The accounting treatment for these instruments is dependent upon whether they are entered into for trading or non-trading (hedging) purposes.

Trading
Derivatives held for trading purposes are recognised in the accounts at fair value. Gains or losses arising from changes in fair value are included in dealing profits in the consolidated profit and loss account. Fair value is based on quoted market prices. Where representative market prices are not available, the fair value is determined from current market information using appropriate pricing or valuation models. Adjustments are made to quoted market prices where appropriate to cover credit risk, liquidity risk and future operational costs. In the consolidated balance sheet, positive fair values (assets) of trading derivatives are included in Other assets and negative fair values (liabilities) in Other liabilities. Positive and negative fair values of trading derivatives are offset where the contracts have been entered into under master netting agreements or other arrangements that give a legally enforceable right of set-off.

Non-trading
Non-trading derivatives are entered into by the Group to hedge exposures arising from transactions entered into in the normal course of banking activities. They are recognised in the accounts in accordance with the accounting treatment of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. To be classified as non-trading, a derivative must match or eliminate the risk inherent in the hedged item from potential movements in interest rates, exchange rates or market values. In addition, there must be a demonstrable link to an underlying transaction, pool of transactions or specified future transaction or transactions. Specified future transactions must be reasonably certain to arise for the derivative to be accounted for as a hedge. In the event that a non-trading derivative transaction is terminated or ceases to be an effective hedge, the derivative is re-measured at fair value and any resulting profit or loss amortised over the remaining life of the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. If a hedged item is derecognised, or a specified future transaction is no longer likely to occur, the related non-trading derivative is remeasured at fair value and the resulting profit or loss taken to the profit and loss account.

16 Sale and repurchase transactions
Securities which have been sold with an agreement to repurchase continue to be shown on the balance sheet and the sale proceeds recorded as a deposit. Securities acquired in reverse sale and repurchase transactions are not recognised in the balance sheet and the purchase price is treated as a loan. The difference between the sale price and repurchase price is accrued evenly over the life of the transaction and charged or credited to the profit and loss account as interest payable or receivable.

90



Consolidated profit and loss account
for the year ended 31 December 2003

 Note 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Interest receivable        
   – interest receivable and similar income arising from debt securities  1,519 1,591 1,582 
   – other interest receivable and similar income  12,479 11,970 12,839 
Interest payable  (5,697)(5,712)(7,575)








 
Net interest income  8,301 7,849 6,846 








 
Dividend income  58 58 54 
Fees and commissions receivable  5,755 5,308 4,735 
Fees and commissions payable  (1,337)(965)(930)
Dealing profits1 1,793 1,462 1,426 
Other operating income  1,598 1,209 1,052 








 
   7,867 7,072 6,337 
General insurance        
   – earned premiums  3,565 2,383 1,804 
   – reinsurance  (504)(489)(429)








 
Non-interest income  10,928 8,966 7,712 








 
Total income  19,229 16,815 14,558 








 
Administrative expenses        
   – staff costs*2 4,518 4,472 4,059 
   – premises and equipment*  1,073 1,006 873 
   – other*  2,108 2,253 1,903 
Depreciation and amortisation        
   – tangible fixed assets*20 919 895 881 
   – goodwill19 763 731 651 








 
Operating expenses  9,381 9,357 8,367 








 
Profit before other operating charges  9,848 7,458 6,191 
General insurance        
   – gross claims  2,644 1,693 1,263 
   – reinsurance  (449)(343)(315)








 
Profit before provisions for bad and doubtful debts  7,653 6,108 5,243 
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts13 1,461 1,286 984 
Amounts written off fixed asset investments  33 59 7 








 
Profit on ordinary activities before tax4 6,159 4,763 4,252 
Tax on profit on ordinary activities5 1,910 1,556 1,537 








 
Profit on ordinary activities after tax  4,249 3,207 2,715 
Minority interests (including non-equity)32 210 133 90 








 
Profit for the financial year  4,039 3,074 2,625 
Preference dividends – non-equity6 261 305 358 








 
   3,778 2,769 2,267 
Additional Value Shares dividend – non-equity6 1,463 798 399 








 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders  2,315 1,971 1,868 
Ordinary dividends7 1,490 1,267 1,085 








 
Retained profit34 825 704 783 
   




 
         
Per 25p ordinary share:        
         
Basic earnings9 79.0p68.4p67.6p
   




 
Diluted earnings9 78.4p67.4p66.3p
   




 
         
Dividends7 50.3p43.7p38.0p
   




 

All items dealt with in arriving at profit on ordinary activities before tax relate to continuing operations.

Profit on ordinary activities before taxation and the retained profit for the year on a historical cost basis were not materially different from the reported amounts.

* includes integration expenditure (see Note 4)

91



Consolidated balance sheet
at 31 December 2003

 Note 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 






 
Assets      
Cash and balances at central banks  3,822 3,481 
Items in the course of collection from other banks  2,501 2,741 
Treasury bills and other eligible bills10 4,846 11,459 
Loans and advances to banks11 51,891 44,296 
Loans and advances to customers12 252,531 223,324 
Debt securities14 79,949 67,042 
Equity shares15 2,300 1,886 
Interests in associated undertakings16 106 94 
Intangible fixed assets19 13,131 12,697 
Tangible fixed assets20 13,927 10,485 
Settlement balances  2,857 4,102 
Other assets21 18,436 16,929 
Prepayments and accrued income  5,421 4,353 






 
   451,718 402,889 
Long-term assurance assets attributable to policyholders22 3,557 9,111 






 
Total assets  455,275 412,000 
   


 
       
Liabilities      
Deposits by banks23 67,323 54,720 
Items in the course of transmission to other banks  958 1,258 
Customer accounts24 236,963 219,161 
Debt securities in issue25 41,016 33,938 
Settlement balances and short positions26 21,369 19,412 
Other liabilities27 20,584 20,754 
Accruals and deferred income  13,173 8,626 
Provisions for liabilities and charges      
   – deferred taxation28 2,266 1,834 
   – other provisions29 256 330 
Subordinated liabilities      
   – dated loan capital30 9,312 7,602 
   – undated loan capital including convertible debt31 7,686 6,363 
Minority interests      
   – equity  (11)(11)
   – non-equity32 2,724 1,850 
Called up share capital33 769 754 
Share premium account34 8,175 7,608 
Merger reserve34 10,881 11,455 
Other reserves34 419 387 
Revaluation reserve34 7 80 
Profit and loss account34 7,848 6,768 
Shareholders’ funds      
   – equity  25,176 23,545 
   – non-equity34 2,923 3,507 
   451,718 402,889 
Long-term assurance liabilities attributable to policyholders22 3,557 9,111 






 
Total liabilities  455,275 412,000 
   


 
       
Memorandum items      
Contingent liabilities41 14,864 15,588 
   


 
       
Commitments (standby facilities, credit lines and other)41 139,693 128,592 
   


 

The accounts were approved by the Board of directors on 18 February 2004 and signed on its behalf by:

Sir George MathewsonFred GoodwinFred Watt
ChairmanGroup Chief ExecutiveGroup Finance Director

92



Statement of consolidated total recognised gains and losses
for the year ended 31 December 2003

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders2,315 1,971 1,868 
Currency translation adjustments and other movements43 36 (3)
Revaluation of premises(69)(33)72 






 
Total recognised gains and losses in the year2,289 1,974 1,937 
Prior year adjustment arising from the implementation of FRS 19 (117) 






 
Total recognised gains and losses2,289 1,857 1,937 
 




 

Reconciliation of movements in consolidated shareholders’ funds
for the year ended 31 December 2003

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders2,315 1,971 1,868 
Ordinary dividends(1,490)(1,267)(1,085)






 
Retained profit for the year825 704 783 
Issue of ordinary and preference shares775 560 2,759 
Redemption of preference shares(364)(600) 
Goodwill previously written off to reserves40   
Other recognised gains and losses(26)3 69 
Currency translation adjustment on share premium account(203)(283)58 






 
Net increase in shareholders’ funds1,047 384 3,669 
Opening shareholders’ funds27,052 26,668 22,999 






 
Closing shareholders’ funds28,099 27,052 26,668 
 




 

93



Consolidated cash flow statement
for the year ended 31 December 2003

 Note2003
£m
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2001
£m
 













 
Net cash inflow from operating activities43  19,708   13,737   7,287 
Dividends received from associated undertakings   9   1   1 
Returns on investments and servicing of finance             
Preference dividends paid (269)  (317)  (353)  
Additional Value Shares dividend paid (1,463)  (798)  (399)  
Dividends paid to minority shareholders in             
   subsidiary undertakings (130)  (112)  (43)  
Interest paid on subordinated liabilities (557)  (674)  (652)  













 
Net cash outflow from returns on investments             
   and servicing of finance   (2,419)  (1,901)  (1,447)
Taxation             
UK tax paid (933)  (833)  (790)  
Overseas tax paid (521)  (274)  (419)  













 
Net cash outflow from taxation   (1,454)  (1,107)  (1,209)
Capital expenditure and financial investment             
Purchase of investment securities (44,861)  (32,701)  (27,537)  
Sale and maturity of investment securities 41,805   26,072   20,578   
Purchase of tangible fixed assets (5,017)  (3,367)  (4,245)  
Sale of tangible fixed assets 1,108   811   867   













 
Net cash outflow from capital expenditure             
   and financial investment   (6,965)  (9,185)  (10,337)
Acquisitions and disposals             
Purchase of businesses and subsidiary undertakings             
   (net of cash acquired)44(1,748)  (308)  (1,614)  
Investment in associated undertakings16(2)  (2)  (47)  
Sale of subsidiary and associated undertakings             
   (net of cash sold)45179   29   8   













 
Net cash outflow from acquisitions and disposals   (1,571)  (281)  (1,653)
Ordinary equity dividends paid   (772)  (729)  (653)













 
Net cash inflow/(outflow) before financing   6,536   535   (8,011)
Financing             
Proceeds from issue of ordinary share capital 184   85   2,131   
Proceeds from issue of preference share capital       281   
Proceeds from issue of trust preferred securities 883   1,242      
Redemption of preference share capital (364)  (600)     
Issue of subordinated liabilities 3,817   2,157   2,705   
Repayment of subordinated liabilities (336)  (202)  (693)  
(Decrease)/increase in minority interests (56)  29   (13)  













 
Net cash inflow from financing   4,128   2,711   4,411 













 
Increase/(decrease) in cash48  10,664   3,246   (3,600)
 











 

94



Balance sheet – the company
at 31 December 2003

 Note 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 






 
Fixed assets      
Investments:      
Shares in Group undertakings17 32,354 19,862 
Loans to Group undertakings18 4,554 3,354 






 
   36,908 23,216 






 
Current assets      
Debtors:      
Due by subsidiary undertakings  238 958 
Debtors and prepayments  202 113 






 
   440 1,071 






 
Creditors      
Amounts falling due within one year:      
Due to banks  71 71 
Dated loan capital30 40 40 
Debt securities in issue  1,877 1,199 
Other creditors  217 154 
Proposed final dividend7 1,059 899 






 
   3,264 2,363 






 
Net current liabilities  (2,824)(1,292)






 
Total assets less current liabilities  34,084 21,924 
   


 
       
Creditors      
Amounts falling due beyond one year:      
Loans from subsidiary undertakings  186 155 
Dated loan capital30 3,714 2,402 
Undated loan capital including convertible debt31 1,639 1,301 






 
   5,539 3,858 
Capital and reserves      
Called up share capital33 769 754 
Share premium account34 8,175 7,608 
Other reserves34 156 156 
Revaluation reserve34 16,857 6,001 
Profit and loss account34 2,588 3,547 
       
Shareholders’ funds      
   – equity   25,622  14,559 
   – non-equity34 2,923 3,507 
  
   34,084 21,924 
   


 

The accounts were approved by the Board of directors on 18 February 2004 and signed on its behalf by:

Sir George MathewsonFred GoodwinFred Watt
ChairmanGroup Chief ExecutiveGroup Finance Director

95



Notes on the accounts

1 Dealing profits

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Foreign exchange (1)540 447 450 
Securities      
   Equities (2)24 18 10 
   Debt (3)774 644 682 
Interest rate derivatives (4)455 353 284 






 
 1,793 1,462 1,426 
 




 

Dealing profits include interest income and expense recognised on trading-related interest-earning assets and interest-bearing liabilities and exclude direct costs and administrative expenses.

Notes:  
(1) Includes spot and forward foreign exchange contracts and currency swaps, futures and options and related hedges and funding.
(2) Includes equities, equity derivatives, commodity contracts and related hedges and funding.
(3) Includes debt securities and related hedges and funding.
(4) Includes interest rate swaps, forward rate agreements, interest rate options, interest rate futures and credit derivatives and related hedges and funding.

2 Administrative expenses – staff costs

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Wages, salaries and other staff costs3,997 4,001 3,667 
Social security costs248 239 212 
Pension costs (see Note 3)273 232 180 






 
 4,518 4,472 4,059 
 




 

The average number of persons employed by the Group during the year, excluding temporary staff, was 119,500 (2002 – 113,500; 2001 – 99,400).

3 Pension costs
The Group operates a number of pension schemes throughout the world. The main schemes are defined benefit schemes whose assets are independent of the Group’s finances. The total pension cost for the Group was as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Main UK scheme200 187 150 
Other Group schemes73 45 30 






 
 273 232 180 
 




 

At 31 December 2003, there was a pension cost prepayment of £112 million and accrual of £18 million (2002 – prepayment of £136 million and accrual of £17 million; 2001 – prepayment of £115 million and accrual of £33 million).

On the acquisition of NatWest in March 2000, a surplus of £1,070 million on its major schemes was recognised in the consolidated balance sheet, and is being amortised over the average future service life of members of the schemes. The unamortised balance as at 31 December 2003 was £755 million (2002 – £838 million) before tax and £529 million (2002 – £587 million) after tax. The unamortised balance before tax is included in ‘Other assets’.

The Group’s two main UK pension schemes, The Royal Bank of Scotland Staff Pension Scheme and the National Westminster Bank Pension Fund, merged on 1 April 2002 to form The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund. Scheme valuations are carried out by independent professionally qualified actuaries to determine pension costs, using the projected unit method; any imbalance between assets and liabilities is adjusted over the average future service life of members of the scheme. The assumptions that have the most significant effect on the results of the valuations are those relating to the valuation rate of interest and the rates of increases in salaries and pensions.

96



The latest formal valuation of The Royal Bank of Scotland Staff Pension Scheme and the National Westminster Bank Pension Fund was carried out as at 31 March 2001 on a basis that assumed the merger of the schemes. The results of this valuation and the principal actuarial assumptions were:



 
Market value of scheme assets (£m)13,027 
Funding level108% 
Excess of scheme assets over schemes liabilities (£m)1,058 
Valuation rate of interest:  
   past service liabilities (per annum) – pensioners5.5% 
   past service liabilities (per annum) – non-pensioners6.0% 
   future service liabilities (per annum)6.75% 
Salary growth (per annum) (1)4.25% 
Pension increases (per annum)2.5% 
Price inflation (per annum)2.5% 


 
Notes: 
(1)

In addition, allowance is made for promotional salary increases.

(2) Assumptions for rate of dividend increases are not relevant to the bases of valuations adopted.

The pension costs relating to the merged schemes were:

Pension costs for the year2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Regular cost274 263 
Amortisation of pension fund surplus(151)(153)
Prior year service costs  
Amortisation of surplus recognised on acquisition of NatWest77 77 




 
Net pension cost200 187 
 


 

In addition to the main scheme, the Group operates a number of other UK and overseas pension schemes and also provides other post-retirement benefits, principally through subscriptions to private healthcare schemes in the UK and the US and unfunded post-retirement benefit plans. Provision for the costs of these benefits is charged to the profit and loss account over the average remaining future service lives of the eligible employees. The amounts are not material.

In accordance with SSAP 24, the pension costs relating to the main scheme are based on the actuarial valuation as at 31 March 2001. Since that date, stock market equity values and bond yields have declined. The next triennial actuarial valuation will be carried out as at 31 March 2004.

FRS 17
In accordance with the transitional requirements of FRS 17 interim valuations of the Group’s schemes were prepared to 31 December 2003 and 31 December 2002 by independent actuaries, using the following assumptions:

 2003 2002 2001
 




 Main UK
scheme
 Other Group
schemes*
 Main UK
scheme
 Other Group
schemes*
 Main UK
scheme
 Other Group
schemes*

Rate of increase in salaries (per annum)3.95% 3.8% 3.50% 3.2% 4.25% 3.2%
Rate of increase in pensions in payment (per annum)2.70% 2.3% 2.25% 1.7% 2.50% 2.3%
Discount rate (per annum)5.60% 5.8% 5.75% 5.8% 6.00% 6.1%
Inflation assumption (per annum)2.70% 2.1% 2.25% 1.7% 2.50% 2.2%

* weighted average

97



Notes on the accounts continued

Pension costs (continued)

The values of the assets and liabilities of the schemes at 31 December 2003 and 2002 and the effect on the Group’s reserves if they were to be incorporated in the balance sheet were as follows:

 2003 2002 2001 
 




 
 Main UK
scheme
£m
 Other Group
schemes
£m
 Main UK
scheme
£m
 Other Group
schemes
£m
 

Main UK
scheme
£m

 Other Group
schemes
£m
 

 
Equities7,621 686 7,161 610 7,899 717 
Bonds3,818 276 3,298 260 4,203 176 
Other383 103 223 140 465 167 












 
Total market value of assets11,822 1,065 10,682 1,010 12,567 1,060 
Present value of scheme liabilities(13,594)(1,261)(12,418)(1,130)(12,121)(1,014)












 
Net (deficit)/surplus in the schemes(1,772)(196)(1,736)(120)446 46 
Related notional deferred tax asset /(liability)532 22 521 20 (133)(10)












 
Net unrecognised pension (deficit)/surplus(1,240)(174)(1,215)(100)313 36 
Prepayments less accruals currently recognised,
    net of deferred tax
(25)(33)(52)(27)(53)(5)
Pension assets recognised on the acquisition of            
   NatWest, net of deferred tax and amortisation(494)(35)(548)(39)(602)(42)












 
Effect on Group profit and loss account reserves(1,759)(242)(1,815)(166)(342)(11)
 
 

The assumptions for long-term rates of return on the principal classes of assets at 31 December 2003 were equities 8.4%, gilts 4.8%, other bonds 5.6%, property 6.6% and cash and other assets 4.9% (2002 – equities 8.4%, gilts 4.5%, other bonds 5.75%, property 6.5% and cash 4.5%; 2001 – equities 8.4%, gilts 5.0%, other bonds 6.0%, property 6.8% and cash 4.5%).

The following amounts would be reflected in the profit and loss account and statement of total recognised gains and losses on implementation of FRS 17:

Amount that would be charged to profit and loss accountMain UK
scheme
£m
 Other
schemes
£m
 2003
Total
£m
 2002
Total
£m
 

 
Expected return on pension scheme assets757 69 826 988 
Interest on pension scheme liabilities(710)(64)(774)(787)








 
Net return credited to other finance income47 5 52 201 
Current service cost(325)(46)(371)(322)
Past service cost   (3)








 
Net pension cost defined benefit schemes(278)(41)(319)(124)
Defined contribution schemes and other retirement benefits (37)(37)(19)








 
Total pension costs(278)(78)(356)(143)
 
 
   
Amount that would be recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses2003
Total
£m
 2002
Total
£m
 




 
Actual return less expected return on pension scheme assets872 (2,645)
Experience gains and losses arising on scheme liabilities7 (25)
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities(810)278 




 
Actuarial gain/(loss)69 (2,392)
 
 
   
Movement in pension scheme (deficits)/surpluses during the year2003
Total
£m
 2002
Total
£m
 




 
(Deficit)/surplus in the pension schemes at 1 January(1,856)492 
Movement in year:    
   Current service cost(371)(322)
   Past service cost (3)
   Contributions139 167 
   Other finance income52 201 
   Actuarial gain/(loss)69 (2,392)
   Exchange and other movements(1)1 




 
Deficit in schemes at 31 December(1,968)(1,856)
 
 

The contribution rate for 2003 and 2004 for the main scheme is 6.8% (2002 – 6.8%) of pensionable salaries.

98





History of experience gains and losses2003
£m
 2002
£ml
 

 
Difference between expected and actual return on scheme assets:    
Amount872 (2,645)
Percentage of scheme assets6.8% (22.6%)
Experience gains and losses on scheme liabilities:    
Amount7 (25)
   Percentage of the present value of scheme liabilities (0.2%)
Total amount recognised in the statement of total recognised gains and losses:    
   Amount69 (2,392)
   Percentage of the present value of scheme liabilities0.5% (17.7%)




 

4 Profit on ordinary activities before tax
Profit on ordinary activities before tax is stated after taking account of the following:

  2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
IncomeAggregate amounts receivable under finance leases,      
 hire purchase and conditional sale contracts1,161 1,342 1,575 
 Aggregate amounts receivable under operating leases939 811 707 
 Profit on disposal of investment securities172 85 48 
 Share of associated undertakings’ net profit/(loss)12 2 (6)
        
ExpensesOperating lease rentals of premises321 255 214 
 Operating lease rentals of computers and other equipment13 16 18 
 Finance charges on leased assets8 23 40 
 Interest on subordinated liabilities551 659 674 
 Integration expenditure* relating to:      
 – acquisition of NatWest143 810 847 
 – other acquisitions86 147 28 







 
*Integration expenditure comprises:      
Staff costs 125 530 598 
Premises and equipment31 127 64 
Other administrative expenses73 298 188 
Depreciation 2 25 







 
  229 957 875 
  
 

Auditors’ remuneration
Amounts paid to the auditors for statutory audit and other services were as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Audit services    
   – Statutory audit7.2 5.8 
   – Audit related regulatory reporting0.6 0.5 




 
 7.8 6.3 




 
Further assurance services5.7 2.0 




 
Tax services    
   – Compliance services0.1 0.3 
   – Advisory services0.5 0.6 




 
 0.6 0.9 




 
Other services0.7 3.6 




 
Total14.8 12.8 
 


 

The auditors’ remuneration for statutory audit work for the company was £0.1 million (2002 – £0.1 million). Non–audit fees paid to the auditors and their associates in the UK was £6.2 million (2002 – 6.3 million).

99



Notes on the accounts continued

5 Tax on profit on ordinary activities

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Current taxation:      
UK corporation tax charge for the year at 30%1,095 909 984 
Over provision in respect of prior periods(66)(13)(16)
Relief for overseas taxation(211)(26)(98)






 
 818 870 870 
Overseas taxation:      
Current year charge538 370 381 
(Over)/under provision in respect of prior periods(11)(2)31 






 
 1,345 1,238 1,282 
Share of associated undertakings2 2 2 






 
Current tax charge for the year1,347 1,240 1,284 
Deferred taxation:      
Origination and reversal of timing differences598 372 255 
Over provision in respect of prior periods(35)(56)(2)






 
Tax charge for the year1,910 1,556 1,537 
 




 

The actual tax charge differs from the expected tax charge computed by applying the standard rate of UK corporation tax of 30% as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Expected tax charge1,848 1,429 1,276 
Goodwill amortisation200 183 169 
Contributions to employee share schemes(35)(40)(48)
Non-deductible items231 179 251 
Non-taxable items(207)(163)(92)
Capital allowances in excess of depreciation(626)(340)(280)
Taxable foreign exchange movements5 4 16 
Foreign profits taxed at other rates23 3 (13)
Unutilised losses brought forward and carried forward(15) (10)
Current taxation adjustments relating to prior periods(77)(15)15 






 
Current tax charge for the year1,347 1,240 1,284 
Deferred taxation:      
Origination and reversal of timing differences598 372 255 
Adjustments in respect of prior periods(35)(56)(2)






 
Actual tax charge1,910 1,556 1,537 
 




 
  
 The following factors may affect future tax charges:
(1) No deferred tax is recognised on the unremitted reserves of overseas subsidiary and associated undertakings. A substantial proportion of such reserves are required to be retained by the overseas undertakings to meet local regulatory requirements.
(2) Deferred tax assets of £127 million (2002 – £107 million) resulting from tax losses carried forward have not been recognised as there is insufficient evidence that the asset will be recoverable. These assets may be recoverable if the losses can be offset against suitable future taxable profits arising in the same tax jurisdiction.
(3) The fair values of certain financial assets are disclosed in Note 40. The tax that could be payable if these assets were disposed of at the values shown is estimated at £561 million (2002 – £965 million). Because of the nature of these financial assets which are held as part of the banking business, it is not possible to determine the amount that may become payable in the foreseeable future.
(4) Freehold and long leasehold properties are revalued (see Note 20). No provision has been made for deferred tax on gains recognised on revaluing Group properties except where there is a commitment to sell the asset and any taxable gain will not be subject to rollover relief. The tax that could be payable if these assets were disposed of at their revalued amount is estimated at £109 million (2002 – £81 million), including tax on rolled over gains (see note (5) below). No such tax is expected to be payable in the foreseeable future.
(5) No provision has been made for deferred tax on certain gains realised on disposals of property and other assets as there is an expectation of rolling over such gains into replacement assets. Expenditure to date on valid replacement assets together with forecasts of future such expenditure indicate that these gains will be available for rollover relief. The tax that could be payable if the conditions for rollover relief were not met is estimated at £68 million (2002 – £93 million).

100



6 Preference and Additional Value Shares dividends

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.0199 141 140 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01100 108 115 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of €0.0137 32 32 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25 1 49 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.0115 15 15 
11% cumulative preference shares of £1 (1)   
5.5% cumulative preference shares of £1 (2)   
Appropriation for premium payable on redemption and issue costs10 8 7 






 
Total preference dividends261 305 358 
Additional Value Shares1,463 798 399 






 
Total non-equity dividends1,724 1,103 757 
 
 
 Notes:
(1) Dividends for the year ended 31 December 2003 amounted to £55,000 (2002 and 2001 – £55,000).
(2) Dividends for the year ended 31 December 2003 amounted to £22,000 (2002 and 2001 – £22,000).

7 Ordinary dividends

 2003
p per share
 2002
p per share
 2001
p per share
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Interim14.6 12.7 11.0 431 368 313 
Proposed final35.7 31.0 27.0 1,059 899 772 












 
Total dividends on equity shares50.3 43.7 38.0 1,490 1,267 1,085 
 
 

8 Profit dealt with in the accounts of the company
Of the profit attributable to shareholders, £2,619 million (2002 – £1,955 million; 2001 – £1,033 million) has been dealt with in the accounts of the company.

9 Earnings per ordinary share
The earnings per share are based on the following:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Earnings:      
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders2,315 1,971 1,868 
 




 
       
   Number of shares – millions 
Number of ordinary shares:      
Weighted average number of ordinary shares in issue during the year2,931 2,881 2,762 
Effect of dilutive share options and convertible non-equity shares22 43 55 






 
Diluted weighted average number of ordinary shares during the year2,953 2,924 2,817 
 
 

101




Notes on the accounts continued

10 Treasury bills and other eligible bills

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Treasury bills and similar securities3,917 8,348 
Other eligible bills929 3,111 




 
 4,846 11,459 
 


 
     
Banking business2,977 4,569 
Trading business1,869 6,890 




 

Treasury and other eligible bills are principally of short-term maturity and their market value is not materially different from carrying value.

11 Loans and advances to banks

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Repayable on demand17,115 6,792 
Remaining maturity    
   – three months or less25,525 28,537 
   – one year or less but over three months8,357 8,482 
   – five years or less but over one year422 180 
   – over five years479 312 




 
 51,898 44,303 
Specific bad and doubtful debt provisions(7)(7)




 
 51,891 44,296 
 


 
     
Banking business21,358 21,859 
Trading business30,533 22,437 




 

102



12 Loans and advances to customers

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
On demand or short notice24,847 21,122 
Remaining maturity    
   – three months or less64,281 65,108 
   – one year or less but over three months27,465 24,750 
   – five years or less but over one year40,908 40,364 
   – over five years98,952 75,900 




 
 256,453 227,244 
General and specific bad and doubtful debt provisions(3,922)(3,920)




 
 252,531 223,324 
 


 
     
Banking business223,456 197,818 
Trading business29,075 25,506 




 
     
Amounts above include:    
Subordinated advances73 96 
Due from associated undertakings – unsubordinated313 289 
Amounts receivable under finance leases8,405 7,496 
Amounts receivable under hire purchase and conditional sale agreements5,935 5,636 




 

The cost of assets acquired during the year for the purpose of letting under finance leases and hire purchase agreements was £6,361 million (2002 – £4,684 million).

The Group’s exposure to risk from its lending activities is widely diversified both geographically and industrially. Lending to the services sector, house mortgage lending, loans to financial institutions, other personal loans and lending to property companies exceeded 10% of total loans and advances to customers (before provisions).

Residual value exposures

The table below gives details of the unguaranteed residual values included in the carrying value of finance lease receivables (see above) and operating lease assets (see Note 20).

 Year in which the residual value will be recovered 
 
 
2003Within
1 year
£m
 After 1 year
but within
2 years
£m
 After 2 years
but within
5 years
£m
 After
5 years
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Operating leases          
   Transportation548 198 481 2,344 3,571 
   Cars and light commercial vehicles313 128 120  561 
   Other11 21 54 96 182 
Finance leases62 21 85 158 326 










 
At 31 December 2003934 368 740 2,598 4,640 
 
 
   
 Year in which the residual value will be recovered 
 
 
2002Within
1 year
£m
 After 1 year
but within
2 years
£m
 After 2 years
but within
5 years
£m
 After
5 years
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Operating leases          
   Transportation59 467 204 1,480 2,210 
   Cars and light commercial vehicles328 134 110  572 
   Other22 12 60 147 241 
Finance leases43 71 83 352 549 










 
At 31 December 2002452 684 457 1,979 3,572 
 
 

103



Notes on the accounts continued

13 Provisions for bad and doubtful debts

 Specific
£m
 General
£m
 2003
Total
£m
 Specific
£m
 General
£m
 2002
Total
£m
 

 
At 1 January3,330 597 3,927 3,039 614 3,653 
Currency translation and other adjustments(23)(39)(62)(45)(17)(62)
Acquisition of subsidiary44 6 50 23  23 
Amounts written off(1,519) (1,519)(1,036) (1,036)
Recoveries of amounts written off in previous periods72  72 63  63 
Charge to profit and loss account1,459 2 1,461 1,286  1,286 












 
At 31 December3,363 566 3,929 3,330 597 3,927 
 
 

In certain cases, interest may be charged to a customer’s account but, because its recoverability is in doubt, not recognised in the Group’s consolidated profit and loss account. Such interest is held in a suspense account and netted off against loans and advances in the consolidated balance sheet.

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Loans and advances on which interest is being placed in suspense:    
   – before specific provisions1,938 1,660 
   – after specific provisions930 724 
Loans and advances on which interest is not being applied:    
   – before specific provisions2,494 2,515 
   – after specific provisions980 1,082 

 

104



14 Debt securities

 2003
Book value
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
gains
£m
 Gross
unrecognised

losses
£m
 2003
Valuation
£m
 2002
Book value
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
gains
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
losses
£m
 2002
Valuation
£m
 

 
Investment securities:                
British government1,516 1 (5)1,512 197 3  200 
Other government12,442 101 (105)12,438 11,994 297 (2)12,289 
Other public sector bodies422 4  426 708 6  714 
Bank and building society11,690 4 (7)11,687 8,996 7 (2)9,001 
Other issuers15,464 130 (302)15,292 16,296 126 (67)16,355 
















 
 41,534 240 (419)41,355 38,191 439 (71)38,559 
















 
                 
Other debt securities:                
British government1,246     1,246 1,209     1,209 
Other government10,819     10,819 5,049     5,049 
Other public sector bodies36     36 41     41 
Bank and building society407     407 2,703     2,703 
Other issuers25,907     25,907 19,849     19,849 
 
     
 
     
 
 38,415     38,415 28,851     28,851 
 
     
 
     
 
 79,949     79,770 67,042     67,410 
 
     
 
     
 
                 
                 
Due within one year16,943       14,512       
Due one year and over63,006       52,530       
 
       
       
 79,949       67,042       
 
       
       
                 
                 
Investment securities:                
Listed33,067     33,001 27,416     27,790 
Unlisted8,467     8,354 10,775     10,769 
 
     
 
     
 
 41,534     41,355 38,191     38,559 
Other debt securities:                
Listed16,307     16,307 10,507     10,507 
Unlisted22,108     22,108 18,344     18,344 
 
     
 
     
 
 79,949     79,770 67,042     67,410 
 
     
 
     
 
                 
                 
Banking business42,374       38,920       
Trading business37,575       28,122       










       
Amounts above include:                
Subordinated debt securities890       468       
Due from associated undertakings                
   – unsubordinated1       7       
Unamortised discounts less
   premiums on investment
    securities
3       (2)      










       

The cost of securities carried at market value is not disclosed because it cannot be determined without unreasonable expense.

Movements in debt securities which are held as investment securities were as follows:

 Cost
£m
 Discounts and
premiums
£m
 Provisions
£m
 Book value
£m
 

 
At 1 January 200338,162 97 (68)38,191 
Currency translation and other adjustments(1,642)(24)3 (1,663)
Additions44,561   44,561 
Acquisition of subsidiaries1,918   1,918 
Maturities and disposals(41,504)170 (1)(41,335)
Provisions made net of write backs  (19)(19)
Transfers(55) (37)(92)
Amortisation of discounts and premiums (27) (27)








 
At 31 December 200341,440 216 (122)41,534 
 
 

105



Notes on the accounts continued

14 Debt securities (continued)
The following table categorises the Group’s investment debt securities by maturity and yield (based on weighted averages) at 31 December 2003:

 Within 1 year After 1 but
within 5 years
 After 5 but
within 10 years
 After 10 years Total 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 Amount
£m
 Yield
%
 

 
British government securities68 5.5 1,107 4.8 218 5.3 123 5.2 1,516 4.9 
US treasury and other US
     government securities
75 2.0 533 1.7 1,219 1.6 9,128 3.3 10,955 3.1 
Other government securities695 3.3 766 5.1 24 6.2 2 5.6 1,487 4.3 
Securities issued by the states
     of the US
  2 5.2 10 3.0 11 4.0 23 3.6 
Other public sector bodies36 5.1 142 1.2 165 1.7 57 1.4 400 1.8 
Corporate debt securities2,477 2.3 3,318 2.8 345 4.4 193 3.2 6,333 2.7 
Mortgage-backed securities42 1.2 185 4.5 481 4.2 4,353 2.9 5,061 3.1 
Bank and building society8,543 3.0 3,100 2.8 42 5.2 5 4.6 11,690 2.9 
Other securities850 3.4 1,376 4.3 1,035 1.8 808 2.4 4,069 3.1 




















 
Total book value12,786 2.9 10,529 3.3 3,539 2.6 14,680 3.2 41,534 3.1 
 


















 
Total fair value12,756   10,456   3,477   14,666   41,355   
 


















 

Gross gains of £158 million (2002 – £70 million) and gross losses of £47 million (2002 – £7 million) were realised on the sale and redemption of investment debt securities.

15 Equity shares

 2003
Book value
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
gains
£m
 Gross
unrecognised

losses
£m
 2003
Valuation
£m
 2002
Book value
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
gains
£m
 Gross
unrecognised
losses
£m
 2002
Valuation
£m
 

 
Investment securities:                
Listed1,157 350 (88)1,419 1,097 43 (127)1,013 
Unlisted664 174 (19)819 686   686 
















 
 1,821 524 (107)2,238 1,783 43 (127)1,699 
Other securities:                
Listed465   465 52   52 
Unlisted14   14 51   51 
















 
 2,300 524 (107)2,717 1,886 43 (127)1,802 
 














 
                 
Banking business1,872       1,849       
Trading business428       37       

 

The cost of securities carried at market value is not disclosed because it cannot be determined without unreasonable expense.

Movements in equity shares which are held as investment securities were as follows:

 Cost
£m
 Provisions
£m
 Book value
£m
 

 
At 1 January 20031,864 (81)1,783 
Currency translation and other adjustments24 4 28 
Additions300  300 
Disposals(314)16 (298)
Amounts written off(4)4  
Provisions made net of write backs (14)(14)
Transfers70 (48)22 






 
At 31 December 20031,940 (119)1,821 
 
 

Gross gains of £68 million (2002 – £52 million) and gross losses of £7 million (2002 – £30 million) were realised on the sale of investment equity shares.

106



16 Interests in associated undertakings
Movements in interests in associated undertakings during the year were as follows:

 Share of
net assets
£m
 

 
At 1 January 200394 
Currency translation and other adjustments1 
Change of status14 
Additions2 
Acquisitions21 
Disposals(27)
Share of profit1 


 
At 31 December 2003106 
 
 

Interests in associated undertakings are analysed as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Banks – unlisted 24 
Others106 70 




 
 106 94 
 
 

The principal associated undertaking is:

 Total issued share
and loan capital at
31 December 2003
%
held
 Share of results
based on accounts
made up to
 Nature of
business
 

 
Linea Directa Aseguradora S.A.2,400m €0.03 ordinary shares50.0 31 December* Insurance 
(incorporated in Spain)       

 

* Incorporating unaudited interim accounts.

Linea Directa Aseguradora S.A. operates in Spain.

Dividends receivable from associated undertakings (excluding related tax credits) totalled £9 million (2002– £1 million).

Transactions with associated undertakings are conducted on similar terms to third party transactions and are not material to the Group’s results or financial condition.

107



Notes on the accounts continued

17 Shares in Group undertakings

Movements in shares in Group undertakings during the year were as follows:

 £m 

 
At 1 January 200319,862 
Currency translation adjustments(330)
Additions2,330 
Disposals(364)
Revaluation10,856 


 
At 31 December 200332,354 
 
 

On the historical cost basis, shares in Group undertakings at 31 December 2003 would have been included at a cost of £15,499 million (2002 – £13,863 million).

The principal subsidiary undertakings of the company are shown below. Their capital consists of ordinary and preference shares which are unlisted with the exception of certain preference shares issued by NatWest. The Royal Bank, Churchill Insurance Group PLC and RBS Life Holdings are directly owned by the company, and all of the other subsidiary undertakings are owned directly, or indirectly through intermediate holding companies, by the Royal Bank and are all wholly-owned. All of these subsidiaries are included in the Group’s consolidated financial statements and have an accounting reference date of 31 December.

 Nature of
business
Country of
incorporation
and principal
area of operation

The Royal Bank of Scotland plcBankingGreat Britain
National Westminster Bank Plc (1,4)BankingGreat Britain
Churchill Insurance Group PLCInsuranceGreat Britain
Citizens Financial Group, Inc.BankingUS
Coutts Bank (Switzerland) LimitedPrivate bankingSwitzerland
Coutts & Co (2)Private bankingGreat Britain
Direct Line Insurance plcInsuranceGreat Britain
Greenwich Capital Markets, Inc.Broker dealerUS
Lombard North Central PLCBanking, credit finance, leasing and hire purchaseGreat Britain
National Westminster Home Loans LimitedHome mortgage financeGreat Britain
The Royal Bank of Scotland International LimitedBankingJersey
RBS Life Holdings LimitedLife assuranceGreat Britain
Ulster Bank Limited (3)BankingNorthern Ireland

Notes:  
(1) The company does not hold any of the NatWest preference shares in issue.
(2) Coutts & Co is incorporated with unlimited liability. Its registered office is 440 Strand, London WC2R 0Q5
(3) Ulster Bank Limited and its subsidiary undertakings also operate in the Republic of Ireland.
(4) On 31 January 2003, ownership of NatWest was transferred from the company to the Royal Bank.

The above information is provided in relation to the principal subsidiaries as permitted by Section 231(5) of the Companies Act 1985. Full information on all subsidiaries will be included in the Annual Return filed with the UK Companies House.

108



18 Loans to Group undertakings

Movements during the year:£m 


 
At 1 January 20033,354 
Currency translation and other adjustments(249)
Additions1,489 
Repayments(40)


 
At 31 December 20034,554 
 
 

19 Intangible fixed assets

Goodwill£m 


 
Cost:  
At 1 January 200314,595 
Currency translation and other adjustments(283)
Arising on acquisitions during the year1,456 
Disposals(10)


 
At 31 December 200315,758 
 
 
   
Amortisation:  
At 1 January 20031,898 
Currency translation and other adjustments(34)
Charge for the year763 


 
At 31 December 20032,627 
 
 
   
Net book value at 31 December 200313,131 
 
 
   
Net book value at 31 December 200212,697 
 
 

109


 



Notes on the accounts continued

20 Tangible fixed assets

  Freehold
premises
£m
 Long
leasehold
premises
£m
 Short
leasehold
premises
£m
 Computers
and other
equipment
£m
 Assets on
operating
leases
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Cost or valuation:            
At 1 January 20033,951 367 611 2,754 6,335 14,018 
Currency translation and other adjustments(23)1 (10)(24)(24)(80)
Reclassifications(9)(24)(1)34   
Acquisition of subsidiaries561 8 4 111  684 
Additions1,015 1,034 84 480 2,404 5,017 
Disposals and write-off of fully depreciated assets(227)(22)(33)(444)(1,167)(1,893)
Revaluation adjustments(51)(18)   (69)












 
At 31 December 20035,217 1,346 655 2,911 7,548 17,677 
 










 
             
Consisting of:            
At valuation – 20032,750 37    2,787 
At valuation2002 and prior882 166    1,048 
At cost1,585 1,143 655 2,911 7,548 13,842 












 
 5,217 1,346 655 2,911 7,548 17,677 
 










 
             
Accumulated depreciation and amortisation:            
At 1 January 2003327 85 229 1,854 1,038 3,533 
Currency translation and other adjustments 1 (6)(10)(4)(19)
Reclassifications7 (3)1 (5)  
Acquisition of subsidiaries29   59  88 
Disposals and write-off of fully depreciated assets(7) (7)(387)(370)(771)
Charge for the year51 11 33 294 530 919 












 
At 31 December 2003407 94 250 1,805 1,194 3,750 
 










 
             
Net book value at 31 December 20034,810 1,252 405 1,106 6,354 13,927 
 










 
             
Net book value at 31 December 20023,624 282 382 900 5,297 10,485 
 










 

On the historical cost basis, the Group’s freehold and long leasehold premises would have been included at £5,886 million (2002 – £3,638 million).

Freehold and long leasehold properties are revalued on a rolling basis, each property being valued at least every five years. Interim valuations outwith the five year cycle are carried out on properties where there is an indication that their value has changed significantly, given market conditions. The directors are not aware of any material change in the valuation of the Group’s properties and therefore no additional interim valuations were required.

Properties occupied by the Group are valued on the basis of Existing Use Value, except for certain specialised properties which are valued on a Depreciated Replacement Cost basis. Investment properties and properties to be disposed of are valued to reflect Open Market Value. Valuations are carried out by internal and external qualified surveyors who are members of the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors or, in the case of some overseas properties, locally qualified valuers.

Net book value:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Land and buildings occupied for own use2,391 2,230 
Investment properties3,628 1,789 
Properties under development429 258 
Properties to be disposed of19 11 




 
 6,467 4,288 
 


 
     
Net book value of assets held under finance leases90 94 
 


 
     
Depreciation for the year of assets held under finance leases20 34 
 


 
     
Contracts for future capital expenditure not provided for in the accounts at the year end    




 
Premises and equipment104 68 
Assets on operating leases498 678 




 
 602 746 
 


 

110




21 Other assets

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Trading derivatives (see Note 39)14,087 13,210 
Other4,349 3,719 




 
 18,436 16,929 
 


 

22 Long-term assurance business
The long-term assurance assets and liabilities attributable to policyholders comprise:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Investments4,005 9,536 
Value of in-force policies413 386 




 
 4,418 9,922 
Long-term assurance business attributable to shareholders*(861)(811)




 
 3,557 9,111 
 


 

The increase in the shareholders’ interest in the long-term assurance business included in the profit and loss account is calculated as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Increase in value for the year before tax73 61 
Tax(22)(18)




 
Increase in value for the year after tax51 43 
 


 
     
The decline in long-term assurance assets and liabilities results from the transfer of the pension managed fund business of NatWest Life to another third party life company.
  
*The value of the long-term assurance business is calculated by discounting estimated future flows of statutory profits from in-force business at a discount rate that includes a risk margin. The future flows are based on prudent assumptions about long-term economic and business experience determined with the advice of qualified actuaries. The risk margin is designed to reflect uncertainties in expected future flows.
  
The key assumptions used are:
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Risk discount rate (net of tax)8.50 8.50 
Growth of unit-linked funds (gross of tax)6.70 6.75 
Growth of non-unit-linked funds (gross of tax)5.00 5.00 
Basic tax rate20.00 22.00 
Shareholder taxation – life30.00 30.00 
Expense inflation3.50 3.50 




 

111     




Notes on the accounts continued

23 Deposits by banks

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Repayable on demand20,995 15,559 
With agreed maturity dates or periods of notice, by remaining maturity    
   – three months or less42,300 35,125 
   – one year or less but over three months2,268 1,923 
   – five years or less but over one year122 805 
   – over five years1,638 1,308 




 
 67,323 54,720 
 


 
     
Banking business41,061 34,474 
Trading business26,262 20,246 




 

24 Customer accounts

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Repayable on demand160,574 127,320 
With agreed maturity dates or periods of notice, by remaining maturity    
   – three months or less64,797 81,015 
   – one year or less but over three months7,608 5,923 
   – five years or less but over one year3,288 4,367 
   – over five years696 536 




 
 236,963 219,161 
 


 
     
Banking business210,925 195,670 
Trading business26,038 23,491 




 
     
Amounts above include:    
Due to associated undertakings5 107 




 

25 Debt securities in issue

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Bonds and medium term notes, by remaining maturity    
   – one year or less2,227 2,150 
   – two years or less but over one year1,063 738 
   – five years or less but over two years3,614 3,096 
   – over five years3,525 1,391 




 
 10,429 7,375 




 
Other debt securities in issue, by remaining maturity    
   – three months or less23,414 24,387 
   – one year or less but over three months6,188 1,366 
   – two years or less but over one year977 810 
   – five years or less but over two years8  




 
 30,587 26,563 




 
 41,016 33,938 
 


 
     
Banking business39,899 33,927 
Trading business1,117 11 




 
     
Issues are made under the Royal Bank’s £20 billion euro medium term note programme from time to time. Notes issued, which have a minimum maturity of six months from the date of issue, are included in the above amounts.

26 Settlement balances and short positions

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Settlement balances2,241 3,031 
Short positions:    
   Debt securities – Government16,631 14,155 
   Debt securities – Other issuers2,423 1,660 
   Treasury bills and other eligible bills74 566 




 
 21,369 19,412 
 


 

112




27 Other liabilities
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Notes in circulation1,394 1,318 
Trading derivatives (see Note 39)15,173 14,729 
Current taxation700 982 
Dividends1,105 946 
Obligations under finance leases (analysed below)182 171 
Other liabilities2,030 2,608 




 
 20,584 20,754 
 


 
     
Analysis of obligations under finance leases:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Amounts falling due within one year19 29 
Amounts falling due between one and five years37 14 
Amounts falling due after more than five years126 128 




 
 182 171 
 


 
     

28 Deferred taxation
Provision for deferred taxation has been made as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Deferred tax liability2,266 1,834 
Deferred tax asset (included in Note 21, Other assets)(28)(39)




 
Net deferred tax2,238 1,795 
 


 
     
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Short-term timing differences201 22 
Capital allowances2,440 1,965 
Bad and doubtful debt provisions(441)(238)
Deferred gains38 46 




 
Net deferred tax2,238 1,795 
 


 
     
Movements during the year:£m   


   
At 1 January 20031,795   
Currency translation and other adjustments19   
Acquisition of subsidiaries34   
Disposal of lease receivables(173)  
Charge to profit and loss account563   


   
At 31 December 20032,238   
 
   

29 Other provisions

 Property(1)
£m
 Pensions and
other similar
obligations(2)
£m
 Other(3)
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
At 1 January 2003262 36 32 330 
Currency translation and other adjustments (2) (2)
Acquisition of subsidiaries  9 9 
Charge to profit and loss account35 11 1 47 
Provisions utilised(118)(2)(8)(128)








 
At 31 December 2003179 43 34 256 
 







         
Notes:    
(1)The Group has a number of leasehold properties where rents payable and other unavoidable costs exceed the value to the Group. Such costs arise over the period of the lease or to the expected termination date, and the provision has been discounted due to the long-term nature of certain of these obligations.
(2)The Group operates various unfunded post-retirement benefit plans and provision is made for the expected costs that will arise over the periods in which pensions are paid to the members of these plans.
(3)Other provisions arise in the normal course of business.

113




Notes on the accounts continued

30 Dated loan capital

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
The company    
£200 million floating rate (minimum 5.25%) notes 2005 (1,2)80 120 
US$400 million 6.4% subordinated notes 2009 (1)223 247 
US$300 million 6.375% subordinated notes 2011 (1)166 184 
US$750 million 5% subordinated notes 2013 (issued November 2003) (3)416  
US$750 million 5% subordinated notes 2014 (1)417 461 
US$250 million 5% subordinated notes 2014 (1)137 151 
US$350 million 4.7% subordinated notes 2018 (issued July 2003) (1,4)195  




 
 1,634*1,163*
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc    
£125 million subordinated floating rate notes 2005 (5)125 125 
£150 million 8.375% subordinated notes 2007149 149 
DEM500 million (redesignated €255 million) 5.25% subordinated notes 2008180 165 
€300 million 4.875% subordinated notes 2009211 194 
US$150 million floating rate notes 2009 (5)84 93 
£35 million floating rate step-up subordinated notes 201035 35 
US$350 million floating rate subordinated notes 2012196 217 
€130 million floating rate subordinated notes 201292 85 
US$500 million floating rate subordinated notes 2012280 310 
£150 million 10.5% subordinated bonds 2013 (6)149 149 
€1,000 million 6.0% fixed rate subordinated notes 2013700 644 
€500 million 6.0% fixed rate subordinated notes 2013362 334 
US$50 million floating rate subordinated notes 201328 31 
€1,000 million floating rate subordinated notes 2013 (issued October 2003; callable October 2008) (7)705  
£250 million 9.625% subordinated bonds 2015248 247 
€750 million 4.875% subordinated notes 2015 (issued April 2003) (8)529  
€500 million 4.5% subordinated notes 2016 (issued December 2003; callable January 2011) (9)351  
€100 million floating rate subordinated notes 201770 65 
US$125.6 million floating rate subordinated notes 202070 78 
     
RBSG Capital Corporation    
US$250 million 10.125% guaranteed capital notes 2004 (1,6)140 155 
     
National Westminster Bank Plc    
US$500 million 9.375% guaranteed capital notes 2003 (10) 315 
£100 million 12.5% subordinated unsecured loan stock 2004104 108 
US$400 million guaranteed floating rate capital notes 2005223 246 
US$1,000 million 7.375% fixed rate subordinated notes 2009553 611 
US$650 million floating rate subordinated step-up notes 2009 (callable October 2004)366 404 
€600 million 6.0% subordinated notes 2010419 386 
£300 million 8.125% step-up subordinated notes 2011 (callable December 2006)303 305 
€500 million 5.125% subordinated notes 2011341 309 
£300 million 7.875% subordinated notes 2015309 316 
£300 million 6.5% subordinated notes 2021297 298 
     
Greenwich Capital Holdings, Inc.    
US$105 million subordinated loan capital 2004 floating rate notes59 65 




 
 9,312 7,602 
 


 
     
Dated loan capital in issue, by remaining maturity is repayable as follows:    
   – in one year or less709 355 
   – in two years or less but over one year388 772 
   – in five years or less but over two years1,337 865 
   – in more than five years6,878 5,610 




 
 9,312 7,602 
 


 
  
* In addition, the company issued 1.25 million subordinated loan notes of €1,000 each in June 2002, 750,000 subordinated loan notes of US$1,000 each in December 2002, 850,000 subordinated loan notes of US$1,000 each in May 2003 and 650,000 subordinated loan notes of US$1,000 each in December 2003 to subsidiaries of the Group. These loan notes are included in the company balance sheet within loan capital but are reclassified as non-equity minority interests on consolidation (see Note 32).

114




Notes:  
(1)On-lent to The Royal Bank of Scotland plc on a subordinated basis.
(2)Repayable in five equal annual instalments in May in each of the years 2001 to 2005.
(3) Net proceeds received US$744 million, £444 million.
(4) Net proceeds received US$348 million, £208 million.
(5) Repayable in whole, at the option of The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, prior to maturity, on conditions governing the respective debt obligation, including prior approval of the UKFinancial Services Authority.
(6) Unconditionally guaranteed by the company.
(7) Net proceeds received €998 million, £701 million.
(8) Net proceeds received €749 million, £520 million.
(9) Net proceeds received €498 million, £350 million.
(10) Redeemed on maturity in November 2003.
(11) In the event of certain changes in the tax laws of the UK, all of the dated loan capital issues are redeemable in whole, but not in part, at the option of the issuer, at the principal amount thereof plus accrued interest, subject to prior approval of the UK Financial Services Authority.
(12) Except as stated above, claims in respect of the Group’s dated loan capital are subordinated to the claims of other creditors. None of the Group’s dated loan capital is secured.
(13) Interest payable on the Group’s floating rate dated issues is at a margin over London interbank rates. Interest on £1,450 million, US$4,000 million and €4,405 million of fixed rate dated issues is swapped into floating rates at a margin over London interbank rates.

 

115




Notes on the accounts continued

31 Undated loan capital including convertible debt

   2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 

 
The company    
US$350 million undated floating rate primary capital notes (callable on any interest payment date)(1,2)196 217 
US$200 million 8.5% exchangeable capital securities, Series A (callable June 2004) (1,3)112 124 
US$50 million undated 7.993% capital securities (callable November 2005) (1)28 31 
US$35 million undated 7.755% capital securities (callable December 2005) (1)19 22 
US$200 million undated 7.375% reset capital securities (callable April 2006) (1)112 124 
US$75 million floating rate perpetual capital securities (callable September 2007) (1)42 46 
US$850 million 5.75% exchangeable capital securities, Series B (issued June 2003; callable June 2008) (4,5)464  
US$1,200 million 7.648% perpetual regulatory tier one securities (callable September 2031) (1,6)666 737 




 
 1,639 1,301 
The Royal Bank of Scotland plc    
£125 million 9.25% undated subordinated step-up notes (callable April 2006)125 124 
£150 million undated subordinated floating rate step-up notes (callable March 2007)150 149 
FRF1,000 million (redesignated €152 million) 5.875% undated subordinated notes
     (callable October 2008)
107 99 
£175 million 7.375% undated subordinated notes (callable August 2010)173 173 
£350 million 6.25% undated subordinated notes (callable December 2012)348 348 
£500 million 5.125% undated subordinated notes (issued March 2003; callable March 2016) (7)491  
£200 million 9.5% undated subordinated bonds (callable August 2018) (8)198 197 
£500 million 6.2% undated subordinated notes (callable March 2022)497 497 
£300 million 5.625% undated subordinated notes (callable September 2026)298 298 
£200 million 5.625% undated subordinated notes (issued June 2003; callable September 2026) (9)211  
£400 million 5.625% undated subordinated notes (issued October 2003;
     callable September 2026)
(10)
396  
£350 million 5.625% undated subordinated notes (callable June 2032)346 346 
£150 million 5.625% undated subordinated notes (callable June 2032)144 144 
     
National Westminster Bank Plc    
US$500 million primary capital floating rate notes, Series A (callable on any interest payment date)280 310 
US$500 million primary capital floating rate notes, Series B (callable on any interest payment date)280 310 
US$500 million primary capital floating rate notes, Series C (callable on any interest payment date)280 310 
US$500 million 7.875% exchangeable capital securities (callable on any interest payment date)(11)280 308 
US$500 million 7.75% reset subordinated notes (callable October 2007)275 304 
€100 million floating rate undated subordinated step-up notes (callable October 2009)70 65 
€400 million 6.625% fixed/floating rate undated subordinated notes (callable October 2009)280 257 
£325 million 7.625% undated subordinated step-up notes (callable January 2010)330 330 
£200 million 7.125% undated subordinated step-up notes (callable October 2022)203 203 
£200 million 11.5% undated subordinated notes (callable December 2022) (12)285 290 




 
 7,686 6,363 
 


 
     
Notes:  
(1)On-lent to The Royal Bank of Scotland plc on a subordinated basis.
(2)Interest is payable at a rate of 0.25% per annum over an average calculated by reference to six month euro dollar deposits in London for each interest period.
(3)Redeemable in certain circumstances related to changes in the tax laws of the UK, in whole or in part, at the option of the company on any interest payment date.
  Exchangeable, in whole or in part, at the option of the company on any interest payment date, or in certain circumstances related to changes in the tax laws of the UK, in whole but not in part, into the company’s non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each.
(4) Net proceeds received US$827 million, £497 million.
(5) Redeemable in certain circumstances related to changes in the tax laws of the UK, in whole but not in part, at the option of the company on any interest payment date.
  Exchangeable, in whole or in part, at the option of the company on any interest payment date, or in certain circumstances related to changes in the tax laws of the UK, in whole but not in part, into the company’s non-cumulative preferences shares US$0.01 each.
(6) Redeemable by the company on or after 30 September 2031 or on any interest payment date thereafter or at any time on the occurrence of certain events, subject to the prior approval of the UK Financial Services Authority.
 Interest on the PROs is payable semi-annually in arrears at a fixed rate of 7.648% per annum until 30 September 2031 and thereafter quarterly in arrears at a variable rate of 2.5% per annum above three month dollar LIBOR. The company can satisfy interest payment obligations by issuing ordinary shares to appointed Trustees sufficient to enable them, on selling these shares, to settle the interest payment.
(7)Net proceeds received £490 million.
(8)Guaranteed by the company.
(9) Net proceeds received £211 million.
(10) Net proceeds received £396 million.
(11) Exchangeable at the option of the issuer into 20 million 8.75% (gross) non-cumulative preference shares of US$25 each of National Westminster Bank Plc at any time.
(12) Exchangeable at the option of the issuer into 200 million 8.392% (gross) non-cumulative preference shares of £1 each of National Westminster Bank Plc at any time.
(13) Except as stated above, claims in respect of the Group’s undated loan capital are subordinated to the claims of other creditors. None of the Group’s undated loan capital is secured.
(14) Except as stated above, interest payable on Group floating rate undated issues is at a margin over London interbank rates. Interest on £3,775 million, US$1,668 million and €552 million of fixed rate undated issues is swapped into floating rates at a margin over London interbank rates.
(15)Where the issuer has the ability to redeem the undated loan capital, this is subject to prior approval of the UK Financial Services Authority.

116



32 Minority interests – non-equity

   2003
 £m
 2002
£m
 

 
Non-equity shares issued by NatWest:    
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$25(1)299 325 
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1 (2)166 166 




 
 465 491 
Non-equity shares issued by other subsidiaries:    
Non-cumulative trust preferred securities of1,000 (3) 875 806 
Non-cumulative trust preferred securities of US$1,000 (4) 1,245 456 
Other non-equity minority interests139 97 




 
Total2,724 1,850 
 
 
     
Notes: 
(1)The US$250 million non-cumulative preference shares, Series B, of US$25 each carry a gross dividend of 8.75% inclusive of associated tax credit. They are redeemable at the option of NatWest at US$25 per share.
 The US$300 million non-cumulative preference shares, Series C, of US$25 each carry a gross dividend of 8.625% inclusive of associated tax credit. They are redeemable at the option of NatWest from 9 April 2002 to 8 April 2008 inclusive, at a premium per share of US$0.90 in 2004 reducing by US$0.30 in each successive year. There is no redemption premium if the date of redemption falls after 8 April 2007.
(2)The £140 million 9% non-cumulative preference shares, Series A, of £1 each are non-redeemable.
(3)In June 2002, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, issued 1.25 million Series A non-cumulative trust preferred securities at €1,000 per security. Net proceeds received were €1,237 million, £777 million. These securities have no maturity date and are not redeemable at the option of the holders at any time. The securities may, with the consent of the UK Financial Services Authority (“FSA”), be redeemed, in whole or in part, by the issuer on 30 June 2012 and on any interest payment date thereafter. They may also be redeemed in whole, but not in part, upon the occurrence of certain tax and regulatory events. Interest on the securities is payable annually in arrears at a fixed annual rate of 6.467% until 30 June 2012, and thereafter quarterly in arrears at a rate of 2.1% above three month EURIBOR for the relevant payment period.
(4)In December 2002, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, issued 750,000 Series B non-cumulative trust preferred securities at US$1,000 per security. Net proceeds received were US$735 million, £465 million. These securities have no maturity date and are not redeemable at the option of the holders at any time. The securities may, with the consent of the FSA, be redeemed, in whole or in part, by the issuer on 31 March 2008 or on any interest payment date thereafter. They may also be redeemed in whole, but not in part, upon the occurrence of certain tax and regulatory events. Interest on the securities is payable quarterly in arrears at a fixed annual rate of 6.8% beginning on 31 March 2003.
 In May 2003, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, issued 850,000 Series I non-cumulative trust preferred securities at US$1,000 per security. Net proceeds received were US$841 million, £514 million. These securities have no maturity date and are not redeemable at the option of the holders at any time. The securities may, with the consent of the FSA, be redeemed, in whole or in part, by the issuer on 1 July 2013 or on any interest payment date thereafter. They may also be redeemed in whole, but not in part, upon the occurrence of certain tax and regulatory events. Interest on the securities is payable half yearly in arrears at a fixed annual rate of 4.709% beginning on 31 December 2003.
 In December 2003, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the Group, issued 650,000 Series II non-cumulative trust preferred securities at US$1,000 per security. Net proceeds received were US$644 million, £369 million. These securities have no maturity and are not redeemable at the option of the holders at any time. The securities may, with the consent of the FSA, be redeemed, in whole or in part, by the issuer on 3 January 2034 or any interest payment date thereafter. They may also be redeemed in whole, but not in part, upon the occurrence of certain tax and regulatory events. Interest on the securities is paid half yearly in arrears at a fixed annual rate of 6.425% beginning on 31 December 2003.
(5)Minority interests in the consolidated profit and loss account includes £127 million (2002 – £67 million; 2001 – £50 million) in respect of non-equity interests.

33 Share capital

 Allotted, called up and fully paid Authorised
 
 
        1 January
 2003
 £m
 Issued during
the year
£m
 Other
movement
during the
year
£m
 31 December
2003
£m
 31 December
2003
£m
 31 December
2002
£m
 

 
Equity shares            
Ordinary shares of 25p725 15  740 1,020 1,020 
Non-voting deferred shares of £0.01*  27 27 323 323 












 
Total equity share capital725 15 27 767 1,343 1,343 












 
             
Preference shares and Additional Value Shares            
Additional Value Shares of £0.01*27  (27) 27 27 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.011   1 2 2 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01      
Non-cumulative preference shares of0.01      
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01      
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25    225 225 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01      
Cumulative preference shares of £11   1 1 1 
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1    300 300 












 
Total non-equity share capital29  (27)2 555 555 












 
Total share capital754 15  769 1,898 1,898 
 










 

     * In December 2003, the AVS were converted to non-voting deferred shares of £0.01 each.

117




Notes on the accounts continued

33 Share capital (continued)

 Allotted, called up and fully paid Authorised 
 
 
 
Number of shares – thousands2003 2002 2003 2002 

 
Equity shares        
Ordinary shares of 25p2,963,335 2,900,861 4,079,375 4,079,375 
Non-voting deferred shares of £0.012,660,556  32,300,000 32,300,000 
         
Additional Value Shares and preference shares        
Additional Value Shares of £0.01 2,660,556 2,700,000 2,700,000 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.0182,000 106,000 238,500 238,500 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.011,900 1,900 3,900 3,900 
Non-cumulative preference shares of 0.01  66,000 66,000 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of 0.01750 750 3,000 3,000 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.25  900,000 900,000 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01200 200 1,000 1,000 
Cumulative preference shares of £1900 900 900 900 
Non-cumulative preference shares of £1  300,000 300,000 








 

Ordinary shares
The following issues of ordinary shares were made during the year to 31 December 2003:

(a)13.3 million ordinary shares following the exercise of options under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and a further 6.2 million ordinary shares in respect of the exercise of options under the NatWest executive and sharesave schemes which had been exchanged for options over the company’s shares following the acquisition of NatWest;
  
(b) 40.1 million ordinary shares in lieu of cash in respect of the final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2002 and the interim dividend for the year ended 31 December 2003; and
  
(c) 2.9 million ordinary shares under the company’s profit sharing (share ownership) scheme.

The total consideration for ordinary shares issued during the year amounted to £775 million.

During the year to 31 December 2003, options were granted over 14.5 million ordinary shares under the company’s executive, sharesave and option 2000 schemes. At 31 December 2003, options granted under the company’s various schemes, exercisable up to 2013 at prices ranging from 388p to 1841p per share, were outstanding in respect of 69.6 million ordinary shares. In addition, options granted under the NatWest schemes were outstanding in respect of 7.3 million ordinary shares exercisable up to 2009 at prices ranging from 312p to 924p per share. As permitted by UITF 17 ‘Employee share schemes’ applicable to SAYE schemes, no cost has been recognised in respect of sharesave options.

Additional Value Shares
Approximately 2.7 billion Additional Value Shares (“AVS”) with a total nominal value of £27 million were issued to shareholders by way of a bonus issue in July 2000 in connection with the acquisition of NatWest.

A dividend of 15 pence per AVS was paid on 3 December 2001, a second dividend of 30 pence per AVS on 2 December 2002 and a third and final dividend of 55 pence per AVS on 1 December 2003. The AVS were de-listed and in accordance with the terms of issue they were converted to Non-voting deferred shares and transferred to RBS NVDS Nominees Limited.

Preference shares
In January 2003, the company redeemed the 8 million Series B and the 16 million Series C, non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01 each, at a redemption price of US$25 per share, at a total cost of US$600 million.

118



Non-cumulative preference shares

Non-cumulative preference shares entitle the holders thereof to receive periodic non-cumulative cash dividends at specified fixed rates for each Series payable out of distributable profits of the company.

The non-cumulative preference shares are redeemable at the option of the company, in whole or in part from time to time at the rates detailed below plus dividends otherwise payable for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of redemption.

Class of preference shareSeries Number
of shares
in issue
 Redemption
date on
or after
 Redemption
price
per share

Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01Series D 7 million 14 September 2005 US$25.00
 Series E 8 million 17 October 2006 US$25.00
 Series F 8 million 31 March 2007 US$25.00
 Series G 10 million 31 March 2003 US$25.00
 Series H 12 million 31 March 2004 US$25.00
 Series I 12 million 30 September 2004 US$25.00
 Series J 9 million 31 December 2004 US$25.00
 Series K 16 million 30 June 2006 US$25.00
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.01Series 1 1 million 31 March 2010 US$1,000
 Series 2 0.5 million 31 March 2005 US$1,000
 Series 3 0.4 million 31 December 2005 US$1,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of0.01Series 1 0.75 million 31 March 2005 €1,000
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01Series 1 0.2 million 31 December 2010 £1,000

In the event that the non-cumulative convertible preference shares are not redeemed on or before the redemption date, the holder may convert the non-cumulative convertible preference shares into ordinary shares in the company.

Under existing arrangements, no redemption or purchase of any non-cumulative preference shares may be made by the company without the prior consent of the UK Financial Services Authority.

On a winding-up or liquidation of the company, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares will be entitled to receive, out of any surplus assets available for distribution to the company’s shareholders (after payment of arrears of dividends on the cumulative preference shares up to the date of repayment) pari passu with the cumulative preference shares, the non-cumulative sterling preference shares and all other shares of the company ranking pari passu with the non-cumulative preference shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company, a liquidation distribution of US$25 per non-cumulative preference share of US$0.01, US$1,000 per non-cumulative convertible preference share of US$0.01, 1,000 per non-cumulative convertible preference share of 0.01 and £1,000 per non-cumulative convertible preference share of £0.01, together with an amount equal to dividends for the then current dividend period accrued to the date of payment, before any distribution or payment may be made to holders of the ordinary shares as regards participation in the surplus assets of the company.

Except as described above, the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of the company.

Holders of the non-cumulative preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of or attend general meetings of the company except if any resolution is proposed for adoption by the shareholders of the company to vary or abrogate any of the rights attaching to the non-cumulative preference shares or proposing the winding-up or liquidation of the company. In any such case, they are entitled to receive notice of and to attend the general meeting of shareholders at which such resolution is to be proposed and will be entitled to speak and vote on such resolution (but not on any other resolution). In addition, in the event that, prior to any general meeting of shareholders, the company has failed to pay in full the three most recent quarterly dividend payments due on the non-cumulative dollar preference shares, the two most recent semi-annual dividend payments due on the non-cumulative convertible dollar preference shares and the most recent annual dividend payments due on the non-cumulative convertible euro preference shares and on the non-cumulative convertible sterling preference shares, the holders shall be entitled to receive notice of, attend, speak and vote at such meeting on all matters together with the holders of the ordinary shares, and in these circumstances only, the rights of the holders of the non-cumulative preference shares so to vote shall continue until the company shall have resumed the payment in full of the dividends in arrears.

119


Notes on the accounts continued

34 Reserves

         2003
The Group
 £m
         2002
The Group
 £m
         2001
The Group
 £m
 2003
The company
£m
 

 
Share premium account        
At 1 January7,608 7,465 6,530 7,608 
Currency translation adjustments(203)(283)58 (203)
Shares issued during the year760 685 870 760 
Preference shares redeemed during the year (268)  
Other movements10 9 7 10 








 
At 31 December8,175 7,608 7,465 8,175 
 






 
         
Merger reserve        
At 1 January11,455 12,029 12,604  
Shares issued  2,007  
Transfer to profit and loss account(574)(574)(2,582) 








 
At 31 December10,881 11,455 12,029  
 






 
         
Other reserves        
At 1 January387 212 191 156 
Redemption of preference shares 150   
Transfer of increase in value of long-term life assurance business32 25 17  
Other movements  4  








 
At 31 December419 387 212 156 
 






 
         
Revaluation reserve        
At 1 January80 113 40 6,001 
Revaluation of interests in subsidiary undertakings   10,856 
Revaluation of premises(69)(33)72  
Transfer (to)/from profit and loss account(4) 1  








 
At 31 December7 80 113 16,857 
 






 
         
Profit and loss account        
At 1 January6,768 5,956 2,786 3,547 
Currency translation adjustments and other movements33 27 (14) 
Retention for the year825 704 783 (595)
Employee share option payments (136)(163) 
Redemption of preference shares(364)(332) (364)
Goodwill previously written off40    
Transfer from merger reserve574 574 2,582  
Transfer of increase in value of long-term life assurance business(32)(25)(17) 
Transfer from/(to) revaluation reserve4  (1) 








 
At 31 December7,848 6,768 5,956 2,588 
 






 

The cumulative goodwill arising on acquisitions of subsidiary and associated undertakings which are still part of the Group and written off directly against profit and loss account reserves of the Group amounted to £1,133 million at 31 December 2003.

Exchange gains of £604 million (2002 – £281 million) arising on foreign currency borrowings have been offset in the Group’s profit and loss account reserves against differences on retranslating the net investment in overseas subsidiary and associated undertakings financed by these borrowings.

The tax effect of gains and losses taken directly to reserves was nil (2002 – £7 million charge).

Included in the closing balances of the Group’s revaluation reserves and profit and loss account at 31 December 2003 are cumulative net gains of £90 million (2002 – £55 million) relating to the retranslation of opening net assets of subsidiary and associated undertakings offset by foreign currency borrowing.

At 31 December 2003, 790,019 (2002 – 919,255) ordinary shares of 25p each of the company were held by the 1992 Employee Share Trust in respect of options under the executive option scheme and awards under the restricted share scheme. Included in ‘Other assets’ is an amount which reflects the exercise price of the options that the shares are expected to be used to satisfy.

120



Non-equity shareholders’ funds:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.011,140 1,628 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of US$0.011,058 1,169 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of €0.01528 486 
Non-cumulative convertible preference shares of £0.01196 196 
Cumulative preference shares of £11 1 




 
Total preference shares2,923 3,480 
Additional Value Shares of £0.01 27 




 
 2,923 3,507 
 
 

35 Lease commitments
The annual rental commitments of the Group under non-cancellable operating leases were as follows:

 2003 2002 
 
 
 
 Premises
£m
 Equipment
£m
 Premises
£m
 Equipment
£m
 

 
Expiring within one year7 6 7 4 
Expiring between one and five years39 9 39 13 
Expiring after five years200 1 184  








 
 246 16 230 17 
 
 

36 Analysis of total assets and liabilities

  2003
£m
 2002
£m
 





 
Assets:denominated in sterling233,570 220,259 
 denominated in currencies other than sterling221,705 191,741 





 
  455,275 412,000 
  


 
      
Liabilities:denominated in sterling234,284 216,013 
 denominated in currencies other than sterling220,991 195,987 





 
  455,275 412,000 
  


 

37 Collateral given and received under repurchase transactions
The Group enters into securities repurchase agreements and securities lending transactions under which it receives or transfers cash or securities as collateral in accordance with normal market practice. Securities transferred under repurchase transactions included within securities on the balance sheet as follows:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Treasury and other eligible bills761 1,820 
Debt securities24,231 23,299 




 
 24,992 25,119 
 
 

Of the above securities, £25.0 billion (2002 – £25.1 billion) could be resold or repledged by the holder. Securities received as collateral under reverse repurchase agreements amounted to £57.7 billion (2002 – £46.1 billion), of which £53.6 billion (2002 – £39.3 billion) had been resold or repledged as collateral for the Group’s own transactions.

121



Notes on the accounts continued

38 Assets charged as security for liabilities

Assets charged as security for liabilities2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Loans and advances to customers1,196 852 
Debt securities2,628 4,017 
Tangible fixed assets1,162 1,010 
Other126 599 




 
 5,112 6,478 
 
 

Included above are assets pledged with overseas government agencies and banks, and margin deposits placed with exchanges.

Liabilities secured by charges on assets2003
£m
 2002
£m
 




 
Deposits by banks3,000 2,778 
Customer accounts92 2,233 
Debt securities in issue1,550 591 




 
 4,642 5,602 
 
 

39 Derivatives
In the normal course of business, the Group enters into a variety of derivative transactions principally in the foreign exchange and interest rate markets. These are used to provide financial services to customers and to take, hedge and modify positions as part of trading activities. Derivatives are also used to hedge or modify risk exposures arising on the balance sheet from a variety of activities including lending and securities investment.

The principal types of derivative contracts into which the Group enters are described below.

Swaps
These are over-the-counter (“OTC”) agreements between two parties to exchange periodic payments of interest, or payments for the change in value of a commodity, or related index, over a set period based on notional principal amounts. The Group enters into swap transactions in several markets. Interest rate swaps exchange fixed rates for floating rates of interest based on notional amounts. Basis swaps exchange floating or fixed interest calculated using different bases. Cross currency swaps are the exchange of interest based on notional values of different currencies. Equity and commodity swaps exchange interest for the return on an equity or commodity, or equity or commodity index.

Options
Currency and interest rate options confer the right, but not the obligation, on the buyer to receive or pay a specific quantity of an asset or financial instrument for a specified price at or before a specified date. Options may be exchange traded or OTC agreements. The Group principally buys and sells currency and interest rate options.

Futures and forwards
Short-term interest rate futures, bond futures and forward foreign exchange contracts are all agreements to deliver, or take delivery of, a specified amount of an asset or financial instrument based on the specified rate, price or index applied against the underlying asset or financial instrument, at a specified date. Futures are exchange traded at standardised amounts of the underlying asset or financial instrument. Forward contracts are OTC agreements and are principally dealt in by the Group in interest rates as forward rate agreements and in currency as forward foreign exchange contracts.

Collateral
The Group may require collateral in respect of the credit risk in derivative transactions. The amount of credit risk is principally the positive fair value of contracts. Collateral may be in the form of cash or in the form of a lien over a customer’s assets entitling the Group to make a claim for current and future liabilities.

122



Maturity of replacement cost of over-the-counter contracts (trading and non-trading)
Replacement cost indicates the Group’s derivatives credit exposure. The following table sets forth the gross positive fair values by maturity. The net replacement cost of internal trades is not included as there is no credit risk associated with them.

 Within
one year
£m
 One to
two years
£m
 Two to
five years
£m
 Over
five years
£m
 2003
Total

£m
 Within
one year
£m
 One to
two years
£m
 Two to
five years
£m
 Over
five years
£m
 2002
Total
£m
 

 
Before netting:                    
Exchange rate contracts22,315 2,245 2,028 1,575 28,163 14,531 947 1,244 540 17,262 
Interest rate contracts8,440 7,401 17,462 21,671 54,974 9,037 8,590 20,420 26,036 64,083 
Credit derivatives11 7 85 169 272 2 62 76 237 377 
Equity and commodity
     contracts
102 590 319 9 1,020 102 58 635 15 810 




















 
 30,868 10,243 19,894 23,424 84,429 23,672 9,657 22,375 26,828 82,532 
 



 
                     
Banks and investment
     firms
        70,421         69,416 
Others        14,008         13,116 
         
         
 
         84,429         82,532 
         
         
 

At 31 December 2003, the potential credit risk exposure, which is after netting and allowing for collateral received, of the Group’s trading and non-trading derivatives, was £5,405 million (2002 – £5,428 million) to banks and investment firms and £5,985 million (2002 – £5,482 million) to other counterparties.

Exchange traded contracts are excluded from the above table. Such contracts generally involve lower credit risk than OTC contracts as they are cleared through exchanges that require margin from participants and the daily settlement of gains and losses.

Trading derivatives
The following table shows the fair values of instruments in the derivatives trading portfolio:

 2003
End of period fair value
 2002
End of period fair value
 
 
 
 
 Assets
£m
 Liabilities
£m
 Assets
£m
 Liabilities
£m
 

 
Exchange rate contracts:        
Spot, forwards and futures18,299 20,325 12,102 12,572 
Currency swaps5,183 4,944 2,633 3,596 
Options purchased4,620  2,482  
Options written 4,295  2,457 








 
 28,102 29,564 17,217 18,625 








 
         
Interest rate contracts:        
Interest rate swaps50,838 50,744 59,079 59,776 
Options purchased2,799  3,332  
Options written 2,829  3,341 
Futures and forwards629 639 1,284 1,164 








 
 54,266 54,212 63,695 64,281 








 
         
Credit derivatives273 155 377 139 








 
         
Equity and commodity contracts924 720 733 496 








 
 83,565 84,651 82,022 83,541 
Netting(69,478)(69,478)(68,812)(68,812)








 
 14,087 15,173 13,210 14,729 
 






 
         
Average fair values (before netting):        
Exchange rate contracts18,967 19,619 13,565 14,581 
Interest rate contracts65,676 65,977 41,982 42,559 
Credit derivatives365 133 273 134 
Equity and commodity contracts877 624 545 483 








 
 85,885 86,353 56,365 57,757 
 






 

Gains and losses on exchange traded contracts subject to daily margining requirements are settled daily. The fair value of such contracts included above reflects the last day’s variation margin.

123



Notes on the accounts continued

39 Derivatives (continued)
The following table analyses, by maturity and contract type, the notional principal amounts of the Group’s trading derivatives:

 Within
one year
£bn
 One to
two years
£bn
 Two to
five years
£bn
 Over
five years
£bn
 2003
Total

£bn
 Within
one year
£bn
 One to
two years
£bn
 Two to
five years
£bn
 Over
five years
£bn
 2002
Total
£bn
 

 
Exchange rate contracts:                    
Spot, forwards and futures616.8 24.9 7.2 0.2 649.1 504.5 26.8 4.5 0.2 536.0 
Currency swaps43.5 26.0 43.4 33.3 146.2 46.8 19.8 34.2 22.7 123.5 
Options purchased156.1 10.5 4.1 1.0 171.7 114.9 3.5 1.2  119.6 
Options written164.7 8.5 3.4 1.1 177.7 114.0 4.6 1.1 0.2 119.9 




















 
 981.1 69.9 58.1 35.6 1,144.7 780.2 54.7 41.0 23.1 899.0 
 


















 
                     
Interest rate contracts:                    
Interest rate swaps1,555.8 675.6 960.8 630.1 3,822.3 1,115.5 537.3 662.3 485.2 2,800.3 
Options purchased91.1 34.2 49.3 50.4 225.0 69.5 21.6 46.9 38.9 176.9 
Options written48.0 36.6 47.0 48.5 180.1 51.9 26.8 43.4 38.8 160.9 
Futures and forwards865.3 159.3 55.3 0.5 1,080.4 606.4 116.0 39.4 0.5 762.3 




















 
 2,560.2 905.7 1,112.4 729.5 5,307.8 1,843.3 701.7 792.0 563.4 3,900.4 
 


















 
                     
Credit derivatives7.1 1.7 11.9 7.8 28.5 3.2 6.0 4.7 8.1 22.0 
 


















 
                     
Equity and commodity contracts20.4 5.3 8.2 0.2 34.1 12.9 6.7 3.7 0.2 23.5 
 


















 

Non-trading derivatives
The Group establishes non-trading derivatives positions externally with third parties and also internally. It should be noted that the following tables include the components of the internal hedging programme that transfers risks to the trading portfolios in the Group or to external third party participants in the derivatives markets.

The following table summarises the fair values and book values of derivatives held for non-trading activities and includes internal trades:

 2003
 Fair value
 2003
Book value
 2002
 Fair value
 2002
Book value
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Positive
 £m
 Negative
£m
 Positive
 £m
 Negative
£m
 Positive
 £m
 Negative
£m
 Positive
 £m
 Negative
£m
 

 
Exchange rate contracts:                
Spot, forwards and futures101 464 94 460 25 135 16 125 
Currency swaps and options304 210 224 135 199 107 111 76 
















 
 405 674 318 595 224 242 127 201 
















 
                 
Interest rate contracts:                
Interest rate swaps2,541 2,247 608 683 2,983 2,504 675 587 
Futures, forwards and options62 416 1 2 14 74   
















 
 2,603 2,663 609 685 2,997 2,578 675 587 
















 
                 
Credit derivatives3 6    4   
















 
                 
Equity and commodity contracts118 52 78 22 86 141 77 9 
















 
Total3,129 3,395 1,005 1,302 3,307 2,965 879 797 
 














 

The following table analyses, by maturity and contract type, the notional principal amounts of the Group’s non-trading derivatives (third party and internal):

 Within
one year
£bn
 One to
two years
£bn
 Two to
five years
£bn
 Over
five years
£bn
 2003
Total

£bn
 Within
one year
£bn
 One to
two years
£bn
 Two to
five years
£bn
 Over
five years
£bn
 2002
Total
£bn
 

 
Exchange rate contracts:                    
Spot, forwards and futures19.4  0.2 0.1 19.7 8.8    8.8 
Currency swaps and options3.2 1.0 0.7 1.9 6.8 2.1 0.2 1.3 1.7 5.3 




















 
 22.6 1.0 0.9 2.0 26.5 10.9 0.2 1.3 1.7 14.1 
 


















 
                     
Interest rate contracts:                    
Interest rate swaps34.4 15.1 33.5 43.7 126.7 32.0 16.6 27.3 33.4 109.3 
Futures, forwards and options0.4 0.1 3.3 4.6 8.4 0.9 0.2 0.7 1.1 2.9 




















 
 34.8 15.2 36.8 48.3 135.1 32.9 16.8 28.0 34.5 112.2 
 


















 
                     
Credit derivatives 0.5 0.2 0.3 1.0  0.1 1.4  1.5 




















 
                     
Equity and commodity contracts0.3 0.5 0.7 0.2 1.7 0.6 0.2 1.1 0.3 2.2 
 


















 

124



40 Financial instruments

The Group’s objectives and policies in managing the risks that arise in connection with the use of financial instruments are set out in the Operating and financial review under ‘Market risk’, ‘Currency risk’ and ‘Equity risk’.

Interest rate sensitivity gap

The tables below summarise the Group’s interest rate sensitivity gap for its non-trading book at 31 December 2003 and 31 December 2002. The tables show the contractual repricing for each category of asset, liability and for off-balance sheet items. A liability (or negative) gap position exists when liabilities reprice more quickly or in greater proportion thanassets during a given period and tends to benefit net interest income in a declining interest rate environment. An asset (or positive) gap position exists when assets reprice more quickly or in greater proportion than liabilities during a given period and tends to benefit net interest income in a rising interest rate environment. Contractual repricing terms do not reflect the potential impact of early repayment or withdrawal. Positions may not be reflective of those in subsequent periods. Major changes in positions can be made promptly as market outlooks change. In addition, significant variations in interest rate sensitivity may exist within the re-pricing periods presented and among the currencies in which the Group has interest rate positions.

2003Within
3 months
£m
 After
3 months

but within
6 months
£m
 After
6 months
but within
1 year
£m
 After
1 year
but within
5 years
£m
 After
5 years
£m
 Non-interest
bearing
funds
£m
 Banking
book
total

£m
 Trading
book

total

£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Assets                  
Loans and advances to banks11,149 3,780 5,188 122 32 1,087 21,358 30,533 51,891 
Loans and advances to customers155,920 11,832 7,763 27,992 18,463 1,486 223,456 29,075 252,531 
Treasury bills and debt securities18,906 2,594 4,835 5,525 11,175 2,316 45,351 39,444 84,795 
Other assets     47,430 47,430 18,628 66,058 


















 
Total assets185,975 18,206 17,786 33,639 29,670 52,319 337,595 117,680 455,275 


















 
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposits by banks37,670 1,178 408 308 414 1,083 41,061 26,262 67,323 
Customer accounts172,563 4,110 2,360 3,352 400 28,140 210,925 26,038 236,963 
Debt securities in issue27,254 2,567 4,428 4,804 846  39,899 1,117 41,016 
Subordinated liabilities3,583 601 104 1,762 10,889  16,939 59 16,998 
Other liabilities5 5 9 37 126 26,893 27,075 37,801 64,876 
Shareholders’ funds     27,018 27,018 1,081 28,099 
Internal funding of trading book(22,447)(1,060)(1,239)(379)(197) (25,322)25,322  


















 
Total liabilities218,628 7,401 6,070 9,884 12,478 83,134 337,595 117,680 455,275 


















 
Off-balance sheet items(7,943)(1,122)3,597 964 4,504        












       
Interest rate sensitivity gap(40,596)9,683 15,313 24,719 21,696 (30,815)      












       
Cumulative interest rate
     sensitivity gap
(40,596)(30,913)(15,600)9,119 30,815         










         

125




Notes on the accounts continued

40 Financial instruments (continued)

2002Within
3 months
£m
 After
3 months

but within
6 months
£m
 After
6 months
but within
1 year
£m
 After
1 year
but within
5 years
£m
 After
5 years
£m
 Non-interest
bearing
funds
£m
 Banking
book
total

£m
 Trading
book

total

£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Assets                  
Loans and advances to banks14,208 4,572 2,569 2 26 482 21,859 22,437 44,296 
Loans and advances to customers139,822 12,547 9,134 25,023 10,228 1,064 197,818 25,506 223,324 
Treasury bills and debt securities23,498 4,529 3,693 6,639 5,130  43,489 35,012 78,501 
Other assets     48,322 48,322 17,557 65,879 


















 
Total assets177,528 21,648 15,396 31,664 15,384 49,868 311,488 100,512 412,000 


















 
                   
Liabilities                  
Deposits by banks31,189 731 623 177 459 1,295 34,474 20,246 54,720 
Customer accounts158,253 3,747 2,146 3,232 373 27,919 195,670 23,491 219,161 
Debt securities in issue27,462 1,030 1,307 3,615 513  33,927 11 33,938 
Subordinated liabilities2,688 528 623 1,446 8,615  13,900 65 13,965 
Other liabilities3 11 15 14 128 27,418 27,589 35,575 63,164 
Shareholders’ funds     26,182 26,182 870 27,052 
Internal funding of                  
   trading business(19,634) (620)   (20,254)20,254  


















 
Total liabilities199,961 6,047 4,094 8,484 10,088 82,814 311,488 100,512 412,000 


















 
Off-balance sheet items(1,762)(3,141)(1,946)3,708 3,141        












       
Interest rate sensitivity gap(24,195)12,460 9,356 26,888 8,437 (32,946)      












       
Cumulative interest rate                  
   sensitivity gap(24,195)(11,735)(2,379)24,509 32,946         










         

Currency risk

The Group does not maintain material non-trading open currency positions other than the structural foreign currency translation exposures arising from its investment in overseas subsidiary and associated undertakings and their related funding.

The Group’s structural currency exposures were as follows:

Functional currency of net investmentNet
investments
in overseas
operations
£m
 Foreign
currency
borrowings
hedging net
investments
£m
 2003
Structural

foreign
currency
exposures
£m
 Net
investments
in overseas
operations
£m
 Foreign
currency
borrowings
hedging net
investments
£m
 2002
Structural

foreign
currency
exposures
£m
 

 
US dollar5,329 5,198 131 5,190 5,107 83 
Euro1,422 826 596 1,019 558 461 
Swiss franc357 357  306 295 11 
Other non-sterling118 114 4 35 30 5 












 
Total7,226 6,495 731 6,550 5,990 560 
 
 

Trading book market risk

An explanation of the value-at-risk (“VaR”) methodology of estimating potential losses arising from the Group’s exposure to market risk in its trading book and the main assumptions and parameters underlying it is given in ‘Risk management – market risk’ in the Operating and financial review.

The following table analyses the VaR for the Group’s trading portfolios by type of market risk exposure at the period end and as an average for the period and the maximum and minimum for the period:

   Year ended 31 December 2003   Year ended 31 December 2002 
 31
December
2003
 £m
 
 31
December

2002
 £m
 
 
  Maximum
£m
 Minimum
£m
 Average
£m
  Maximum
£m
 Minimum
£m
 Average
£m
 

 
Interest rate7.4 14.5 5.7 9.4 8.4 11.6 6.0 9.0 
Currency0.8 2.5 0.7 1.3 1.2 2.5 0.4 1.2 
Equity0.4 1.4 0.2 0.5 0.6 1.0 0.2 0.5 
Diversification effects(1.2)      (1.8)      


       
       
Total7.4 14.2 5.6 9.4 8.4 11.8 5.6 9.1 
 
 

126




Fair values of financial instruments

The following tables set out the fair values of the Group’s financial instruments. Fair value is the amount at which an instrument could be exchanged in a current transaction between willing parties, other than in a forced or liquidation sale. Quoted market values are used where available; otherwise, fair values have been estimated based on discounted expected future cash flows and other valuation techniques. These techniques involve uncertainties and requireassumptions and judgements covering prepayments, credit risk and discount rates. Changes in these assumptions would significantly affect estimated fair values. The fair values reported would not necessarily be realised in an immediate sale; nor are there plans to settle liabilities prior to contractual maturity. As there is a wide range of valuation techniques, it may be inappropriate to compare the Group’s fair value information to independent markets or other financial institutions’ fair value.

Trading businessNote 2003
Carrying
amount
£m
 2003
Fair
value
£m
 2002
Carrying
amount
£m
 2002
Fair
value
£m
 

 
Assets          
Treasury bills and other eligible bills(1)1,869 1,869 6,890 6,890 
Loans and advances to banks and customers(1)59,608 59,608 47,943 47,943 
Debt securities(1)37,575 37,575 28,122 28,122 
Equity shares(1)428 428 37 37 
Derivatives(2)14,087 14,087 13,210 13,210 










 
           
Liabilities          
Deposits by banks and customer accounts(3)52,300 52,300 43,737 43,737 
Debt securities in issue(1)1,117 1,117 11 11 
Short positions in securities(1)19,128 19,128 16,381 16,381 
Subordinated loan capital(1)59 59 65 65 
Derivatives(2)15,173 15,173 14,729 14,729 










 
           
Banking businessNote 2003
Carrying
amount
£m
 2003
Fair
value
£m
 2002
Carrying
amount
£m
 2002
Fair
value
£m
 










 
Assets          
Cash and balances at central banks(1)3,822 3,822 3,481 3,481 
Items in the course of collection from other banks(1)2,501 2,501 2,741 2,741 
Treasury bills and other eligible bills(1)2,977 2,977 4,569 4,569 
Loans and advances to banks and customers(4)244,814 246,244 219,677 221,883 
Debt securities(5)42,374 42,195 38,920 39,288 
Equity shares(5)1,872 2,289 1,849 1,765 
Derivatives – net(2)    82 342 










 
           
Liabilities          
Items in the course of transmission to other banks(1)958 958 1,258 1,258 
Deposits by banks and customer accounts(3)251,986 252,360 230,144 230,266 
Debt securities in issue(6)39,899 39,897 33,927 33,941 
Subordinated loan capital(7)16,939 17,522 13,900 14,890 
Non-equity minority interests(7)2,724 2,867 1,850 1,984 
Non-equity shareholders’ funds(7)2,923 3,245 3,507 5,277 
Derivatives – net(7)297 266     










 
Notes:  
(1) Financial assets and financial liabilities carried at fair value or where carrying value approximates to fair value because they are of short maturity or repricing date.
(2) Fair values of derivatives are determined by market prices where available. Otherwise fair value is based on current market information using appropriate valuation models.
(3) The fair value of deposits repayable on demand is equal to their carrying value. The fair values of term deposits and time certificates of deposit are estimated by discounting expected future cash flows using rates currently offered for deposits of similar remaining maturities.
(4) For loans which reprice frequently or are linked to the Group’s base rate, and for which there has been no significant change in credit risk since inception, carrying value represents a reasonable estimate of fair value. For other loans, fair values are estimated by discounting expected future cash flows, using current interest rates appropriate to the type of loan, and making adjustments for credit risk.
(5) Fair values of marketable securities are based on quoted market prices. Where these are unavailable, fair value is estimated using other valuation techniques.
(6) The fair value of short-term debt securities in issue is approximately equal to their carrying value. The fair value of other debt securities in issue is based on quoted market prices where available, or where these are unavailable, is estimated using other valuation techniques.
(7) The fair value of loan capital, non-equity minority interests and preference shares is based on quoted market prices where available. For unquoted loan capital, fair value has been estimated using other valuation techniques.
(8) Fair values are not given for financial commitments and contingent liabilities. The diversity of the fee structures, the lack of an established market and the difficulty of separating the value of the instruments from the value of the overall relationship involve such uncertainty that it is not meaningful to provide an estimate of their fair value. (The principal amounts of these instruments are given in Note 41).

 

127




Notes on the accounts continued

40 Financial instruments (continued)

Hedges

Derivatives and debt securities held for hedging purposes are accounted for in accordance with the treatment of the hedged transaction. As a result, any gains or losses on the hedging instrument arising from changes in fair values are not recognised in the profit and loss account immediately but are accounted for in the same manner as the hedged item.

 2003
Unrecognised
gains and
 losses
£m
 2003
Deferred
gains and
losses
£m
 2002
Unrecognised
gains and
losses
£m
 2002
Deferred
gains and
losses
£m
 

 
At 1 January – gains2,535 285 1,201 148 
At 1 January – losses(2,275)(44)(1,329)(64)








 
 260 241 (128)84 
Recognised gains that arose in previous periods(659)(72)(307)(35)
Recognised losses that arose in previous periods636 12 322 22 
Unrecognised gains and losses arising in the year(208) 585  
Unrecognised gains and losses deferred in the year2 (2)(212)212 
Unrecognised gains and losses deferred and taken to profit
     and loss in the year
   (42)








 
At 31 December31 179 260 241 
 






 
         
Of which – gains2,236 213 2,535 285 
Of which – losses(2,205)(34)(2,275)(44)








 
 31 179 260 241 
 






 
         
Gains expected to be recognised in the year to 31 December 2004        
   (year to 31 December 2003)532 66 601 72 
Gains expected to be recognised in the year to 31 December 2005 or later        
   (year to 31 December 2004 or later)1,704 147 1,934 213 








 
 2,236 213 2,535 285 
 






 
         
Losses expected to be recognised in the year to 31 December 2004        
   (year to 31 December 2003)(371)(5)(541)(12)
Losses expected to be recognised in the year to 31 December 2005 or later        
   (year to 31 December 2004 or later)(1,834)(29)(1,734)(32)








 
 (2,205)(34)(2,275)(44)
 






 

During the year to 31 December 2003, gains of £58 million (2002 – £33 million) and losses of £95 million (2002 – £16 million) arising in previous periods were taken directly to the profit and loss account on financial instruments no longer accounted for as hedges.

128





41 Memorandum items

Contingent liabilities and commitments

The amounts shown in the table below are intended only to provide an indication of the volume of business outstanding at 31 December. Although the Group is exposed to credit risk in the event of non-performance of the obligations undertaken by customers, the amounts shown do not, and are not intended to, provide any indication of the Group’s expectation of future losses.

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Contingent liabilities:    
Acceptances and endorsements595 2,407 
Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security8,787 5,200 
Other contingent liabilities5,482 7,981 




 
 14,864 15,588 
 


 
Commitments:    
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions605 655 
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend    
   – less than one year85,424 87,645 
   – one year and over51,827 39,784 
Other commitments1,837 508 




 
 139,693 128,592 
 
 

Banking commitments and contingent obligations, which have been entered into on behalf of customers and for which there are corresponding obligations from customers, are not included in assets and liabilities. The Group’s maximum exposure to credit loss, in the event of non-performance by the other party and where all counterclaims, collateral or security proves valueless, is represented by the contractual nominal amount of these instruments included in the table above. These commitments and contingent obligations are subject to the Group’s normal credit approval processes and any potential loss is taken into account in assessing provisions for bad and doubtful debts in accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy.

Contingent liabilities

Acceptances – in accepting a bill of exchange drawn on it by a customer a bank undertakes to pay the holder of the bill at maturity. Most acceptances are presented for payment and reimbursement by the customer is usually immediate. In the UK, bills accepted by certain banks designated by the Bank of England are eligible for rediscount at the Bank of England.

Endorsements – in endorsing a bill of exchange a bank accepts liability for payment of any shortfall on the bill at maturity. Unlike acceptances, the endorsing bank receives value for the bill, which is then rediscounted.

Guarantees – the Group gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that the Group will meet a customer’s obligations to third parties if the customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that the Group could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount as disclosed in the table above. The Group expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused.

Other contingent liabilities – these include standby letters of credit, supporting customer debt issues and contingent liabilities relating to customer trading activities such as those arising from performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities.

Commitments

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions – documentary letters are commercial letters of credit providing for payment by the Group to a named beneficiary against presentation of specified documents.

Commitments to lend – under a loan commitment the Group agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities.

Other commitments – these include forward asset purchases, forward forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities.

Additional contingent liabilities arise in the normal course of the Group’s business. It is not anticipated that any material loss will arise from these transactions.

129




Notes on the accounts continued

41 Memorandum items (continued)
Litigation

In December 2003, members of the Group were joined as defendants in a number of legal actions in the United States following the collapse of Enron. Collectively, the claims are, to a substantial degree, unquantified and in each case they are made against large numbers of defendants. The Group intends to defend these claims vigorously. The US Courts dealing with the main Enron actions have ordered that the Group join the non-binding, multi-party mediation which commenced in late 2003. Based on current knowledge including applicable defences and given the unquantified nature of these claims, the directors are unable at this stage to predict with certainty the eventual loss, if any, in these matters. The Group continues to co-operate fully with the appropriate authorities.

Members of the Group are engaged in other litigation in the United Kingdom and a number of overseas jurisdictions, including the United States, involving claims by and against them arising in the ordinary course of business. The directors of the company have reviewed the actual, threatened and known potential claims and proceedings and, after consulting with the Group’s legal advisers are satisfied that the outcome of these claims and proceedings will not have a material adverse effect on the Group’s consolidated net assets, results of operations or cash flows.

42 Acquisitions
The Group made a number of acquisitions during the year, all of which were accounted for using acquisition accounting principles. The most significant of these was Churchill Insurance Group PLC which was acquired by the company in September 2003 for a consideration of £1.1 billion.

The provisional fair values of the assets and liabilities of all acquisitions made during the year and the consideration paid are shown in the table below:

At respective dates of acquisitionBook value of
net assets
acquired
£m
 Fair value
adjustments
£m
 Fair value to
the Group
£m
 

 
Cash and balances at central banks153 4 157 
Treasury and other eligible bills13  13 
Loans and advances to banks622  622 
Loans and advances to customers3,326 (11)3,315 
Debt securities1,921 (3)1,918 
Equity shares5 (3)2 
Interest in associates21  21 
Intangible fixed assets52 (52) 
Tangible fixed assets603 (7)596 
Other assets1,144 (61)1,083 
Prepayments and accrued income616 (35)581 
       
Deposits by banks(1,416) (1,416)
Customer accounts(2,446)(7)(2,453)
Other liabilities(537)80 (457)
Accruals and deferred income(2,801)(300)(3,101)
Deferred tax provisions(34) (34)
Other provisions(9) (9)
Minority interest – non-equity(16) (16)






 
Net assets acquired1,217 (395)822 
 


   
Goodwill    1,456 
     
 
Total consideration    2,278 
     
 
       
Satisfied by:      
Payment of cash    2,228 
Loan notes    26 
Fees and expenses relating to the acquisition    24 






 
     2,278 
     
 

Fair value adjustments reflect the restatement of balances to their estimated fair values at the date of acquisition, and the related tax effect.

130



43 Reconciliation of operating profit to net cash inflow from operating activities

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Operating profit6,159 4,763 4,252 
(Increase)/decrease in prepayments and accrued income(490)(657)486 
Interest on subordinated liabilities551 659 674 
Increase in accruals and deferred income1,456 856 490 
Amortisation of and provisions against investment securities60 99 39 
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts1,461 1,286 984 
Loans and advances written off net of recoveries(1,447)(973)(755)
Profit on sale of tangible fixed assets(30)(32)(55)
Profit on sale of subsidiaries and associates(63)(13) 
(Profit)/loss from associated undertakings(12)(2)6 
Profit on sale of investment securities(172)(85)(48)
Provisions for liabilities and charges47 50 67 
Provisions utilised(101)(57)(37)
Depreciation and amortisation of tangible and intangible fixed assets1,682 1,626 1,532 
Increase in value of long-term assurance business(73)(61)(55)






 
Net cash inflow from trading activities9,028 7,459 7,580 
Decrease/(increase) in items in the course of collection240 547 (327)
Decrease/(increase) in treasury and other eligible bills6,626 (1,323)(6,796)
Decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks2,797 (2,756)(4,785)
Increase in loans and advances to customers(26,140)(32,670)(18,038)
(Increase)/decrease in securities(9,871)1,799 760 
(Increase)/decrease in other assets(886)(1,087)860 
(Decrease)/increase in items in the course of transmission(300)(851)402 
Increase in deposits by banks11,188 14,512 4,604 
Increase in customer accounts15,669 19,383 11,584 
Increase in debt securities in issue7,078 3,269 11,262 
(Decrease)/increase in other liabilities(168)3,817 (3,560)
Increase in settlement balances and short positions3,202 482 3,644 
Effect of other accruals/deferrals and other non-cash movements1,245 1,156 97 






 
Net cash inflow from operating activities19,708 13,737 7,287 
 
 

44 Analysis of the net outflow of cash in respect of the purchase of businesses and subsidiary undertakings

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Cash consideration paid(2,252)(415)(1,770)
Cash acquired504 107 156 






 
Net outflow of cash(1,748)(308)(1,614)
 
 

131



Notes on the accounts continued

45 Sale of subsidiary and associated undertakings

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Net assets disposed of66 13 8 
Goodwill written back40   
Goodwill sold10 3  
Profit on disposal63 13  






 
Net inflow of cash in respect of disposals (net of expenses)179 29 8 
 
 

46 Analysis of changes in financing during the year

 Share capital
(including share premium)
 Loan capital 
 
 
 
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
At 1 January8,362 8,358 7,378 13,965 12,530 10,436 
Currency translation adjustments(203)(283)58 (448)(520)82 
Net cash (outflow)/inflow from financing(180)(515)2,412 3,481 1,955 2,012 
Amount credited to merger reserve  (2,007)   
Other non-cash movements965 802 517    












 
At 31 December8,944 8,362 8,358 16,998 13,965 12,530 
 
 

47 Analysis of cash

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Cash and balances at central banks3,822 3,481 3,093 
Loans and advances to banks repayable on demand17,115 6,792 3,934 






 
Cash20,937 10,273 7,027 
 
 

Certain subsidiary undertakings are required to maintain balances with the Bank of England which, at 31 December 2003, amounted to £231 million (2002 – £211 million). Certain subsidiary undertakings are required by law to maintain reserve balances with the Federal Reserve Bank in the US. Such reserve balances amounted to US$190 million at 31 December 2003 (2002 – US$205 million).

48 Analysis of changes in cash during the year

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
At 1 January10,273 7,027 10,627 
Net cash inflow/(outflow)10,664 3,246 (3,600)






 
At 31 December20,937 10,273 7,027 
 
 

132



49 Segmental analysis
In the tables below, the analyses of net assets are included in compliance with Statement of Standard Accounting Practice 25 ‘Segmental Reporting’. The fungible nature of liabilities within the banking industry results in allocations of liabilities which, in some cases, are necessarily subjective. The directors believe that it is more meaningful to analyse total assets and the result of this analysis is therefore also included in the tables.

The prior year data in the tables below have been restated to reflect the transfer in 2003 of certain activities from Corporate Banking and Financial Markets and Wealth Management to Manufacturing.

a) Classes of business

2003Net
interest
income
£m
 Non-interest
income
£m
 Total
income
£m
 Operating
expenses
and other
operating
charges
£m
 Provisions*
£m
 Profit/
(loss) on
ordinary
activities
before tax
£m
 

 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets2,324 4,373 6,697 (2,322)(755)3,620 
Retail Banking2,951 1,452 4,403 (1,004)(273)3,126 
Retail Direct849 986 1,835 (665)(297)873 
Manufacturing   (1,875) (1,875)
Wealth Management465 414 879 (432)(9)438 
RBS Insurance232 3,013 3,245 (2,777) 468 
Ulster Bank396 185 581 (276)(32)273 
Citizens1,310 514 1,824 (879)(88)857 
Central items(226)(9)(235)(354)(40)(629)












 
Profit before goodwill amortisation and integration costs8,301 10,928 19,229 (10,584)(1,494)7,151 
Goodwill amortisation   (763) (763)
Integration costs   (229) (229)












 
Profit on ordinary activities before tax8,301 10,928 19,229 (11,576)(1,494)6,159 
 










 
             
2002            












 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets2,349 3,703 6,052 (2,066)(725)3,261 
Retail Banking2,840 1,353 4,193 (961)(213)3,019 
Retail Direct749 841 1,590 (608)(281)701 
Manufacturing   (1,762) (1,762)
Wealth Management460 447 907 (464)11 454 
RBS Insurance158 1,981 2,139 (1,784) 355 
Ulster Bank339 181 520 (254)(22)244 
Citizens1,248 468 1,716 (855)(95)766 
Central items(294)(8)(302)(265)(20)(587)












 
Profit before goodwill amortisation and integration costs7,849 8,966 16,815 (9,019)(1,345)6,451 
Goodwill amortisation   (731) (731)
Integration costs   (957) (957)












 
Profit on ordinary activities before tax7,849 8,966 16,815 (10,707)(1,345)4,763 
 










 
             
2001            












 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets2,138 3,319 5,457 (1,875)(502)3,080 
Retail Banking2,622 1,277 3,899 (928)(164)2,807 
Retail Direct674 696 1,370 (564)(255)551 
Manufacturing   (1,646) (1,646)
Wealth Management464 469 933 (457)5 481 
RBS Insurance129 1,414 1,543 (1,282) 261 
Ulster Bank313 170 483 (239)(15)229 
Citizens814 306 1,120 (550)(69)501 
Central items(308)61 (247)(248)9 (486)












 
Profit before goodwill amortisation and integration costs6,846 7,712 14,558 (7,789)(991)5,778 
Goodwill amortisation   (651) (651)
Integration costs   (875) (875)












 
Profit on ordinary activities before tax6,846 7,712 14,558 (9,315)(991)4,252 
 










 

* Comprises provisions for bad and doubtful debts and amounts written off fixed asset investments.

133



Notes on the accounts continued

49 Segmental analysis (continued)

 Total assets Total assets 
 
 
 
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Corporate Banking and Financial Markets268,523 245,225 11,728 10,434 
Retail Banking67,340 66,501 3,745 3,418 
Retail Direct21,905 19,440 1,236 1,072 
Manufacturing4,259 3,929 194 193 
Wealth Management15,231 13,441 671 615 
RBS Insurance10,124 4,410 1,373 912 
Ulster Bank15,560 12,713 1,078 976 
Citizens42,976 37,858 4,417 3,510 
Central items9,357 8,483 3,657 5,922 








 
 455,275 412,000 28,099 27,052 
 
 

Segmental analysis of goodwill is as follows:

 CBFM
£m
 Retail
Direct
£m
 Wealth
Management
£m
 RBS
Insurance
£m
 Citizens
£m
 Centre
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Cost:              
At 1 January 2003130 60 8 221 2,547 11,629 14,595 
Currency translation and other adjustments  1  (284) (283)
Arising on acquisitions during the year61 54 144 792 405  1,456 
Disposals   (2) (8)(10)














 
At 31 December 2003191 114 153 1,011 2,668 11,621 15,758 














 
               
Amortisation:              
At 1 January 20034 2  41 226 1,625 1,898 
Currency translation and other adjustments    (34) (34)
Charge for the year10 4 1 28 139 581 763 














 
At 31 December 200314 6 1 69 331 2,206 2,627 














 
               
Net book value:              
At 31 December 2003177 108 152 942 2,337 9,415 13,131 
 












 
               
At 31 December 2002126 58 8 180 2,321 10,004 12,697 
 












 

(b) Geographical segments
The geographical analyses in the tables below have been compiled on the basis of location of office where the transactions are recorded.

2003UK
£m
 USA
£m
 Europe
£m
 Rest of
the World
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Interest receivable10,780 2,142 942 134 13,998 
Dividend income33 7 18  58 
Fees and commissions receivable4,725 622 323 85 5,755 
Dealing profits1,004 717 39 33 1,793 
Other operating income1,384 82 132  1,598 
General insurance premium income (net of reinsurance)2,919  142  3,061 










 
Gross income20,845 3,570 1,596 252 26,263 
 








 
           
Profit on ordinary activities before tax4,529 1,157 327 146 6,159 
 








 
           
Total assets315,426 102,448 27,411 9,990 455,275 
 








 
           
Net assets20,595 5,389 2,110 5 28,099 
 








 

134





2002UK
£m
 USA
£m
 Europe
£m
 Rest of
the World
£m
 Total
£m
 

 
Interest receivable10,372 2,240 837 112 13,561 
Dividend income32 10 16  58 
Fees and commissions receivable4,434 601 251 22 5,308 
Dealing profits736 649 42 35 1,462 
Other operating income1,156 28 33 (8)1,209 
General insurance premium income (net of reinsurance)1,815  79  1,894 










 
Gross income18,545 3,528 1,258 161 23,492 
 
 
           
Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before tax3,840 620 337 (34)4,763 
 
 
           
Total assets280,390 102,582 25,354 3,674 412,000 
 
 
           
Net assets21,038 4,086 1,928  27,052 
 
 
           
2001          










 
Interest receivable11,360 1,816 973 272 14,421 
Dividend income28 9 17  54 
Fees and commissions receivable4,079 412 238 6 4,735 
Dealing profits816 532 45 33 1,426 
Other operating income1,039 6 14 (7)1,052 
General insurance premium income (net of reinsurance)1,364  11  1,375 










 
Gross income18,686 2,775 1,298 304 23,063 
 
 
           
Profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before tax3,270 628 426 (72)4,252 
 
 
           
Total assets243,382 99,082 19,226 7,169 368,859 
 
 
           
Net assets21,392 4,170 1,106  26,668 
 
 

50 Directors’ remuneration

 2003
£000
 2002
£000
 

 
Non-executive directors – emoluments759 716 
Chairman and executive directors – emoluments7,945 12,286 
Chairman and executive directors – contributions and allowances in respect of defined    
                                                                    contribution pension schemes164 153 




 
 8,868 13,155 
Chairman and executive directors – amounts receivable under long-term incentive plans6,056 546 
Chairman and executive directors – gains on exercise of share options2 16 




 
 14,926 13,717 
 
 

Retirement benefits are accruing to six directors (2002 – six) under defined benefit schemes, two (2002 – two) of whom also accrued benefits under defined contribution schemes.

The executive directors may also participate in the company’s executive share option, sharesave and option 2000 schemes and details of their interests in the company’s shares arising from their participation are contained on page 79. Details of the remuneration received by each director during the year and each directors’ pension arrangements are given on pages 78 to 81.

135



Notes on the accounts continued

51 Transactions with directors, officers and others

(a) At 31 December 2003, the amounts outstanding in relation to transactions, arrangements and agreements entered into by authorised institutions in the Group were £343,298 in respect of loans to eight persons who were directors of the company (or persons connected with them) at any time during the financial period and £31,783 to one person who was an officer of the company at any time during the financial period.
  
(b) There were no contracts of significance to the business of the company and its subsidiaries which subsisted at 31 December 2003, or during the year then ended, in which any director of the company had a material interest.

52 Related party transactions

Subsidiary undertakings
In accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 8 ‘Related Party Disclosures’(“FRS 8”), transactions or balances between Group entities that have been eliminated on consolidation are not reported.

Investments
Group members provide development and other types of capital support to businesses in their roles as providers of finance. These investments are made in the normal course of business and on arm’s-length terms depending on their nature. In some instances, the investment may extend to ownership or control over 20% or more of the voting rights of the investee company. However, these investments are not considered to give rise to transactions of a materiality requiring disclosure under FRS 8.

Pension Fund
The Group recharges The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund with the cost of administration services incurred by it. The amounts involved are not material to the Group.

Santander Central Hispano (“SCH”)
Details of the Group’s cross-holding with SCH are given on page 5. It is not a related party as defined in FRS 8.

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles
The consolidated financial statements of the Group are prepared in accordance with UK generally accepted accounting principles (“GAAP”) that differ in certain material respects from US GAAP. The significant differences are summarised as follows:

(a)

Acquisition accounting
Under UK GAAP, all integration costs relating to acquisitions are expensed as post-acquisition expenses. Under US GAAP, certain restructuring and exit costs incurred in the acquired business are treated as liabilities assumed on acquisition and taken into account in the calculation of goodwill.

Under UK GAAP, provisional fair value adjustments made in the accounting year in which the acquisition occurs may be amended in the subsequent accounting year. Under US GAAP, the allocation of the cost of acquisition to the fair values of assets and liabilities is generally completed within 12 months of the date of acquisition.

  
(b)

Goodwill
Under the Group’s UK GAAP accounting policy, goodwill arising on acquisitions after 1 October 1998 is recognised as an asset and amortised on a straight-line basis over its estimated useful economic life. Impairment tests on goodwill are carried out at the end of the first full accounting period after its acquisition, and whenever there are indications of impairment. Goodwill arising on acquisitions before 1 October 1998 was deducted from reserves immediately. Under US GAAP, goodwill is recognised as an asset, and is not amortised. Under the transition rules of SFAS 142 ‘Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets’, no amortisation is charged on acquisitions made after 30 June 2001; amortisation is charged up to 31 December 2001 for other goodwill. All goodwill is tested for impairment at least annually. Certain amounts included in goodwill under UK GAAP are classified as intangible assets under US GAAP and amortised over their useful economic life.

  
(c)

Property revaluation and depreciation
The Group’s freehold and leasehold properties are carried at original cost or subsequent valuation. The surplus or deficit on revaluation is included in the Group’s reserves. Under US GAAP, revaluations of property are not permitted to be reflected in the financial statements.

Depreciation charged and gains or losses on disposal under UK GAAP are based on the revalued amount of freehold and long leasehold properties; no depreciation is charged on investment properties which are revalued annually. Under US GAAP, the depreciation charge and gains or losses on disposal are based on the historical cost of all properties.

  
(d)

Leasehold property provisions
Under UK GAAP, provisions are raised on leasehold properties when there is a commitment to vacate the property. US GAAP requires provisions to be recognised at the time the property is vacated.

  
(e) Dividends
Under UK GAAP, dividends are recorded in the period to which they relate, whereas under US GAAP dividends are recorded in the period in which they are declared.
  
(f) Loan origination fees
Under UK GAAP, certain loan fees are recognised when received. Under US GAAP, all non-refundable loan fees and certain direct costs are deferred and recognised as an adjustment to the yield on the related loan or facility.
  
(g) Pension costs
Pension costs, based on actuarial assumptions and methods, are charged in the consolidated accounts so as to allocate the cost of providing benefits over the service lives of employees in a consistent manner approved by the

136



  actuary. US GAAP prescribes the method of actuarial valuation and also requires assets to be assessed at fair value and the assessment of liabilities to be based on current interest rates. Additionally, under US GAAP a minimum additional liability must be recognised if the accumulated benefit obligation exceeds the fair value of plan assets and the Group has recorded a prepaid pension cost or has an accrued liability that is less than the unfunded accumulated benefit. This minimum additional liability represents the underfunding of the scheme on an accumulated benefit obligation basis, together with an amount equal to the pension prepayment. Movements in the minimum additional liability, together with the related deferred tax, are recognised through other comprehensive income as a deduction from equity.
  
(h) Long-term assurance business
The shareholders’ interest in the long-term assurance fund is valued as the discounted value of the cash flows expected to be generated from in-force policies together with net assets in excess of the statutory liabilities. Under US GAAP, for traditional business, premiums are recognised as revenue when due from the policyholders. Costs of claims are recognised when insured events occur. A liability for future policy benefits is established based upon the present value of future benefits less the present value of future net premiums. Acquisition costs for traditional business contracts are charged to the profit and loss account in proportion to premium revenue recognised. For unit-linked business, premiums and front-end load-type charges receivable from customers and acquisition costs relating to the acquisition of new contracts are capitalised and depreciated in proportion to the present value of estimated gross profits. Costs of claims are recognised when insured events occur.
  
(i) Extinguishment of liabilities
Under UK GAAP, recognition of a financial liability ceases once any transfer of economic benefits to the creditor is no longer likely. Under US GAAP, a financial liability is derecognised only when the creditor is paid or the debtor is legally released from being the primary obligator under the liability, either judicially or by the creditor.
  
(j) Leasing
In accordance with UK GAAP, the Group’s accounting policy for finance lease income receivable is to allocate total gross earnings to accounting periods so as to give a constant periodic rate of return on the net cash investment, and certain operating lease assets are depreciated on a reverse-annuity basis. Under US GAAP, finance lease income is recognised so as to give a level rate of return on the investment in the lease but without taking into account the associated tax flows, and all operating lease assets are depreciated on a straight-line basis.
  
(k) Securities
Under UK GAAP, the Group’s debt securities and equity shares are classified as being held as investment securities or for dealing purposes. Investment securities are stated at cost less provision for any permanent diminution in value. Premiums and discounts on dated debt securities are amortised to interest income over the period to maturity. Securities held for dealing purposes are carried at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the profit and loss account. Under US GAAP, securities held by the Group’s private equity business are considered to be held by investment companies and are carried at fair value, with changes in fair value being reflected in net income. The Group’s other investment debt securities and marketable investment equity shares are classified as available-for-sale securities with unrealised gains and losses reported in a separate component of equity.
  
(l)

Derivatives and hedging activities
SFAS 133 ‘Accounting for Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities’ was effective for the Group’s US GAAP information from 1 January 2001. The Group has not made changes in its use of non-trading derivatives to meet the hedge criteria of SFAS 133. As a result, from 1 January 2001, for US GAAP purposes, the Group’s portfolio of non-trading derivatives has been remeasured to fair value and changes in fair value reflected in net income. Under UK GAAP, these derivatives continue to be classified as non-trading and accounted for in accordance with the underlying transaction or transactions being hedged. SFAS 133 does not permit a non-derivative financial instrument to be designated as the hedging instrument in a fair value hedge of the foreign exchange exposure of available-for-sale securities. The Group’s UK and US GAAP reconciliations also reflect transition adjustments on initial application of SFAS 133. These adjustments were: a cumulative-effect-type adjustment increasing net income by £45 million (£65 million less tax of £20 million); and a cumulative-effect-type adjustment decreasing other comprehensive income by £51 million (£73 million less tax of £22 million). SFAS 133 also requires derivatives embedded in other financial instruments to be accounted for on a stand-alone basis if they have economic characteristics and risks that differ from those of the host instrument.

US GAAP does not permit a profit or loss to be recognised on transacting a derivative unless its valuation is based on observable market data. There is no similar requirement under UK GAAP. Inception profits and losses reflecting the application of the Group’s usual pricing methodologies are recognised as they arise.

  
(m) Software development costs
Under UK GAAP, most software development costs are written off as incurred. Under US GAAP, certain costs relating to software developed for own use that are incurred after 1 January 1999 are capitalised and depreciated over the estimated useful life of the software.
  
(n) Stock-based compensation
Under UK GAAP, no compensation expense is recognised for the Group’s executive share option schemes, under which options are granted at the higher of nominal value and market value on the date of grant and for the Group’s

137



Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

 Sharesave schemes, under which employees are granted options at a 20% discount to market value at date of grant. Under US GAAP, the compensation is based on the estimated fair value which is charged to the profit and loss account over the period to their average vesting date.
  
(o) Variable interest entities
UK GAAP requires consolidation of entities controlled by an enterprise where control means the enterprise’s ability to direct the financial and operating policies of an entity with a view to gaining economic benefits. US GAAP requires consolidation by the primary beneficiary of a variable interest entity (“VIE”). An enterprise is the primary beneficiary of a VIE if it will absorb a majority of the entity’s expected losses, receive a majority of the entity’s expected residual returns, or both.
  
(p) Perpetual regulatory securities
Under UK GAAP, the Group’s perpetual regulatory securities are classified as liabilities. Under US GAAP, they are classified as equity instruments.
  
(q) Acceptances
Acceptances outstanding and the matching customers’ liabilities are not reflected in the consolidated balance sheet, but are disclosed as memorandum items. Under US GAAP, acceptances outstanding and the matching customers’ liabilities are reflected in the consolidated balance sheet.
  
(r) Offset of repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements Under UK GAAP, debit and credit balances with the same counterparty are aggregated into a single item where there is a right to insist on net settlement and the debit balance matures no later than the credit balance. Under US GAAP, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements with the same counterparty may be offset only where they have the same settlement date specified at inception.
  
(s) Deferred taxation
Accounting for deferred tax under UK GAAP is consistent with US GAAP except that deferred tax is not recognised under UK GAAP on certain timing differences resulting from the roll-over of gains on disposal of properties, but is provided under US GAAP on such differences.

Recent developments in US GAAP
In April 2003, the Financial Accounting Standards Board (“FASB”) issued Statement of Financial Accounting Standards (“SFAS”) 149 ‘Amendment of Statement 133 on Derivative Instruments and Hedging Activities’. It amends and clarifies accounting for derivative instruments, including certain derivative instruments embedded in other contracts, and hedging activities under SFAS 133. The statement is effectivefor contracts entered into or modified after 30 June 2003, and for hedging relationships designated after 30 June 2003. Implementation of SFAS 149 has had no effect on the Group’s US financial information.

The FASB issued SFAS 150 ‘Accounting for Certain Financial Instruments with Characteristics of both Liabilities and Equity’ in May 2003. This statement addresses classification and measurement by an issuer of certain financial instruments with characteristics of both liabilities and equity. SFAS 150 also addresses the classification of certain financial instruments that embody obligations to issue equity shares. The statement is effective for financial instruments entered into or modified after 31 May 2003 and is otherwise effective on or after 15 June 2003. SFAS 150 has not affected the classification of any of the capital instruments issued by the Group.

The FASB issued SFAS 132 (revised) ‘Employers’ Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits – an amendment of FASB Statements No. 87, 88 and 106’ in December 2003. This statement retains the disclosures required by SFAS 132 and requires additional information on changes in pension and other post-retirement benefit obligations and fair value of assets. SFAS 132R is effective for the Group’s 2003 financial statements.

In December 2003, the FASB issued FASB Interpretation (“FIN”) No. 46 (revised) ‘Consolidation of Variable Interest Entities, an interpretation of ARB No. 51.’ FIN 46R clarifies some of the provisions of FIN 46, issued in January 2003, and exempts certain entities from its requirements. FIN 46R replaces FIN 46 but as FIN 46R contains deferral provisions, FIN 46 is extant until FIN 46R is applied. FIN 46 and FIN 46R address accounting for VIEs. Expected losses and expected residual returns of a VIE have been clarified in FIN 46R as the expected negative variability and positive variability, respectively, in the fair value of its net assets excluding variable interests and include expected variability resulting from the operating results of the entity.

The Group elected to adopt the provisions of FIN 46R as at 31 December 2003, except in relation to certain investments made by its private equity business which is involved with entities that may be deemed to be VIEs. The FASB has deferred non-registered investment companies (entities that invest for capital appreciation and income) from the application of FIN 46R until the scope of investment company accounting has been clarified by the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants.

The FASB continues to provide additional guidance on implementation of FIN 46. As further guidance is provided, the Group will continue to review the status of the VIEs with which it is involved.

138



Selected figures in accordance with US GAAP

The following tables summarise the significant adjustments to consolidated net income available for ordinary shareholders and shareholders’ equity which would result from the application of US GAAP instead of UK GAAP. Where applicable, the adjustments are stated gross of tax with the tax effect shown separately in total.

Consolidated statement of income2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders – UK GAAP2,315 1,971 1,868 
Adjustments in respect of:      
   Acquisition accounting33  (113)
   Amortisation of goodwill721 681 (48)
   Property revaluation and depreciation(41)(18)(12)
   Leasehold property provisions83   
   Loan origination(47)(72)(95)
   Pension costs(369)(58)242 
   Long-term assurance business(57)(37)(25)
   Extinguishment of liabilities(84)  
   Leasing(53)(71)(68)
   Securities49   
   Derivatives and hedging232 770 (125)
   Software development costs(300)283 442 
   Stock-based compensation(32)  
   Variable interest entities(60)  
   Tax effect on the above adjustments187 (261)(44)
   Deferred taxation(13)(80)40 






 
Net income available for ordinary shareholders – US GAAP2,564 3,108 2,062 
 
 
       
Consolidated shareholders’ equity2003
£m
 2002
£m
 

 
Shareholders’ funds – UK GAAP28,099 27,052 
Adjustments in respect of:    
   Acquisition accounting451 418 
   Goodwill2,222 1,541 
   Property revaluation and depreciation(249)(277)
   Leasehold property provisions83  
   Proposed dividend1,059 899 
   Loan origination(288)(241)
   Pension costs(27)342 
   Recognition of pension scheme minimum liability (3,568)
   Long-term assurance business(178)(121)
   Extinguishment of liabilities(84) 
   Leasing(218)(165)
   Securities232 284 
   Derivatives and hedging161 535 
   Software development costs660 960 
   Stock-based compensation(32) 
   Variable interest entities(60) 
   Perpetual regulatory tier one securities678 751 
   Tax effect on cumulative UK/US GAAP adjustments(274)(461)
   Tax effect on other comprehensive income155 1,013 
   Deferred tax(47)(34)




 
Shareholders’ equity – US GAAP32,343 28,928 
 
 

Total assets under US GAAP, adjusted to reflect the inclusion of acceptances, provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments, the fair value of financial guarantees and the grossing-up of certain repurchase agreements offset under UK GAAP, together with the effect of adjustments made to net income and shareholders’ funds, were £488 billion (2002 – £431 billion).

139



Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share (“EPS”) under US GAAP differs from UK GAAP only to the extent that the income calculated under US GAAP differs from that under UK GAAP.

 2003 2002 2001 
 
 
 
 
 Income*
 £m
 No. of
shares

million
 Per share
amount
pence
 Income*
£m
 No. of
shares
million
 Per share
amount
pence
 Income*
£m
 No. of
shares
million
 Per share
amount
pence
 


















 
Basic EPS2,564 2,931 87.5 3,108 2,881 107.9 2,062 2,762 74.7 
Dilutive effect of share options
     outstanding
 22 (0.7) 43 (1.6) 55 (1.5)


















 
Diluted EPS2,564 2,953 86.8 3,108 2,924 106.3 2,062 2,817 73.2 
 
 

* US GAAP net income available to ordinary shareholders, see page 139.

Convertible preference shares totalling £200 million (2002 – £200 million, 2001 – £800 million), 750 million (2002 and 2001 – 750 million) and $1,900 million (2002 and 2001 – $1,900 million) have not been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect is anti-dilutive. Interest payments on the $1,200 million (2002 and 2001 – $1,200 million) perpetual regulatory securities may be settled by the issue of ordinary shares at the option of the company and have not been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect is also anti-dilutive.

Outstanding options to purchase shares are excluded from the computation of diluted EPS where the exercise prices of the options are greater than the average market price of the ordinary shares during the relevant period. At 31 December 2003, there were 5.2 million such options outstanding (2002 –3.8 million; 2001 – 0.6 million).

Pensions
On 1 April 2002, the Group’s main pension schemes, The Royal Bank of Scotland Staff Pension Scheme and the National Westminster Bank Pension Fund, were merged to form The Royal Bank of Scotland Group Pension Fund (“the plan”). The provisions of SFAS 87 ‘Employers’ Accounting for Pensions’ have been applied to the plan, which covers most of the Group’s UK employees; the impact of US GAAP on the other Group schemes is considered to be immaterial.

A trust fund has been established under the plan, to which payments are made, determined on an actuarial basis, designed to build up reserves during the working life of full-time employees to pay such employees or dependants a pension after retirement. Such pensions are based on final pensionable salaries and are related to the length of service prior to retirement. Pensions are limited to a maximum oftwo-thirds of final salary for 40 years service or more. Staff do not make contributions for basic pensions but may make voluntary contributions on a regular basis to purchase additional service qualification where less than 40 years service will have been completed by normal retirement age.

The assets of the plan are held under separate trusts and, in the long-term, the funding policy is to maintain assets sufficient to cover the benefits in respect of service to date, with due allowance for future earnings increases. The plan assets consist mainly of fixed-income securities and listed securities. The investment policy followed for the plan seeks to deploy the plan assets primarily in UK and overseas equity shares and UK government securities.

Pension scheme disclosures required by SFAS 132R are set out below.

Obligations and funded status

Change in benefit obligation:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Projected benefit obligation at beginning of year12,526 12,198 10,573 
Service cost340 303 236 
Interest cost706 715 647 
Amendments  14 
Net actuarial loss/(gain)902 (217)1,257 
Benefits paid(511)(473)(529)






 
Projected benefit obligation at year end13,963 12,526 12,198 
 




 
       
Change in plan assets:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Fair value of plan assets at beginning of year10,682 12,567 13,846 
Actual return on plan assets1,559 (1,521)(833)
Employer contribution92 109 83 
Benefits and expenses paid(511)(473)(529)






 
Market value of plan assets at year end11,822 10,682 12,567 
 




 

140





Prepaid pension cost:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Funded status(2,141)(1,844)369 
Unrecognised net actuarial loss5,078 5,266 3,199 
Unrecognised prior service cost13 14 15 
Unrecognised transition amount(14)(22)(30)






 
Prepaid pension cost at year end2,936 3,414 3,553 
 




 
       
Components of net periodic pension cost:2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Service cost340 303 236 
Interest cost706 715 647 
Expected return on plan assets(757)(901)(956)
Amortisation of prior service cost1 1  
Amortisation of loss/(gain)287 138 (6)
Amortisation of net transition asset(8)(8)(8)






 
Net periodic pension cost/(credit)569 248 (87)
 




 

Assumptions

Weighted average assumptions used at 31 December:2003
% per annum
 2002
% per annum
 2001
% per annum
 

 
Discount rate for liabilities5.60 5.75 6.00 
Salary increases3.95 3.50 4.25 
Pension increases2.70 2.25 2.50 
Long-term rate of return on assets7.20 7.20 7.30 

 
  
Weighted-average allocations of market value of plan assets at
      31 December:
2003
%
 2002
%
 2001
%
 

 
Equity shares65 67 63 
Debt securities32 31 33 
Other3 2 4 






 
Total100 100 100 
 
 

At 31 December 2003 and 2001, the fund had a surplus of assets over its accumulated benefit obligation and no minimum liability was recognised. At 31 December 2002, the fund’s accumulated benefit obligation was underfunded by £168 million. This resulted in a reduction in the accumulated other comprehensive income component of US GAAP shareholders’ equity of £3,568 million, comprising the excess of the accumulated benefit obligation over the market value of assets of £168 million, prepaid pension cost of £3,414 million less unrecognised prior service cost of £14 million. This was reduced by deferred tax of £1,070 million.

Cash flows
The Group’s contribution to its main UK pension scheme in 2004 will be determined by the actuarial valuation to be completed as at 31 March 2004. The following pension payments under the main scheme, which reflect expected future service, as appropriate, are expected to be paid:

 £m 

 
2004445 
2005454 
2006462 
2007474 
2008489 
After 20082,802 

 

141



Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

Loan impairment
At 31 December 2003 and 2002, the Group estimated that the difference between the carrying value of its loan portfolio under US GAAP and its value in the Group’s UK GAAP financial statements was such that no adjustment to net income or consolidated shareholders’ equity was required. At 31 December 2003, the Group’s non-accrual loans, loans past due 90 days and troubled debt restructurings amounted to £5,157 million (2002 – £4,871 million). Specific provisions of £2,782 million (2002 – £2,435 million) were held against these loans. Average non-accrual loans, loans past due 90 days and troubled debt restructurings for the year to 31 December 2003 were £5,166 million (2002 – £4,762 million).

Gross interest income not recognised, but which would have been recognised under the original terms of non-accrual and restructured loans, amounted to £237 million for the yearended 31 December 2003 (2002 – £234 million; 2001 – £173 million) from domestic loans and £55 million for the year ended31 December 2003 (2002 – £73 million; 2001 – £60 million) from foreign loans. Interest on non-accrual and restructured loans included in net income was £60 million for the year ended 31 December 2003 (2002 – £47 million; 2001 – £42 million) from domestic loans and £3 million for the year ended 31 December 2003 (2001 – £7 million; 2000 – £14 million) from foreign loans.

Securities
During 2003, there were no gross gains or gross losses included in US GAAP net income from transfers of securities from the available-for-sale category into the trading category. For 2003, net unrealised losses of £652 million on available-for-sale securities were included in US GAAP other comprehensive income and £164 million was reclassified from accumulated other comprehensive income into US GAAP net income.

Cash flow statements
There are many similarities between SFAS 95, ‘Statement of Cash Flows’ as amended by SFAS 104 ‘Statement of Cash Flows – Net Reporting of Certain Cash Receipts and Cash Payments and Classification of Cash Flows from Hedging Transactions’, and FRS 1 ‘Cash Flow Statements’ (Revised). The principal differences are the classifications of certain transactions.

 Classification under FRS 1Classification under SFAS 95

Equity dividends paidEquity dividends paidFinancing activities
   
Dividends paid on non-equity sharesReturns on investments andFinancing activities
 servicing of finance 
   
Tax paidTaxationOperating activities
   
Purchase and sale of associated andAcquisitions and disposalsInvesting activities
subsidiary undertakings  
   
Purchase and sale of investment securitiesCapital expenditure andInvesting activities
and fixed assetsfinancial investment 
   
Net change in loans and advances,Operating activitiesInvesting activities
including finance lease receivables  
   
Net change in depositsOperating activitiesFinancing activities
   
Net change in debt securities in issueOperating activitiesFinancing activities
   
Short-term funding notOperating activitiesFinancing activities
included in cash  

142



Summary consolidated statements of cash flows presented on a US GAAP basis for each of the three years ended 31 December 2003 are set out below:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Cash flows from operating activities8,534 11,008 1,413 
Cash flows from investing activities(31,879)(44,892)(34,813)
Cash flows from financing activities34,872 37,245 29,761 
Effect of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents(863)(115)39 






 
Change in cash and cash equivalents10,664 3,246 (3,600)
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year10,273 7,027 10,627 






 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of the year20,937 10,273 7,027 
 
 

The composition of cash at 31 December 2003, 2002 and 2001 and the movement in cash for the years then ended are shown in Note 47 and Note 48 on the accounts respectively.

Stock-based compensation costs
The Group grants share options to executive officers under an executive share option scheme (the “executive scheme”) and to employees under a savings-related sharesave scheme (the “savings scheme”) and the option 2000 scheme.

Executive scheme
Under the terms of the executive scheme, senior management employees and executive directors of Group companies may participate in the executive scheme at the discretion of the Board of directors of the company. The executive scheme involves a participant being granted an option to subscribe for ordinary shares of the company at the higher of nominal value and market value of ordinary shares on the date of grant. Normally, options may be granted only within six weeks after the announcement of final or interim results of the Group for any particular year. Options may not be transferred or assigned. A participant may not be granted options over new shares to the extent that the aggregate subscription price would exceed four times his compensation. Options granted under the executive scheme are issued on a UK Inland Revenue approved or unapproved basis. Options are exercisable between the third and tenth anniversaries of the grant date, only if performance criteria are met. For options granted from 1996 to 1998, the criterion is the average growth in adjusted earnings per ordinary share to exceed the average increase in the UK Retail Prices Index by 2% per annum over a three year period. For options granted since 1999, the relevant percentage has been increased to 3% per annum.

Savings scheme
Under the Inland Revenue rules, a participant in a savings scheme is permitted to make a maximum monthly saving of £250 under approved savings schemes. Employees of Group companies in the UK and Ireland and certain offshore jurisdictions are offered participation in the savings scheme. Participants can make monthly savings for a period of three, five or seven years. Options may be granted at not less than 80% of the average market value of ordinary shares of the company by reference to dealings in the ordinary shares over the last three trading days of the week immediately preceding the date of an invitation to participate, or, if higher, at par. Options comprise, as nearly as possible, such number of ordinary shares as may be purchased at the option price with the proceeds on maturity after either three, five or seven years of the savings contract, and options may normally be exercised only within six months after the third, fifth or seventh anniversary of the savings contract. Options may not be transferred or assigned.

Option 2000 scheme
On 9 August 2000 and again on 4 April 2001, every qualifying permanent member of staff in the Group received an option over 150 shares in the company. The executive directors of the company waived their entitlement to the option granted on 4 April 2001. On 21 March 2002, options over 150 shares were granted to all employees of Mellon who transferred to Citizens Financial Group, and 1 September 2003 further options over 150 shares were granted to all employees of Churchill Insurance Group, as a result of the acquisition by the Group.

Under the scheme, options are granted at the market value of ordinary shares at the date of grant and may normally be exercised only between the third and sixth anniversary of the date of grant.

Limitations of the option schemes:

(i) During a ten year period, no more than 10% in aggregate of the issued ordinary share capital of the company from time to time may be issued pursuant to all of the employee share schemes operated by the company.
  
(ii) During a five year period, no more than 5% in aggregate of the issued ordinary share capital of the company from time to time may be issued pursuant to all of the employee share schemes operated by the company.
  
(iii) During a ten year period, no more than 5% in aggregate of the issued ordinary share capital of the company from time to time may be issued pursuant to the executive scheme.
  
(iv) During a four year period, no more than 2½% in aggregate of the issued ordinary share capital of the company from time to time may be issued pursuant to the executive scheme.
  
(v) During a three year period, no more than 3% in aggregate of the issued ordinary share capital of the company from time to time may be issued pursuant to the executive scheme.

143


Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

The following is a summary of outstanding options under the various schemes:

 Savings scheme Executive scheme Option 2000 scheme Total 
 
 
 
 
 
 Number
 of
 options
 000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 Number
of
options
000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 Number
of

options
000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 Number
of
options
000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 

 
At 1 January 200158,841 666 15,797 768 14,876 1240 89,514 779 
Granted9,581 1364 1,941 1714 13,412 1563 24,934 1498 
Exercised(13,465)427 (5,217)599 (1)1240 (18,683)475 
Forfeited(3,353)1112 (488)715 (1,703)1302 (5,544)1135 

 
At 31 December 200151,604 829 12,033 996 26,584 1399 90,221 1019 
Granted12,419 1235 2,096 1810 620 1841 15,135 1339 
Exercised(12,112)493 (3,160)729 (5)1380 (15,277)542 
Forfeited(2,271)1025 (145)940 (1,313)1419 (3,729)1160 

 
At 31 December 200249,640 1003 10,824 1232 25,886 1409 86,350 1153 
Granted9,100 1307 4,073 1347 1,363 1590 14,536 1345 
Exercised(11,902)747 (1,299)798 (6,380)1240 (19,581)911 
Forfeited(2,715)1117 (76)1251 (1,603)1459 (4,394)1244 
















 
At 31 December 200344,123 1128 13,522 1308 19,266 1474 76,911 1246 
















 

In 2003, awards totalling 341,269 options (2002 – 59,869; 2001 – 91,742) with negligible exercise prices and 59,525 shares (2002 and 2001 – nil) were made under the Group’s medium-term performance plan. Under the plan, the amount of shares or options that vest ranges from nil to 200% of the award depending on the annual growth in the Group’s earnings per share and its performance relative to that of a comparator group of companies principally from the UK financial services sector.

The following table shows options outstanding by normal exercise date. An option life of 5 years, being the midpoint on the 10 year option, has been assumed for options granted under Group and former NatWest executive plans.

 2003 2002 2001 
 
 
 
 
Year exercisableNumber of
options
000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 Number of
options

000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 Number of
options
000’s
 Weighted
average
exercise price
pence
 

 
2002    14,500 475 
2003  27,769 963 28,238 987 
200431,817 1188 25,553 1226 28,498 1215 
200514,081 1112 15,473 1118 10,320 1012 
200611,822 1421 6,924 1447 7,237 1443 
20078,785 1351 9,265 1343 874 985 
20089,110 1328 494 1364 554 1364 
2009809 1235 872 1235   
2010487 1307     












 
Total76,911 1246 86,350 1153 90,221 1019 

 

144



If the compensation cost for the schemes had been determined based on the fair value at the grant dates consistent with the fair value method of SFAS 123, net income and earnings per share as adjusted to include stock compensation would have been as shown below:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Net income under US GAAP:      
As reported2,564 3,108 2,062 
Adjusted to include stock compensation2,503 2,978 1,942 






 
       
Basic earnings per share under US GAAP:      
As reported87.5p107.9p74.7p
Adjusted to include stock compensation85.4p103.4p70.3p






 
       
Diluted earnings per share under US GAAP:      
As reported86.8p106.3p73.2p
Adjusted to include stock compensation84.8p101.8p68.9p






 

The fair value of each option has been estimated as at the grant date using a Black-Scholes option pricing model using the following assumptions:

 2003 2002 2001 

 
Risk free interest rate3.6%– 4.6% 4.7%–4.9% 5.0% 
Volatility based on historical data29% 43% 42% 
Dividend yield2.9%–4.1% 2.4%–2.9% 1.9%–2.2% 
Expected lives of options granted under:      
Employee savings scheme3, 5 and 7 years 3, 5 and 7 years 3, 5 and 7 years 
Executive scheme3 to 10 years 3 to 10 years 3 to 10 years 
Option 2000 scheme3 years 3 years 3 years 

 

The following table summarises fair values of options issued in each year:

 2003 2002 2001 
 
 
 
 
 Exercise price
 £
 Fair value
£
 Life
Years
 Exercise price
 £
 Fair value
£
 Life
Years
 Exercise price
 £
 Fair value
£
 Life
Years
 

 
Executive scheme (1)13.48 2.91 3 -10 18.10 6.54 3 -10   17.14 6.40 3 -10 
Savings scheme                  
   3 year13.07 4.64 3 12.35 5.58 3 13.64 6.47 3 
   5 year13.07 5.15 5 12.35 6.33 5 13.64 7.48 5 
   7 year13.07 5.48 7 12.35 6.76 7 13.64 8.15 7 
Option 2000 scheme15.90 2.91 3 18.41 5.44 3 15.63 4.63 3 

 
Note:  
(1) For the purposes of calculating a fair value on executive scheme options, an option life of 5 years, being the mid-point on the 10 year option, has been assumed. Historical exercise trends have not been used as these are not felt to be indicative of future trends given changes to the scheme rules and participants in the scheme.

145



Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

Goodwill
The Group has fully implemented SFAS 142 ‘Goodwill and Other Intangible Assets’, with effect from 1 January 2002. Under this standard, goodwill and intangible assets deemed to have indefinite lives are not amortised and are subject to annual impairment tests. Other intangible assets continue to be amortised over their useful lives. The Group has completed the impairment tests required under SFAS 142 and no impairment has been recognised as a result.

The table below sets out reported net income reconciled to net income adjusted to comply with SFAS 142.

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 

 
Net income under US GAAP2,564 3,108 2,062 
Goodwill amortisation  657 






 
Adjusted net income2,564 3,108 2,719 
 




 
       
Basic earnings per share under US GAAP87.5p107.9p74.7p
Goodwill amortisation  23.7p






 
Adjusted basic earnings per share87.5p107.9p98.4p
 




 
       
Diluted earnings per share under US GAAP86.8p106.3p73.2p
Goodwill amortisation  23.3p






 
Adjusted diluted earnings per share86.8p106.3p96.5p
 
 

Intangible assets other than goodwill

A summary of the carrying value of intangible assets other than goodwill is as follows:

 2003 2002 2001 
 
 
 
 
  Gross
carrying
amount
 £m
 Accumulated
amortisation
£m
 Net
carrying
amount
£m
  Gross
carrying
amount
 £m
 Accumulated
amortisation
£m
 Net
carrying
amount
£m
  Gross
carrying
amount
 £m
 Accumulated
amortisation
£m
 Net
carrying
amount
£m
 

 
Core deposit
     intangibles
459
 (149)
310
 461 (108)353 487 (66)421 
Brands
338
  
338
       
Customer relationships
128
 (6)
122
       


















 
Total amortising
     intangible assets
925
 (155)
770
 461 (108)353 487 (66)421 
 
 

The weighted average amortisation period of intangible assets other than goodwill are:

 Years 


 
Core deposit intangibles7 
Brands 
Customer relationships9 


 

Amortisation charge on intangibles during 2003 was £62 million (2002 – £50 million; 2001 – £699 million). The Group estimates amortisation expense for the next five years will be :

 £m 


 
200473 
200573 
200673 
200773 
200871 


 

Securitisations
The Group engages in securitisation activities pertaining to certain of its assets including US commercial and residential mortgage loans, commercial and residential mortgage related securities, US Government agency collateralised mortgage obligations, and other types of financial assets. Additionally, the Group acts as an underwriter and depositor in securitisation transactions involving both client and proprietary transactions. The Group has classified these activities into three broad securitisation categories, US Agency based, consumer based, and commercial based securitisations.

During 2003, the Group received proceeds of approximately £37.5 billion (2002 – £26.2 billion) from securitisation trusts in connection with new securitisations.

The Group recognised net pre-tax gains of approximately £58.8 million (2002 – £83.0 million) relating to these securitisations. Net pre-tax gains are based on the difference between the sales prices and previous carrying values of assets prior to date of sale, are net of transaction specific expenses, and exclude any results attributable to hedging activities, interest income, funding costs, changes in asset values prior to securitisation date, and retained interest values subsequent to securitisation date.

146



In some instances, the Group retained certain interests. The Group typically does not retain a significant portion of the loans or securities that it securitises. This reduces the impact that changes to fair values of retained interests might have on the Group’s financial results.

The Group’s retained interests may be subordinated to other investors’ interests. The investors and securitisation trusts have no recourse to the Group’s other assets for failure of debtors to perform on the securitised loans. The value of the retained interests varies and is subject to prepayment, credit and interest rate risks on the transferred assets.

At 31 December 2003, the fair value of the Group’s retained interests was approximately £1.5 billion (2002 – £1.7 billion). Cash flows received in 2003 from retained interests held at 31 December 2003 in connection with securitisations that took place in current and prior years amounted to approximately £368 million (2002 – £157 million).

These retained interests comprises approximately £907 million in US Agency based retained interests, £540 million in consumer based retained interests and £47 million in commercial based retained interests. These retained interests primarily relate to mortgage loans and securities and arose from securitisations that have taken place in current and prior years.

Key economic assumptions used in measuring the value of retained interests at the date of securitisation resulting from securitisations completed during the year were as follows:

AssumptionsU.S. Agency
retained
interests
 Consumer
retained
interests
 Commercial 
retained
interests
 

 
Prepayment speed143-651 PSA 4-40% CPR(1) 0% CPY(2) 
Weighted average life1-18 years 1-16 years 1-10 years 
Cash flow discount rate2-53% 1-53% 3-6% 
Credit lossesN/A(3) 0-6% CDR(4) N/A(5) 

 

Key economic assumptions and the sensitivity of the current fair value of retained interests at 31 December 2003 to immediate adverse changes, as indicated below, in those assumptions are as follows:

Assumptions/impact on fair valueU.S. Agency
retained
interests
 Consumer
retained
interests
 Commercial 
retained
interests
 

 
Fair value of retained interests at 31 December 2003£907m£540m£47m
Prepayment speed (6)2-50% CPR (1)4-66% CPR(1)0-50% CPY(2)
   Impact on fair value of 10% adverse change£1.4m£11.8m 
   Impact on fair value of 20% adverse change£2.8m£22.9m 
       
Weighted average life1-18 years 1-16 years 1-10 years 
       
Cash flow discount rate3-43%1-56%3-11%
   Impact on fair value of 10% adverse change£25.6m£11.8m£1.3m
   Impact on fair value of 20% adverse change£51.4m£23.2m£2.5m
       
Credit lossesN/A(3)0-3% CDR(4)0-1% CDR(4)
   Impact on fair value of 10% adverse changeN/A £8.7m£0.1m
   Impact on fair value of 20% adverse changeN/A £19.0m£0.2m

 
Notes: 
(1) Constant prepayment rate – The CPR range represents the low and high points of a dynamic CPR curve
(2) CPR with yield maintenance provision
(3) Population consists of securities whose collateral is guaranteed by US Government Sponsored Entities and therefore, no credit loss has been assumed.
(4) Constant default rate
(5) Population consists of only investment grade senior tranches; therefore, no credit losses are included in the assumptions at deal settlement.
(6) Prepayment speed has been stressed on an overall portfolio basis for US Agency retained interests due to the overall homogeneous nature of the collateral. Consumer and Commercial retained interests have been stressed on a security level basis.

The sensitivities depicted in the preceding table are hypothetical and should be used with caution. The likelihood of those percent variations selected for sensitivity testing is not necessarily indicative of expected market movements because the relationship of the change in the assumptions to the change in fair value may not be linear. Also, the effect of a variation in a particular assumption on the fair value of a retained interest is calculated without changing any other assumptions. This might not be the case in actual market conditions since changes in one factor might result in changes to other factors. Further, the sensitivities depicted above do not consider any corrective actions that the Group might take to mitigate the effect of any adverse changes in one or more key assumptions.

147



Notes on the accounts continued

53 Significant differences between UK and US generally accepted accounting principles (continued)

Variable interest entities
Special purpose entities (“SPEs”)
The Group has elected to apply the provisions of FIN 46R in its 2003 accounts. The Group reviewed its SPEs in light of FIN 46R and has concluded that it is the primary beneficiary of a number of commercial paper conduits and other asset securitisation vehicles that meet FIN 46R’s definition of a variable interest entity. These entities, with total assets of £6.9 billion at 31 December 2003, acquire financial assets from third parties or from the Group funded by the issue of commercial paper or other debt instruments. The Group supplies certain administrative services and provides credit enhancement, liquidity facilities and derivative transactions to some or all of these entities on an arm’s length basis. In the case of commercial paper conduits, the Group provides programme-wide credit enhancement by letters of credit or loan facilities across all tranches of assets funded by conduits.

Trust preferred securities
The trust preferred securities referred to in Note 32 (3) and (4) on page 117, represent undivided beneficial interests in the assets of trusts, which consist of partnership preferred securities representing non-cumulative perpetual preferred limited partnership interests issued by Delaware limited partnerships. The Group has provided subordinated guarantees for the benefit of the holders of the trust preferred securities and the partnership preferred securities. Under the terms of the guarantees, the Group has fully and unconditionally guaranteed on a subordinated basis, payments on such trust preferred securities and partnership preferred securities, to the extent they are due to be paid and have not been paid by, or on behalf of the trusts and the partnerships, as the case may be:

  • any due and payable distributions on the trust preferred securities or partnership preferred securities

  • the redemption price required to be paid for each trust preferred security or partnership preferred security called for redemption; and

  • upon a dissolution, winding up or liquidation of the trust or partnership, any amounts due in respect of the trust preferred securities or partnership preferred securities, through to the date of payment.

The application of FIN 46 (and FIN 46R) has resulted in the deconsolidation of trust preferred securities and partnership preferred securities issued by the Group’s subsidiaries. The deconsolidation of these securities has resulted in a balance sheet reclassification from minority interests to subordinated liabilities. The effect on US GAAP net income and equity is negligible.

54 Post balance sheet events
There have been no significant events between the year end and the date of approval of these accounts which would require a change to our disclosures in the accounts.

148



Additional information

Contents  
   
Five year financial summary150 
   
Analysis of loans and advances  
to customers154 
   
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts155 
   
Risk elements in lending and  
potential problem loans158 
   
Analysis of deposits – product analysis159 
   
Short term borrowings160 
   
Certificates of deposit and  
other time deposits160 
   
Exchange rates161 
   
Off balance sheet arrangements162 
   
Economic and monetary environment164 
   
Supervision and regulation164 
   
Description of property and equipment167 
   
Major shareholders168 
   
Material contracts168 

149




Additional information

Five year financial summary
In 2000, the Group changed its financial year end from 30 September to 31 December. As a result, the financial information set out below is presented for each of the four years ended 31 December 2003, the three months ended 31 December 1999 and the year ended 30 September 1999.

The Group’s accounts are prepared in accordance with UK GAAP, which differs in certain material respects from US GAAP.

For a discussion of such differences and a reconciliation between UK GAAP and US GAAP, see Note 53 on the accounts. The dollar financial information included below has been translated for convenience at the rate of £1.00 to US$1.7842, the Noon Buying Rate on 31 December 2003.

Summary consolidated profit and loss account

 Year ended 31 December 3 months ended
31 December
1999
£m
 Year ended
30 September
1999
£m
 
 
 2003
$m
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
 














Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP:             
Net interest income14,810 8,301 7,849 6,846 5,286 501 1,748 
Non-interest income19,498 10,928 8,966 7,712 5,709 612 2,354 














Total income34,308 19,229 16,815 14,558 10,995 1,113 4,102 
Operating expenses16,738 9,381 9,357 8,367 6,760 546 2,022 
General insurance claims (net)3,916 2,195 1,350 948 673 185 590 














Profit before provisions13,654 7,653 6,108 5,243 3,562 382 1,490 
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts2,606 1,461 1,286 984 550 79 266 
Amounts written off fixed asset investments59 33 59 7 42  13 














Operating profit10,989 6,159 4,763 4,252 2,970 303 1,211 
Exceptional items (1)     100 — 














Profit on ordinary activities before tax10,989 6,159 4,763 4,252 2,970 403 1,211 
Tax on profit on ordinary activities3,408 1,910 1,556 1,537 1,054 123 364 














Profit on ordinary activities after tax7,581 4,249 3,207 2,715 1,916 280 847 
Minority interests (including non-equity)375 210 133 90 50 (3
)
(6)
Preference dividends – non-equity466 261 305 358 294 28 80 














 6,740 3,778 2,769 2,267 1,572 255 773 
Additional Value Shares dividend – non-equity2,610 1,463 798 399  —  














Profit attributable to ordinary shareholders4,130 2,315 1,971 1,868 1,572 255 773 
 












              
Amounts in accordance with US GAAP:             
Net income available for ordinary shareholders4,575 2,564 3,108 2,062 2,102 239 678 














Notes:

(1)In the three months ended 31 December 1999, an exceptional gain of £100 million (tax charge £31 million) was realised from the sale of the investor services business.

150



Preference and other non-equity dividends

 Year ended 31 December     
 
 3 months ended
31 December
1999
£
 Year ended 30 September
1999
£
 
Amount per share  2003
$
 2003
£
 2002
£
 2001
£
 2000
£
   















 
Non-cumulative preference shares of US$0.01               
   – Series B (1) 0.21 0.13 1.65 1.73 1.67 0.39 1.45 
   – Series C (1) 0.18 0.11 1.40 1.47 1.41 0.33 1.23 
   – Series D 2.05 1.23 1.34 1.41 1.35 0.32 1.18 
   – Series E 2.03 1.21 1.32 1.40 1.33 0.31 1.16 
   – Series F 1.91 1.15 1.25 1.31 1.26 0.30 1.10 
   – Series G 1.85 1.11 1.21 1.27 1.22 0.29 1.12 
   – Series H 1.81 1.09 1.18 1.24 1.19 0.28 0.71 
   – Series I 2.00 1.20 1.31 1.38 1.32 0.31 0.20 
   – Series J 2.13 1.27 1.39 1.46 1.40 0.33  
   – Series K 1.97 1.18 1.29 0.74    
Non-cumulative convertible               
   preference shares of US$0.01               
   – Series 1 91.18 54.89 59.15 62.70 50.22   
   – Series 2 88.17 53.08 57.20 60.63 48.57   
   – Series 3 78.16 45.57 49.81 53.74 5.24   
Non-cumulative convertible               
   preference shares of 0.01               
   – Series 1 88.45 49.58 44.45 41.34 34.55   
Non-cumulative convertible               
   preference shares of £0.01               
   – Series 1 131.80 73.87 73.87 73.87 3.28   
Non-cumulative convertible               
   preference shares of £0.25    0.08 0.07   
Additional Value Shares of £0.01 0.98 0.55 0.30 0.15    















 

Ordinary dividends

 Year ended 31 December    
 
 3 months ended
31 December
1999
pence
 Year ended
30 September
1999
pence
Amount per share2003
cents
 2003
pence
 2002
pence
 2001
pence
 2000
pence
  














Interim26.05 14.6 12.7 11.0 9.5  8.2
Proposed final63.70 35.7 31.0 27.0 23.5  20.3














Total dividends on equity shares89.75 50.3 43.7 38.0 33.0  28.5
 












Notes:

(1) Redeemed on 30 January 2003.

For further information, see Notes 6 and 7 on the accounts.

151



Additional information continued

Summary consolidated balance sheet

 
31 December
   
 
 30 September
1999

£m
 
 2003
$m
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
  












 
Amounts in accordance with UK GAAP:            
Loans and advances to banks (net of provisions)92,584 51,891 44,296 38,513 32,061 10,375 
Loans and advances to customers (net of provisions)450,566 252,531 223,324 190,492 168,076 49,340 
Debt securities and equity shares146,749 82,249 68,928 65,597 59,342 16,302 
Intangible fixed assets23,428 13,131 12,697 13,325 12,080 11 
Other assets98,975 55,473 62,755 60,932 48,510 12,892 












 
Total assets812,302 455,275 412,000 368,859 320,069 88,920 
 










 
             
Called up share capital1,372 769 754 893 848 224 
Share premium account14,586 8,175 7,608 7,465 6,530 2,130 
Other reserves20,174 11,307 11,922 12,354 12,835 164 
Profit and loss account14,002 7,848 6,768 5,956 2,786 1,587 












 
Shareholders’ funds50,134 28,099 27,052 26,668 22,999 4,105 
Minority interests4,841 2,713 1,839 585 546 146 
Subordinated liabilities30,328 16,998 13,965 12,530 10,436 3,032 












 
Total capital resources85,303 47,810 42,856 39,783 33,981 7,283 
Deposits by banks120,118 67,323 54,720 40,038 35,130 6,418 
Customer accounts422,789 236,963 219,161 198,995 177,302 55,180 
Debt securities in issue73,181 41,016 33,938 30,669 19,407 9,199 
Other liabilities110,911 62,163 61,325 59,374 54,249 10,840 












 
Total liabilities812,302 455,275 412,000 368,859 320,069 88,920 
 










 
             
Amounts in accordance with US GAAP:            
Shareholders’ equity57,706 32,343 28,928 29,923 25,423 5,099 
Total assets870,772 488,046 430,573 386,696 323,731 90,623 












 

152



Other financial data

 Year ended 31 December 3 months ended
31 December
1999
 Year ended
30 September
1999
 
 
 
 2003 2002 2001 2000













Other financial data based upon UK GAAP:            
Earnings per ordinary share – pence79.0 68.4 67.6 66.9 28.6 87.5 
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – pence (1)78.4 67.4 66.3 66.2 28.1 86.3 
Dividends per ordinary share – pence50.3 43.7 38.0 33.0  28.5 
Dividend payout ratio64.4%64.3%58.1%56.1% 32.9%
Share price per ordinary share at period end – £ (2)16.46 14.88 16.72 15.82 10.98 13.03 
Market capitalisation at period end – £bn48.8 43.2 47.8 42.4 9.8 11.6 
Net asset value per ordinary share – £8.50 8.12 7.79 7.08 3.35 3.09 
Return on average total assets (3)0.52%0.50%0.53%0.58%1.15%0.92%
Return on average equity shareholders’ funds (4)9.3%8.4%8.9%9.9%34.1%32.0%
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage            
   of average total assets6.3%6.9%7.2%7.2%4.8%4.1%
Risk asset ratio – Tier 17.4%7.3%7.1%6.9%7.7%8.1%
Risk asset ratio – Total11.8%11.7%11.5%11.5%11.2%12.1%

Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges and preference share dividends (6)

            
    – including interest on deposits
1.97 1.73 1.49 1.32 1.46 1.33 
    – excluding interest on deposits
7.16 5.12 4.45 3.49 4.77 3.99 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges only (5)

            
    – including interest on deposits2.05 1.82 1.55 1.37 1.52 1.37 
   – excluding interest on deposits
9.85 7.13 6.52 4.81 6.63 5.06 













Other financial data based upon US GAAP:            
Basic earnings per ordinary share – pence87.5 107.9 74.7 89.5 26.8 76.7 
Diluted earnings per ordinary share – pence (1)86.8 106.3 73.2 88.5 26.4 75.7 
Dividends per ordinary share – pence45.6 39.7 34.5 29.8  25.7 
Dividend payout ratio51.9%36.7%45.7%20.6% 33.5%
Return on average total assets (3)0.55%0.75%0.57%0.77%0.27%0.78%
Return on average equity shareholders’ funds (4)9.5%12.1%8.8%12.0%6.3%19.9%
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage            
   of average total assets6.5%7.3%7.7%7.7%5.7%5.2%

Ratio of earnings to combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and perpetual regulatory securities interest (5)

            
   – including interest on deposits1.98 1.97 1.51 1.41 1.45 1.31 
   – excluding interest on deposits7.24 6.49 4.63 4.19 4.65 3.73 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges only (5)            
   – including interest on deposits2.07 2.07 1.59 1.46 1.50 1.34 
   – excluding interest on deposits9.96 9.03 6.98 5.77 6.46 4.73 













Notes:

(1) Convertible preference shares totalling £200 million (2002 – £200 million; 2001 and 2000 – £800 million), €750 million (2002, 2001 and 2000 – €750 million) and $1,900 million (2002, 2001 and 2000 – $1,900 million) have not been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect is anti-dilutive. Interest payments on the $1,200 million (2002 and 2001 – $1,200 million) perpetual regulatory securities may be settled by the issue of ordinary shares at the option of the company and have not been included in the computation of diluted earnings per share as their effect is also anti-dilutive.
(2) The share prices at 31 December 1999 and 30 September 1999 have not been adjusted for the bonus issue in July 2000, of Additional Value Shares in connection with the acquisition of NatWest.
(3) Return on average total assets represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders as a percentage of average total assets.
(4) Return on average equity shareholders’ funds represents profit attributable to ordinary shareholders expressed as a percentage of average equity shareholders’ funds.
(5) For this purpose, earnings consist of income before tax and minority interests, plus fixed charges less the unremitted income of associated undertakings (share of profits less dividends received). Fixed charges consist of total interest expense, including or excluding interest on deposits and debt securities in issue, as appropriate, and the proportion of rental expense deemed representative of the interest factor (one third of total rental expenses).

153



Additional information continued

Analysis of loans and advances to customers
The following table analyses loans and advances to customers before provisions by remaining maturity, geographical area and type of customer. Overdrafts are included in the ‘Within 1 year’ category.

 Within
1 year
£m
 After 1
but within
5 years
£m
 After
5 years
£m
 31 December
2003
Total
£m
 31 December
2002
£m
 31 December
2001
£m
 31 December
2000
£m
 30 September
1999
£m
 
















 
UK                
Central and local government1,207 1 9 1,217 1,521 706 1,957 150 
Manufacturing4,628 876 880 6,384 7,386 7,401 6,806 2,715 
Construction2,670 588 702 3,960 3,468 3,018 2,615 648 
Finance10,186 602 8,160 18,948 12,396 8,517 9,944 2,891 
Service industries and                
    business activities
16,799 4,895 7,596 29,290 26,022 25,033 20,903 8,062 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing1,304 518 740 2,562 2,463 2,391 2,373 673 
Property10,577 3,715 5,378 19,670 15,939 12,274 10,415 3,668 
Individuals – home mortgages972 3,982 43,163 48,117 42,101 36,976 32,600 9,544 
Individuals – other15,529 6,719 3,278 25,526 22,255 20,076 17,881 6,283 
Finance leases and instalment                
    credit2,566 4,447 4,690 11,703 11,723 11,258 10,816 3,614 
















 
Total domestic66,438 26,343 74,596 167,377 145,274 127,650 116,310 38,248 
Overseas residents22,808 761 3,599 27,168 23,657 24,164 19,257 2,799 
















 
Total UK offices89,246 27,104 78,195 194,545 168,931 151,814 135,567 41,047 
















 
                 
Overseas                
US16,214 9,538 14,621 40,373 41,008 29,230 23,050 6,807 
Rest of the World11,133 4,266 6,136 21,535 17,305 13,093 12,598 2,223 
















 
Total overseas offices27,347 13,804 20,757 61,908 58,313 42,323 35,648 9,030 
















 
Loans and advances                
   to customers – gross116,593 40,908 98,952 256,453 227,244 194,137 171,215 50,077 
 




           
Provisions for bad and doubtful debts      (3,922)(3,920)(3,645)(3,139)(737)
       








 
Loans and advances                
   to customers – net      252,531 223,324 190,492 168,076 49,340 
       








 
                 
Fixed rate36,559 14,970 30,389 81,918 80,326 62,282 53,983 15,959 
Variable rate80,034 25,938 68,563 174,535 146,918 131,855 117,232 34,118 
















 
Gross loans and advances                
    to customers – by maturity116,593 40,908 98,952 256,453 227,244 194,137 171,215 50,077 
 














 

154



Provisions for bad and doubtful debts
For a discussion of the factors considered in determining the amount of the provisions, see ‘Provisions’ on page 48 and ‘Critical accounting polices – Provisions for bad and doubtful debts’ on page 7.

The following table shows the elements of provisions for bad and doubtful debts.

 
31 December
 3 months
ended
31 December
1999
£m
  30 September
1999
£m
 
 
   
 2003
   £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
   












 
Provisions at the beginning of the period            
Domestic2,581 2,467 2,370 484 433 347 
Foreign1,346 1,186 783 332 304 286 












 
 3,927 3,653 3,153 816 737 633 












 
Currency translation and other adjustments            
Domestic(2)(4)4 (1)  
Foreign(60)(58)13 43 2 10 












 
 (62)(62)17 42 2 10 












 
Acquisitions of businesses            
Domestic 11 83 1,871 2  
Foreign50 12 171 494 23  












 
 50 23 254 2,365 25  












 
Amounts written-off            
Domestic(1,097)(743)(645)(599)(35)(175)
Foreign(422)(293)(190)(185)(5)(51)












 
 (1,519)(1,036)(835)(784)(40)(226)












 
Recoveries of amounts written-off in previous periods            
Domestic38 37 54 142 10 44 
Foreign34 26 26 22 3 10 












 
 72 63 80 164 13 54 












 
Charged to profit and loss account            
Domestic932 813 601 473 74 217 
Foreign529 473 383 77 5 49 












 
 1,461 1,286 984 550 79 266 












 
Provisions at the end of the period (1)            
Domestic2,452 2,581 2,467 2,370 484 433 
Foreign1,477 1,346 1,186 783 332 304 












 
 3,929 3,927 3,653 3,153 816 737 
 










 
             
Gross loans and advances to customers            












 
Domestic167,377 145,274 127,650 116,310 41,045 38,248 
Foreign89,076 81,970 66,487 54,905 13,892 11,829 












 
 256,453 227,244 194,137 171,215 54,937 50,077 
 










 
Closing customer provisions as a % of gross loans            
    and advances to customers (2)            
Domestic1.46%1.78%1.93%2.04%1.18%1.13%
Foreign1.65%1.63%1.77%1.40%2.39%2.57%












 
Total1.53%1.72%1.88%1.83%1.49%1.47%
 










 
             
Customer charge against profit as a % of gross loans            
    and advances to customers            
Domestic0.56%0.56%0.47%0.41%0.72%0.57%
Foreign0.59%0.58%0.58%0.14%0.14%0.41%












 
Total0.57%0.57%0.51%0.32%0.58%0.53%
 










 
  
Notes:
(1) Includes closing provisions against loans and advances to banks of £7 million (2002 – £7 million; 2001 – £8 million; 2000 – £14 million).
(2) Closing customer provisions exclude closing provisions against loans and advances to banks.

155



Additional information continued

Provisions for bad and doubtful debts (continued)
The following table presents additional information with respect to the provisions for bad and doubtful debts.

 
31 December
 30 September
1999
£m
 
 
  
 2003
   £m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
  










 
Loans and advances to customers (gross)256,453 227,244 194,137 171,215 50,077 
 








 
Provisions at end of period:          
Specific provisions – customers3,356 3,323 3,031 2,571 567 
Specific provisions – banks7 7 8 14  
General provision566 597 614 568 170 










 
 3,929 3,927 3,653 3,153 737 
 








 
           
Customer provision at end of period as % of loans and          
   advances to customers at end of period:          
Specific provisions1.31%1.46%1.56%1.50%1.13%
General provision0.22%0.26%0.32%0.33%0.34%










 
 1.53%1.72%1.88%1.83%1.47%
 








 
           
Average loans and advances to customers (gross)245,798 211,206 181,584 142,288 45,807 
 








 
           
As a % of average loans and advances to customers during the period:          
Total customer provisions charged to profit and loss0.59%0.61%0.54%0.39%0.58%
 








 
           
Amounts written-off (net of recoveries) – customers0.59%0.46%0.42%0.44%0.38%
 








 

Analysis of closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts
The following table analyses customer provisions for bad and doubtful debts by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

 
31 December
     
 
 
30 September
1999
 
 
2003
2002
2001
2000
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Closing
provision
£m
 % of loans
to total
loans
%
 Closing
provision
£m
 % of loans
to total
loans
%
 Closing
provision
£m
 % of loans
to total
Loans
%
 Closing
provision
£m
 % of loans
to total
loans
%
 Closing
provision
£m
 % of loans
to total
loans
%
 




















 
Domestic                    
Central and local government 0.5  0.6  0.4  1.1  0.3 
Manufacturing156 2.5 205 3.2 209 3.8 148 4.0 16 5.4 
Construction56 1.5 65 1.5 72 1.6 77 1.5 8 1.3 
Finance34 7.4 71 5.5 73 4.4 75 5.8 4 5.8 
Service industries and business activities599 11.4 699 11.5 627 12.9 665 12.2 124 16.1 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing20 1.0 29 1.1 31 1.2 33 1.4 3 1.4 
Property58 7.7 40 7.0 39 6.3 55 6.1 11 7.3 
Individuals – home mortgages35 18.8 60 18.5 53 19.1 35 19.0 22 19.1 
Individuals – other1,003 9.9 855 9.8 855 10.3 797 10.5 167 12.5 
Finance leases and instalment credit136 4.6 208 5.2 164 5.8 149 6.3 12 7.2 




















 
Total domestic2,097 65.3 2,232 63.9 2,123 65.8 2,034 67.9 367 76.4 
Foreign1,259 34.7 1,091 36.1 908 34.2 537 32.1 200 23.6 




















 
Specific provisions3,356 100.0 3,323 100.0 3,031 100.0 2,571 100.0 567 100.0 
   
   
   
   
   
 
General provision566   597   614   568   170   
 
   
   
   
   
   
Total provisions3,922   3,920   3,645   3,139   737   
 
   
   
   
   
   

156



Analysis of write-offs
The following table analyses amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

 
31 December
 30 September
1999
£m
 
 
  
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
  










 
Domestic          
Manufacturing99 111 61 55 4 
Construction22 18 19 30 5 
Finance54 35 8 5 1 
Service industries and business activities393 180 176 146 38 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing4 10 5 5 1 
Property6 9 14 7 4 
Individuals – home mortgages2 2 3 12 9 
Individuals – others357 333 297 230 107 
Finance leases and instalment credit160 45 62 109 6 










 
Total domestic1,097 743 645 599 175 
Foreign422 293 190 185 51 










 
Total write-offs*1,519 1,036 835 784 226 
 








 
*Includes amounts written-off in respect of banks of nil (2002 – £1 million; 2001 – £6 million; 2000 – £5 million).

Analysis of recoveries
The following table analyses recoveries of amounts written-off by geographical area and type of domestic customer.

 
31 December
   
 
 30 September 
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
 
1999
£m
 










 
Domestic          
Manufacturing 1 2 12 2 
Construction  1 13 1 
Finance  1 3 8 
Service industries and business activities3 1 5 45 4 
Agriculture, forestry and fishing   3  
Property 1 1 6  
Individuals – home mortgages    1 
Individuals – others26 27 41 57 28 
Finance leases and instalment credit9 7 3 3  










 
Total domestic38 37 54 142 44 
Foreign34 26 26 22 10 










 
Total recoveries72 63 80 164 54 
 








 

157



Additional information continued

Risk elements in lending and potential problem loans
The Group’s loan control and review procedures do not include the classification of loans as non-accrual, accruing past due, restructured and potential problem loans, as defined by the SEC in the US. The following table shows the estimated amount of loans that would be reported using the SEC’s classifications. The figures incorporate estimates and are stated before deducting the value of security held or related provisions.

 
31 December
 30 September
1999
£m
 
 
  
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
  










 
Loans accounted for on a non-accrual basis (3):          
      Domestic3,221 3,077 2,829 2,482 378 
      Foreign1,211 1,098 737 344 170 










 
      Total4,432 4,175 3,566 2,826 548 










 
Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days          
   or more as to principal or interest (4):          
      Domestic561 363 643 662 322 
      Foreign81 129 142 168 110 










 
      Total642 492 785 830 432 










 
Loans not included above which are classified          
   as ‘troubled debt restructurings’ by the SEC:          
      Domestic53 144 26 43 13 
      Foreign30 60 116 122 104 










 
      Total83 204 142 165 117 










 
Total risk elements in lending5,157 4,871 4,493 3,821 1,097 
 








 
Potential problem loans (5)          
      Domestic492 639 801 699 171 
      Foreign99 544 279 73 75 










 
Total potential problem loans591 1,183 1,080 772 246 
 








 
Closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts as          
   a % of total risk elements in lending76%81%81%83%67%
 








 
Closing provisions for bad and doubtful debts as a % of          
   total risk elements in lending and potential problem loans68%65%66%69%55%
 








 
Risk elements in lending as a % of gross loans          
   and advances to customers2.01%2.14%2.31%2.23%2.19%
 








 
Notes:  
(1) For the analysis above, ‘Domestic’ consists of the UK domestic transactions of the Group. ‘Foreign’ comprises the Group’s transactions conducted through offices outside the UK and through those offices in the UK specifically organised to service international banking transactions.
(2) The classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not necessarily indicate that the principal of the loan is uncollectable in whole or in part. Collection depends in each case on the individual circumstances of the loan, including the adequacy of any collateral securing the loan and therefore classification of a loan as non-accrual, past due 90 days or troubled debt restructuring does not always require that a provision be made against such a loan. In accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts, it is considered that adequate provisions for the above risk elements in lending have been made.
(3) The Group’s UK banking subsidiary undertakings account for loans on a non-accrual basis from the point in time at which the collectability of interest is in significant doubt. Certain subsidiary undertakings of the Group, principally Citizens, generally account for loans on a non-accrual basis when interest or principal is past due 90 days.
(4)Overdrafts generally have no fixed repayment schedule and consequently are not included in this category.
(5)Loans that are current as to the payment of principal and interest but in respect of which management has serious doubts about the ability of the borrower to comply with contractual repayment terms. Substantial security is held in respect of these loans and appropriate provisions have already been made in accordance with the Group’s provisioning policy for bad and doubtful debts.
 
31 December
 30 September
1999
£m
 
 
  
 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 2000
£m
  










 
Gross income not recognised but which would have been          
   recognised under the original terms of non-accrual and          
   restructured loans          
      Domestic237 234 173 148 53 
      Foreign55 73 60 48 32 










 
 292 307 233 196 85 
 








 
           
Interest on non-accrual and restructured loans included in          
   net interest income          
      Domestic60 47 42 30 4 
      Foreign3 7 14 8 13 










 
 63 54 56 38 17 
 








 

158



Analysis of deposits – product analysis
The following table shows the distribution of the Group’s deposits by type and geographical area:

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
UK      
Domestic:      
Demand deposits – interest-free20,567 22,067 21,095 
Demand deposits – interest-bearing78,670 66,118 63,609 
Time deposits – savings13,238 12,180 13,226 
Time deposits – other57,994 59,819 40,360 
Overseas residents:      
Demand deposits – interest-free830 908 1,301 
Demand deposits – interest-bearing9,559 8,897 7,286 
Time deposits – savings1,014 1,559 3,210 
Time deposits – other32,531 21,824 21,979 






 
Total UK offices214,403 193,372 172,066 






 
Overseas      
Demand deposits – interest-free7,937 6,698 6,719 
Demand deposits – interest-bearing7,471 10,148 10,787 
Time deposits – savings15,450 15,189 21,343 
Time deposits – other59,025 48,474 28,118 






 
Total overseas offices (see below)89,883 80,509 66,967 






 
Total deposits304,286 273,881 239,033 
 




 
       
Banking business251,986 230,144 211,942 
Trading business52,300 43,737 27,091 






 
Total deposits304,286 273,881 239,033 
 




 
       
Overseas      
US67,019 61,738 49,815 
Rest of the World22,864 18,771 17,152 






 
Total overseas89,883 80,509 66,967 
 




 

159



Additional information continued

Short term borrowings

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Commercial paper      
   Outstanding at year end6,968 3,515 273 
   Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year7,032 3,515 643 
   Approximate average amount during the year5,499 868 572 
   Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year1.6%2.0%4.3%
   Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end1.5%1.6%4.1%
       
Other short term borrowings      
   Outstanding at year end84,795 72,069 47,750 
   Maximum outstanding at any month end during the year94,570 72,264 56,890 
   Approximate average amount during the year78,004 58,246 50,628 
   Approximate weighted average interest rate during the year2.2%2.9%4.8%
   Approximate weighted average interest rate at year end2.0%2.2%3.8%






 

Average interest rates during the year are computed by dividing total interest expense by the average amount borrowed. Average interest rates at year end are average rates for a single day and as such may reflect one-day market distortions which may not be indicative of generally prevailingrates. Original maturities of commercial paper are not in excess of one year. ‘Other short-term borrowings’ consist principally of borrowings in the money markets included within ‘Deposits by banks’ and ‘Customer accounts’ in the accounts, and generally have original maturities of one year or less.

Certificates of deposit and other time deposits
The following table shows details of the Group’s certificates of deposit and other time deposits over $100,000 or equivalent by remaining maturity.

  Within
3 months
£m
 Over 3 months
but within
6 months
£m
 Over 6 months
but within
12 months
£m
 Over
12 months
£m
 2003
Total
£m
 










 
UK based companies and branches          
Certificates of deposit18,740 1,841 4,847 4,658 30,086 
Other time deposits80,123 2,460 1,116 3,758 87,457 
           
Overseas based companies and branches          
Certificates of deposit9,049 27   9,076 
Other time deposits44,640 1,677 766 861 47,944 










 
Total152,552 6,005 6,729 9,277 174,563 
 
 

Analysis of deposits – currency analysis   The following table shows the distribution of deposits by banks and customer accounts by sterling and other currencies.

 2003
£m
 2002
£m
 2001
£m
 






 
Deposits by banks      
   Sterling14,574 10,998 9,027 
   Other currencies52,749 43,722 31,011 






 
   Total deposits by banks67,323 54,720 40,038 






 
       
Customer accounts      
   Sterling142,551 133,404 125,425 
   Other currencies94,412 85,757 73,570 






 
   Total customer accounts236,963 219,161 198,995 






 
   Total deposits304,286 273,881 239,033 
 




 

160




Exchange rates
Except as stated, the following tables show, for the dates or periods indicated, the Noon Buying Rate in New York for cable transfers in sterling as certified for customs’ purposes by the Federal Reserve Bank of New York (the “Noon Buying Rate”):

US dollars per £1  March
2004
  February 
2004
 January
2004
 December
2003
 November
2003
 October
2003
 












 
Noon Buying Rate             
High1.8680 1.9045 1.8511  1.7842  1.7219  1.7025 
Low1.7943 1.8182   1.7902  1.7200  1.6693  1.6598  

 
  
 Year ended 31 December 3 months ended
31 December
1999
 Year ended
30 September

1999
 
 
 2003 2002 2001 2000












 
Noon Buying Rate            
Period end rate1.7842 1.6095 1.4543 1.4955 1.6150 1.6457 
Average rate for the period (1)1.6450 1.5043 1.4396 1.5204 1.6295 1.6286 
             
Consolidation rate (2)            
Period end rate1.7857 1.6128 1.4498 1.4925 1.6168 1.6465 
Average rate for the period1.6354 1.5032 1.4401 1.5160 1.6308 1.6297 












 
Notes:  
(1) The average of the Noon Buying Rates on the last business day of each month during the period.
(2) The rates used by the Group for translating dollars into sterling in the preparation of its financial statements.
(3)On 22 April 2004, the Noon Buying Rate was £1.00 = $1.7684.

161




Additional information(continued)

Off balance sheet arrangements

The Group is involved with several types of off-balance sheet arrangements, including special purpose vehicles, lending commitments and financial guarantees.

Special purpose vehicles (“SPVs”)

SPVs are vehicles set up for a specific, limited purpose, do not carry out a business or trade and typically have no employees. They take a variety of legal forms – trusts, partnerships and companies – and fulfil many different functions. They constitute a key element of securitisation transactions in which an SPV acquires financial assets funded by the issue of securities.

In the normal course of business, the Group arranges securitisations to facilitate client transactions and undertakes securitisations to sell financial assets or to obtain funding. It has established a number of SPVs to act as commercial paper conduits for customers. SPVs are also utilised in its fund management activities to structure investment funds to which the Group provides investment management services.

Under UK GAAP, the Group accounts for securitisations of assets originated by the Group in accordance with FRS 5 ‘Reporting the Substance of Transactions’. Assets are derecognised and a gain or loss on disposal recognised if all significant rights or access to benefits relating to those assets and all significant risks in those benefits are transferred to others. In cases where there is a significant change in the entity’s rights to benefit and exposure to risk, the description or monetary amount relating to an asset should be changed and a liability recognised for any obligation to transfer benefits that is assumed. Where a transaction in previously recognised assets results in no significant change in the entity’s rights to benefits in the assets or its exposure to risks inherent in those benefits, the assets should continue to be recognised and no gain or loss recognised. FRS 5 requires a linked presentation where a transaction is in substance the financing of an asset or pool of assets but where the item is financed in such a way that the Group can suffer a loss which is limited to a fixed monetary amount. The linked presentation involves showing the gross amount of assets securitised less the related finance on the face of the balance sheet – the net amount is included in total assets. Profit is recognised on entering into the arrangement only to the extent that non-returnable proceeds exceed the previous carrying value of the assets securitised. The Group securitises mortgage loans and other assets.

Under US GAAP, transfers of financial assets are accounted for and reported based on the application of a financial-components approach that focuses on control. Under this approach, after a transfer of financial assets, the Group recognises the assets it controls and the liabilities it has incurred, derecognises financial assets when control has been surrendered, and derecognises liabilities when extinguished.

Transfers of financial assets where the Group has surrendered control over the transferred assets are accounted for as sales and any gain or loss recognised in earnings. Otherwise, transfers are accounted for as collateralised borrowings.

As financial intermediary, the Group arranges securitisations of client assets. These include multi-seller commercial paper conduits and client intermediation transactions. The Group has established a number of SPVs to act as commercial paper conduits. These allow customers to access liquidity in the commercial paper market by selling assets to the conduit that funds the purchase by issuing commercial paper to third parties. The Group supplies certain services and contingent liquidity support to some or all of these vehicles on an arm’s length basis as well as programme credit enhancement. Other client securitisations arranged by the Group involve individual SPVs established to purchase customer assets financed by the issue of debt obligations to third parties. The Group may act as advisor to the manager of the SPV and provide liquidity facilities to it.

Under UK GAAP the Group accounts for fees received from client securitisations in line with its usual policy for similar fees from other banking activities. Undrawn liquidity lines are included within undrawn commitments in Note 41 on page 129; any drawn amounts will be included in loans and advances. The assets and liabilities of the SPVs are not recognised on the Group’s balance sheet unless the SPV is a quasi-subsidiary of the Group. A quasi-subsidiary is defined in FRS 5 as ‘a company, trust, partnership or other vehicle, that, though not fulfilling the definition of a subsidiary, is directly or indirectly controlled by the reporting entity and gives rise to benefits for that entity that are in substance no different from those that would arise were the vehicle a subsidiary’.

Following the issue of FASB Interpretation (“FIN”) No. 46 (revised), the Group has consolidated SPVs acting as commercial paper conduits and involved in other asset-backed transactions in its US GAAP disclosures. Applying FIN 46R has resulted in total assets on a US GAAP basis increasing by £6.9 billion. Further information on FIN 46R can be found in Note 53 on page 148.

162




Lending commitments and other commitments

Under a loan commitment, the Group agrees to make funds available to a customer in the future. Loan commitments, which are usually for a specified term, may be unconditionally cancellable or may persist, provided all conditions in the loan facility are satisfied or waived. Commitments to lend include commercial standby facilities and credit lines, liquidity facilities to commercial paper conduits and unutilised overdraft facilities. Other commitments include documentary credits, which are commercial letters of credit providing for payment by the Group to a named beneficiary against presentation of specified documents, forward asset purchases, forward deposits placed and undrawn note issuance and revolving underwriting facilities.

Guarantees and other contingent liabilities

The Group gives guarantees on behalf of customers. A financial guarantee represents an irrevocable undertaking that the Group will meet a customer’s obligations to third parties ifthe customer fails to do so. The maximum amount that the Group could be required to pay under a guarantee is its principal amount. The Group expects most guarantees it provides to expire unused. Other contingent liabilities include contingent liabilities arising out of acceptances, endorsements, standby letters of credit, performance and customs bonds, warranties and indemnities. In accepting a bill of exchange drawn on it by a customer a bank undertakes to pay the holder of the bill at maturity. Most acceptances are presented for payment and reimbursement by the customer is usually immediate. In the UK, bills accepted by certain banks designated by the Bank of England are eligible for rediscount at the Bank of England. In endorsing a bill of exchange, a bank accepts liability for payment of any shortfall on the bill at maturity. Unlike acceptances, the endorsing bank receives value for the bill, which is then rediscounted.

The Group’s contingent liabilities and commitments are set out below.

2003Less than
1 year
£m
 More than
1 year but
less than
3 years
£m
 More than
3 years but
less than
5 years
£m
 Over
5 years
£m
 Total
£m
 










 
Acceptances and endorsements595    595 
Guarantees and assets pledged as collateral security4,632 1,422 782 1,951 8,787 
Other contingent liabilities1,872 987 351 2,272 5,482 
Documentary credits and trade related transactions368 210 2 25 605 
Undrawn formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments to lend95,062 18,082 14,053 10,054 137,251 
Other commitments1,304 476 15 42 1,837 










 
Total103,833 21,177 15,203 14,344 154,557 
 
 

Contractual obligations

The table below summarises the Group’s contractual cash obligations by remaining maturity.

2003Less than
1 year
£m
 More than
1 year but
less than
3 years
£m
 More than
3 years but
less than
5 years
£m
 Over
5 years
£m
 Total
£m
 










 
Contractual cash obligations          
Dated loan capital709 691 1,034 6,878 9,312 
Operating leases262 479 434 2,124 3,299 
Finance leases19 29 8 126 182 
Unconditional obligations to purchase goods or services661 211 3  875 










 
Total1,651 1,410 1,479 9,128 13,668 
 
 

The tables above do not include undated loan capital. The maturity of deposits by banks is given in Note 23 on the accounts, of customer accounts in Note 24, and of debt securities in issue in Note 25.

163




Additional information (continued)

Economic and monetary environment

Monetary policy

The Group’s earnings are affected by domestic and global economic conditions. The policies of the UK government, and of governments in other countries in which the Group operates, also have an impact.

The UK government sets an inflation target, which changed in December 2003 from a 2.5% target based on the retail prices index excluding mortgage interest payments to a 2% target based on the consumer prices index, in line with other European countries.

The Bank of England has operational independence in setting the repo rate to achieve the inflation target. The Bank was given independence by the Chancellor of the Exchequer in 1997, with the aim of making monetary policy free from political influence, and therefore more stable and credible. The Bank’s Monetary Policy Committee ("MPC") meets each month to agree any change to interest rates, and the minutes of these meetings are published two weeks later. One-off meetings can also be held in exceptional circumstances – for example, when UK interest rates were cut by a quarter point following the terrorist attacks on 11 September 2001. In response to the downturn in the global economy and the terrorist attacks, the Bank of England, along with other major central banks around the world, cut rates sharply in 2001. Rates remained at exceptionally low levels throughout 2002, and were reduced again in the first half of 2003, reflecting the uncertain nature of the global and domestic economic circumstances. However, signs of recovery in the global economy led the Bank of England to increase rates by a quarter point in both November 2003 and February 2004, to 4%.

The value of sterling is also important for UK monetary conditions. The monetary authorities do not have an exchange rate target, but the sharp depreciation of the US dollar against the euro, and consequent volatility of sterling, has played a role in the MPC’s recent monthly debates.

European Economic and Monetary Union (“EMU”)

The new European single currency, the euro, came into being on 1 January 1999. The third stage of EMU started on schedule on 1 January 1999. During the course of 1998, it was determined that eleven countries (Austria, Belgium, Finland, France, Germany, Ireland, Italy, Luxembourg, the Netherlands, Portugal and Spain) would participate. The UK, along with Denmark, exercised its right to opt out at that stage, and Sweden also determined not to be part of this first wave.

On 31 December 1998, the European Currency Unit (the "ECU") was replaced by the euro on the international currency markets, on a one-for-one basis. The rates for the euro against other international currencies were based upon the official closing rates for the ECU. The bilateral rates for the legacy currencies of the participating states were derived from their rates within the Exchange Rate Mechanism and the closing value of the ECU. These rates, between the legacy currencies and between these currencies and the euro, were fixed as of 1 January 1999. The euro became the formal currency for all eleven then-participating states.

Euro notes and coins were introduced into circulation on 1 January 2002 in accordance with the Maastricht Treaty, which required that legacy currency notes and coins be withdrawn by 30 June 2002. Also on 1 January 1999, the European Central Bank ("ECB") assumed responsibility for the operation of monetary policy throughout the euro zone. The ECB sets one short-term interest rate to cover all twelve countries.

The UK government continues to support EMU entry in principle, but has decided the UK will not adopt the single currency until it is in the UK’s economic interests, with a positive referendum vote. The Chancellor of the Exchequer has laid down five key economic conditions for UK participation. An assessment of these five tests took place in June 2003, resulting in the publication of HM Treasury’s assessment, the 18 supporting EMU studies, and a third outline National Changeover Plan. While indicating that these five economic tests have yet to be fully met, the government has set out a programme of economic reforms and structural assessments necessary to achieve readiness for entry.

The Group continues to co-operate with the UK government, and to work within the financial services sector, to develop thinking and plans regarding a range of practical issues that would arise if the UK were to decide to enter EMU. In particular, the Group continues its involvement in discussions as to how a phased transition could be achieved, in order to minimise cost and risk. In addition, due attention is being paid to the implications, for elements of the Group and for customers, of the introduction of euro notes and coins and the withdrawal of sterling.

Uncertainty continues on the likelihood and timing of the euro being introduced in the UK. It is not possible to estimate with any degree of certainty the ultimate cost of making systems and operations fully compliant. Expenditure in the year ended 31 December 2003 in preparation for the possible introduction of the euro in the UK was minimal.

Supervision and regulation

1 United Kingdom

1.1 The regulatory regime applying to the UK financial services industry

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (“FSMA 2000”), containing an integrated legislative framework for regulating most of the UK financial services industry, came into force at the end of 2001. This established the Financial Services Authority (the “FSA”) as the single statutory regulator responsible for regulating deposit taking, insurance and investment business in the UK.

Under the FSMA 2000, businesses require the FSA’s permission to undertake specified types of activities including entering into and carrying out contracts of insurance; managing, dealing in or advising on, investments; accepting deposits; and issuing electronic money (“regulated activities”). The FSA has published detailed regulatory requirements contained in a Handbook of Rules and Guidance.

164




The FSA’s statutory objectives are to maintain confidence in, and to promote public understanding of, the UK financial system; to secure an appropriate degree of consumer protection; and to reduce the scope for financial crime. In achieving these objectives, the FSA must take account of certain “principles of good regulation” which include recognising the responsibilities of authorised firms’ own management, facilitating innovation and competition and acting proportionately in imposing burdens on the industry.

1.2 Authorised firms in the Group

Currently, around 30 companies in the Group, spanning a range of financial services sectors (banking, insurance and investment business), are authorised and regulated to conduct regulated activities by the FSA. These companies are referred to as ‘authorised firms.’

The FSA supervises the banking business of the UK-based banks in the Group, including The Royal Bank of Scotland plc, National Westminster Bank Plc, Coutts & Co, Ulster Bank Limited and Tesco Personal Finance Limited.

General insurance business is principally undertaken by companies in the Direct Line and Churchill Insurance Groups, which form part of the RBS Insurance division, whilst life insurance business is undertaken by Royal Scottish Assurance plc and National Westminster Life Assurance Limited (with the Group’s joint venture partner, the AVIVA Group) and Direct Line Life Insurance Company Limited. Investment management business is principally undertaken by companies in the Wealth Management Division, including Adam & Co Investment Management Limited and Coutts & Co Investment Management Limited.

1.3 The FSA’s regulatory approach and supervisory standards

The regulatory regime focuses on the risks to the FSA of not meeting its statutory objectives and uses the full range of regulatory tools (including the authorisation of firms, rule-making, supervision, investigation and enforcement) available to the FSA. It is founded on a risk based, integrated approach to regulation.

The FSA can request information from and give directions to, authorised firms. It may also require authorised firms to provide independent reports prepared by professionals. The FSA can exercise indirect control over the holding companies of authorised firms via its statutory powers to object to persons who are, or will become, “controllers” of these firms.

Given the number of authorised firms in the Group and the range and complexity of business undertaken by them, the FSA has carried out a comprehensive risk assessment of these firms and generally, they are subject to direct and on-going FSA supervision.

Setting standards for firms

The FSA carries out the prudential supervision and conduct of business regulation of all authorised firms and also regulates the conduct of their business in the UK.

Currently, the application of its conduct of business rules to banking business and general insurance business is limited but the FSA will be assuming powers to regulate general insurance intermediation activities from January 2005 (as noted below) and this will have a significant impact on that sector.

Prudential supervision includes monitoring the adequacy of a firm’s management, its financial resources and internal systems and controls. Firms are required to submit regular returns to the FSA which provide material for supervisory assessment. Different prudential requirements have applied to different sectors of the financial services industry. However, the FSA has prepared an Integrated Prudential Sourcebook (aimed at applying a more harmonised and consistent approach to prudential regulation across the whole industry) and this is expected to be implemented in stages, from the end 2004 until the end of 2006.

The EU Financial Groups Directive comes into force on 1 January 2005 and is to be implemented as part of the Integrated Prudential Sourcebook. This will create an additional set of regulatory requirements recognising the insurance, investment and banking business of the Group as a financial conglomerate with banking, investment and insurance businesses.

Many of the standards relating to the capital which firms must hold to absorb losses arising from risks to its business are determined by EC legislation or are negotiated internationally. The current capital adequacy regime requires firms to maintain certain levels of capital, of certain specified types (or tiers), against particular business risks.

A parallel process of reviewing and revising the current EU Capital Adequacy requirements is also underway. This will impact on all European banks and investment firms. The EU Risk Based Capital Directive is expected to be finalised in 2004 so that it can be implemented by Member States in parallel with Basel II, at the end of 2006. In the UK, the relevant changes will be implemented via changes to the FSA’s Integrated Prudential Sourcebook.

In its supervisory role, the FSA sets requirements relating to matters such as consolidated supervision, capital adequacy, liquidity, large exposures, and the adequacy of accounting procedures and controls. Banks are required to set out their policy on “large exposures” and to inform the FSA of this. The policy must be reviewed annually and any significant departures from policies must be discussed with the FSA. Large exposures must be monitored and controlled.

As regards the insurance industry, the FSA’s primary objective is to regulate and supervise the industry so that policyholders may have confidence that they have bought appropriate products, that UK insurers are able to meet

165




Additional information(continued)

Supervision and regulation (continued)

their liabilities and that they treat customers fairly. The FSA sets requirements relating to “margins of solvency” (i.e. the excess of the value of assets over the amount of liabilities). Companies carrying out insurance business are required to submit regular statistical returns covering reserves and solvency, to the FSA. Recently, the FSA has decided that fundamental changes need to be made to the way in which this sector is regulated. Certain changes have already been introduced to the prudential regulation of insurers but the FSA is considering further improvements to increase the capital requirements of both life and non-life insurers.

From the beginning of 2005, FSA’s remit will also be extended to cover regulation of the sale and administration of general insurance and certain other types of insurance contracts.

Firms must also meet standards relating to their senior management arrangements and internal systems and controls and must comply with rules designed to reduce the scope for firms to be used for money laundering. The FSA continues to supervise compliance with anti-money laundering obligations closely and new legislation and amended rules are scheduled to come into force in 2004.

Conduct of business standards essentially govern key aspects of firms’ relationships with customers, and require the provision of clear and adequate information, the managing of conflicts of interest and the recommending of products suitable to the needs of customers. The marketing of financial products (particularly investment products) is subject to detailed requirements.

The FSA’s Conduct of Business Rules currently require authorised firms in the Group such as the Royal Bank and NatWest to determine whether to market the “packaged products” (i.e. personal pensions, life assurance, collective investment schemes and investment trust savings schemes) of only one company or group, or to become an independent intermediary, providing customers with advice across a broader range of products (this is called the “polarisation regime” and was introduced as a consumer protection mechanism). A group of persons allied together for purposes of marketing packaged products is referred to as a “marketing group”.

Currently, Group companies are members of one of two marketing groups – The RBS Marketing Group or the NatWest Marketing Group. The Royal Bank markets the packaged products of the RBS Marketing Group through its branches and NatWest (and its subsidiary, Ulster Bank Limited) markets the NatWest Marketing Group packaged products through its branches and, at present, under the FSA’s rules, neither The Royal Bank nor NatWest (or Ulster Bank Limited) are permitted to advise on packaged products more generally. Independent advice is available to customers through the Royal Bank of Scotland Group Independent Financial Services Limited.

Recognising both the substantial anti–competitive effects of the polarisation regime and the fact that it generates little consumer benefits, the FSA has decided to abolish this regime and these changes are expected to be implemented in 2004.

Focus on customers

An important element of securing an appropriate degree of consumer protection is ensuring that suitable arrangements are made for dealing with customer complaints. Firms are required to establish appropriate internal complaint handling procedures and to report complaints statistics to the FSA. Where an issue cannot be resolved by the parties it may be referred for independent assessment to a complaints scheme run by the Financial Ombudsman Service.

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (financed by levies on authorised firms) is available to provide compensation up to certain limits if a firm collapses owing money to investors, depositors or policyholders.

1.4 Enforcement

Where appropriate, the FSA may discipline and/or prosecute for breaches of the legislative or regulatory requirements. It works closely with the criminal authorities and uses both civil and criminal powers. It can withdraw a firm’s authorisation, discipline firms and individuals, prosecute for various offences and require funds to be returned to customers.

The FSA also has powers under certain consumer legislation to take action against authorised firms to address unfair terms in financial services consumer contracts.

1.5 Extension of the FSA’s responsibilities

From 31 October 2004, the scope of the FSA’s responsibilities will be widened to cover the regulation and supervision of mortgage lending and administration and the provision of mortgage advice. Arrangements relating to the sale and administration of general insurance (and certain other insurance) contracts will become regulated from January 2005. All of these types of activities are undertaken by companies in the Group and this extension of the scope of statutory regulation is likely to have a significant impact on how the relevant businesses operate in the future.

1.6.Other relevant UK agencies and Government departments

Consumer credit issues are covered by the Department of Trade and Industry (”DTI“) and the Office of Fair Trading (“OFT”) and competition issues are dealt with by the OFT.

The business of granting consumer credit is heavily regulated. Aspects of the consumer credit business are currently being reviewed, at both national and EU levels. Changes to UK legislation are expected to be implemented in late 2004. The DTI also has responsibility for company law matters. Various aspects of company law are currently being reviewed, at both national and EU levels. Some proposals have already been adopted and further changes are expected.

166




The Competition Commission recommended a number of pricing and behavioural remedies following its inquiry into the UK market for small business banking. The Group has implemented the pricing remedies with effect from 1 January 2003 and offered the Group’s SME customers interest on current accounts. The Group has also given undertakings to implement the behavioural remedies. These behavioural remedies include measures to ease the process of switching of accounts between banks and to enable terms and conditions to be compared between banks and were implemented on 31 December 2003, as required by the OFT.

1.7 The European dimension

A considerable amount of the recent UK financial services regulation emanates via the European Union as part of its Financial Services Action Plan (“FSAP”). The primary objective of the FSAP is the completion of a single European market in financial services and specifically the establishment of a single wholesale market, an open and secure retail market and state-of-the-art prudential rules and supervision within the EU Member States. Work under the FSAP is expected to be completed by 2005. This initiative has generated (and will continue generating, for the foreseeable future) a number of EU Directives all requiring to be implemented in EC Member States (including the UK).

2 United States

As the indirect parent of Citizens’ subsidiary banks, the company is a bank holding company within the meaning of, and subject to regulation under, the US Bank Holding Company Act of 1956, as amended (the “BHCA”), by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (the “Board”). Under current Board policy, the company is expected to act as a source of financial strength to its US bank subsidiaries. The BHCA generally prohibits the company from acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any company engaged in non-banking activities in the United States unless the Board has determined, by order or regulation, that such activities are so closely related to banking or managing or controlling banks as to be a proper incident thereto. In addition, the BHCA requires the company to obtain the prior approval of the Board before acquiring, directly or indirectly, the ownership or control of more than 5% of the voting shares of any US bank or bank holding company. However, the US Gramm-Leach-Bliley Act of 1999 (the "GLBA") permits bank holding companies that have met certain eligibility criteria and elected to become 'financial holding companies' to engage in a significantly broader range of non-banking activities than those described above. Under the GLBA and related Board regulations, the company has elected to become a financial holding company effective as of 11 February 2004.

The company’s US bank and non-bank subsidiaries, and the Royal Bank and NatWest’s US offices, are subject todirect supervision and regulation by various other federal and state authorities. Citizens’ bank subsidiaries are subject to regulation by state banking authorities and the US Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation and the Royal Bank and NatWest’s New York branches are supervised by the New York Banking Department. The company’s US securities affiliates are subject to regulation and supervision by the Securities and Exchange Commission.

3 Regulatory developments for capital and risk management

The Basel Committee on Banking Supervision, which meets at the Bank of International Settlements in Switzerland, sets the standards for firm’s weighted risk asset calculations and associated regulatory capital triggers. This Committee is updating the existing regulatory capital rules and has targeted the middle of 2004 to agree the new framework, called Basel II. Full adoption of these new rules is expected from the end of December 2006.

Application of Basel II differs between jurisdictions. In the EU, the Accord becomes law through the Risk Based Capital Directive (or CAD3) and associated changes to national laws or regulatory guidelines (for example the FSAs Integrated Prudential Sourcebook). Within the US, regulators have the flexibility to implement the Accord directly, after a Final Notice of Prudential Rulemaking. The EU is applying the Accord to all banks and investment firms. The US is taking a different approach, mandating that their largest internationally active banks use the ‘Advanced’ approaches for credit and operational risk calculations; other banks can either remain on Basel l or ‘opt-into’ Basel ll. Our US subsidiary, Citizens, currently falls outside the group of mandated Basel ll banks for purposes of US regulation.

The Accord, based around three Pillars of Minimum Capital Requirements (Pillar 1), Supervisory Review (Pillar 2) and Market Discipline (Pillar 3), presents a fundamental change to the current capital adequacy regime and will have wide ranging consequences for the banking industry as a whole. The Group is actively involved in dialogue with various regulatory groups and is taking the necessary steps to prepare for the new Accord.

Description of property and equipment

The Group operates from a number of locations worldwide, principally in the UK. At 31 December 2003, The Royal Bank and NatWest (including their subsidiaries) had 636 and 1,634 retail branches, respectively, in the UK. Citizens had 866 retail banking offices (including in-store branches) covering Rhode Island, Connecticut, Massachusetts, New Hampshire, Pennsylvania, Delaware, and New Jersey. A substantial majority of the UK branches are owned by the Royal Bank, NatWest and their subsidiaries or are held under leases with unexpired terms of over 50 years. The Group’s principal properties include its headquarters at St Andrew Square, Edinburgh, its principal offices in London at 135 and 280 Bishopsgate and the Drummond House administration centre located at South Gyle, Edinburgh. A new corporate headquarters is being developed at Gogarburn, Edinburgh.

167




Additional information continued

Description of property and equipment (continued)

Freehold and long leasehold properties are revalued on a rolling basis, each property being valued at least once every five years. Interim valuations outwith the five year cycle are carried out on properties where there is an indication that its value has changed significantly, given market conditions. Any increase or deficit on revaluation is reflected in the carrying value of premises at that time. Any impairment in the value of premises where there is a clear consumption of economic benefits is charged in full to the profit and loss account. Other impairments of premises are charged to the profit and loss account after eliminating any previous revaluation surplus on the premises. Any profit from the sale of revalued premises is calculated by deducting the revalued amount from the net proceeds. The revaluation of premises at 31 December 2003 resulted in a £69 million decrease in property revaluation reserves.

Total capital expenditure on premises, computers and other equipment for the year ended 31 December 2003 was £2,613 million (2002 – £872 million; 2001 – £515 million).

Major shareholders

Details of major shareholders in the company’s ordinary and preference shares are given on page 65.

With the exception of Santander Central Hispano S.A. which sold 86.7 million ordinary shares shares representing 2.9% of the company’s ordinary share capital on 25 November 2002, there have been no significant changes in the percentage ownership of major shareholders of the company’s ordinary and preference shares during the three years ended 31 December 2003. All shareholders within a class of the company’s shares have the same voting rights. The company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation or any foreign government.

At 18 February 2004, the directors of the company had options to purchase a total of 1,686,815 ordinary shares of the company.

Santander Central Hispano, S.A. has agreed to vote its holding of the company’s ordinary shares in accordance with the recommendation or directions of the Board of directors of the company.

As at 31 December 2003, 94% of the company’s US$ denominated preference shares were held by shareholders registered in the US. All other shares were predominantly held by shareholders registered outside the US.

Material contracts

The company and its subsidiaries are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. For the year ended 31 December 2003, there have been no material contracts entered into outside the ordinary course of business.

168




Shareholder information

Contents  
   
Financial calendar170 
   
Shareholder enquiries170 
   
Capital gains tax170 
   
Analyses of ordinary shareholders171 
   
Trading market171 
   
Memorandum and articles of association173 
   
Taxation for US holders173 
   
Exchange controls177 
   
Documents on display178 
   
Important addresses178 
   
Principal offices178 

169



Shareholder information

Financial calendar 
Annual general meeting29 April 2004 at 2.00 pm,
 Edinburgh International Conference Centre,
 The Exchange, Morrison Street, Edinburgh
  
Interim results3 August 2004
Final results24 February 2005
  
Dividends 
Payment dates: 
   *Ordinary shares (2003 Final)4 June 2004
    Ordinary shares (2004 Interim)October 2004
    Cumulative preference shares31 May and 31 December 2004
    Non-cumulative dollar preference shares31 March, 30 June, 30 September and 31 December 2004
Ex-dividend dates: 
     Ordinary shares (2003 Final)10 March 2004
     Cumulative preference shares5 May 2004
Record dates: 
     Ordinary shares (2003 Final)12 March 2004
     Cumulative preference shares7 May 2004
  
*  If the necessary approvals are obtained from shareholders at the annual general meeting on 29 April 2004, as an alternative to cash, a scrip dividend election will be offered and shareholders will receive details of this by letter after that date.

Shareholder enquiries
Shareholdings in the company may be checked by visiting our website (www.rbs.co.uk/shareholder). You will need the shareholder reference number printed on your share certificate or tax voucher to gain access to this information.

Braille and audio Annual Review and Summary Financial Statement
Shareholders requiring a Braille or audio version of the Annual Review and Summary Financial Statement should contact the Registrar on 0870 702 0135.

ShareGift
The company is aware that shareholders who hold a small number of shares may be retaining these shares because dealing costs make it uneconomical to dispose of them. ShareGift, the charity share donation scheme is a free service operated by The Orr Mackintosh Foundation (registered charity 1052686) to enable shareholders to donate unwanted shares to charity.

Should you wish to donate your shares to charity in this way you should contact ShareGift for further information:

ShareGift, The Orr Mackintosh Foundation, 46 Grosvenor Street, London W1K 3HN Tel: 020 7337 0501 www.ShareGift.org

Donating your shares in this way will not give rise to either a gain or a loss for UK capital gains tax purposes and you may be able to reclaim UK income tax on gifted shares. Further information can be obtained from the UK Inland Revenue or your local tax office.

Capital gains tax
For shareholders who held RBS ordinary shares at 31 March 1982, the market value of one ordinary share held was 103p. After adjusting for the 1 March 1985 rights issue, the 1 September 1989 capitalisation issue and the bonus issue of Additional Value Shares on 12 July 2000, the adjusted 31 March 1982 base value of one ordinary share held currently is 46.1p.

For shareholders who held NatWest ordinary shares at 31 March 1982, the market value of one ordinary share held was 85.16p for shareholders who accepted the basic terms of the RBS offer. This takes account of the August 1984 and June 1986 rights issues and the June 1989 bonus issue of NatWest ordinary shares as well as the subsequent issue of Additional Value Shares.

When disposing of shares, shareholders are also entitled to indexation allowance (to April 1998 only in the case of individuals and non-corporate holders), which is calculated on the 31 March 1982 value, on the cost of subsequent purchases from the date of purchase and on the subscription for rights from the date of that payment. Further adjustments must be made where a shareholder has chosen to receive shares instead of cash for dividends. Individuals and non-corporate shareholders may also be entitled to some taper relief to reduce the amount of any chargeable gain on disposal of shares.

The information set out above is intended as a general guide only and is based on current United Kingdom legislation and Inland Revenue practice as at this date. This information deals only with the position of individual shareholders who are resident in the United Kingdom for tax purposes, who are the beneficial owners of their shares and who hold their shares as an investment. It does not deal with the position of shareholders other than individual shareholders, shareholders who are resident outside the United Kingdom for tax purposes or certain types of shareholders, such as dealers in securities.

170


 

Analyses of ordinary shareholders at 31 December 2003

 shareholdings millions %
of total
 






 
Individuals169,290 243.3 8.2 
Banks and nominee companies24,177 2,472.1 83.4 
Investment trusts146 0.8  
Insurance companies364 27.6 0.9 
Other companies2,539 190.7 6.5 
Pension trusts37 13.9 0.5 
Other corporate bodies103 14.9 0.5 






 
 196,656 2,963.3 100.0 
 




 






 
Range of shareholdings:      
10,000,001–1,000128,606 45.7 1.5 
10,001,001–10,00062,389 170.9 5.8 
10,010,001–100,0004,339 108.2 3.7 
11,100,001–1,000,000974 308.9 10.4 
11,000,001–10,000,000301 847.8 28.6 
10,000,001 and over47 1,481.8 50.0 






 
 196,656 2,963.3 100.0 
 
 

Trading market
On 22 August 1991, 26 August 1992, 13 September 1995, 16 October 1996, 26 March 1997, 12 February 1998, 8 February 1999, 30 July 1999, 30 September 1999 and 12 June 2001, the company issued the following American Depositary Shares (“ADSs”), each in connection with a public offering in the United States:

8,000,000 Series B (“Series B ADSs”) representing 8,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series B;
16,000,000 Series C (“Series C ADSs”) representing 16,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series C;
7,000,000 Series D (“Series D ADSs”) representing 7,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series D;
8,000,000 Series E (“Series E ADSs”) representing 8,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series E;
8,000,000 Series F (“Series F ADSs”) representing 8,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series F;
10,000,000 Series G (“Series G ADSs”) representing 10,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series G;
12,000,000 Series H (“Series H ADSs”) representing 12,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series H;
12,000,000 Series I (“Series I ADSs”) representing 12,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series I;
9,000,000 Series J (“Series J ADSs”) representing 9,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series J; and
16,000,000 Series K (“Series K ADSs”) representing 16,000,000 non-cumulative dollar preference shares, Series K.

Each of the respective ADSs represents the right to receive one corresponding preference share, is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (“ADR”) and is listed on the New York Stock Exchange (“NYSE”).

The ADRs evidencing the ADSs above were issued pursuant to Deposit Agreements, among the company, The Bank of New York as depository, and all holders from time to time of ADRs issued thereunder. Currently, there is no non-United States trading market for any of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares. All of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares are held by the depository, as custodian, in bearer form.

On 30 January 2003, the company redeemed the 8 million Series B and 16 million Series C, non-cumulative dollar preference shares of US$0.01 each.

At 31 December 2003, there were 264 registered shareholders of Series D ADSs, 147 registered shareholders of Series E ADSs, 160 registered shareholders of Series F ADSs, 103registered shareholders of Series G ADSs, 96 registered shareholders of Series H ADSs, 123 registered shareholders of Series I ADSs, 74 registered shareholders of Series J ADSs and 65 registered shareholders of Series K ADSs.

On 29 March 1994 and 23 June 2003, respectively, the company issued 8,000,000 Exchangeable Capital Securities, Series A and 34,000,000 Exchangeable Capital Securities, Series B (together, the “X-CAPs”), each in connection with a public offering in the United States. The X-CAPs are listed on the NYSE and trade under the symbol ‘RBSPRX’ and ’RBSPRY‘. Currently, there is no non-US market for the X-CAPs.

The ADSs, the X-CAPs and the perpetual regulatory tier one securities (“PRO’s”) are listed on the NYSE.

171



Shareholder information continued

The following table shows the high and low sales prices for each of the outstanding ADSs, X-CAPs and PROs for the periods indicated, as reported on the NYSE composite tape:

Figures in US$     Series D
ADSs
 Series E
ADSs
 Series F
ADSs
 Series G
ADSs
 Series H
ADSs
 Series I
ADSs
 Series J
ADSs
 Series K
ADSs
 Series A
X-CAPs
 Series B
X-CAPs
 
PROs
(1)
 

 
By month                        
March 2004High 28.10 29.09 29.45 25.90 25.67 26.26 27.10 29.10 26.66 25.09 125.14 
 Low 27.15 28.02 27.51 25.19 25.07 25.60 26.17 27.35 25.70 24.66 120.32 
February 2004High 27.80 28.55 28.05 25.80 25.46 26.25 26.90 27.76 26.10 24.78 121.41 
 Low 27.15 27.91 27.62 25.39 25.33 25.89 26.50 27.37 25.86 24.58 119.37 
January 2004High 27.36 28.41 28.15 25.70 25.46 26.06 26.85 27.60 26.61 24.88 122.59 
 Low 26.69 28.16 27.70 25.43 25.24 25.80 26.46 27.21 26.03 24.46 116.87 
December 2003High 27.69 29.16 28.30 25.80 25.76 26.45 27.43 27.90 27.15 24.86 120.21 
 Low 26.86 28.20 27.67 25.25 25.10 25.77 26.48 27.30 26.35 24.23 116.74 
November 2003High 27.65 29.02 28.19 25.76 25.85 26.50 27.15 27.80 27.10 24.40 119.96 
 Low 27.38 28.32 27.75 25.42 25.40 25.86 26.40 27.35 26.50 23.88 115.80 
October 2003High 27.75 29.05 28.50 25.62 25.73 26.18 27.20 27.49 26.52 23.75 118.73 
 Low 26.95 27.92 27.80 25.26 25.42 25.86 26.35 26.87 26.06 23.12 112.70 
                         
By quarter                        
2004: First quarterHigh 28.10 29.08 28.45 25.90 25.67 26.26 27.10 28.10 26.66 25.09 125.14 
 Low 26.69 27.91 27.51 25.15 25.07 25.60 26.17 27.21 25.70 24.46 116.87 
2003: Fourth quarterHigh 27.75 29.16 28.50 25.80 25.85 26.50 27.43 27.90 27.15 24.86 120.21 
 Low 26.86 27.92 27.67 25.25 25.10 25.77 26.35 26.87 26.06 23.12 112.70 
2003: Third quarterHigh 28.30 29.15 28.97 25.85 26.04 27.12 27.19 27.84 27.00 24.78 123.89 
 Low 27.24 27.30 27.20 25.23 25.28 25.65 26.30 26.05 26.00 22.25 111.06 
2003: Second quarterHigh 29.00 29.20 29.05 25.96 26.35 27.19 27.89 28.20 27.25 24.78 130.78 
 Low 27.25 27.70 27.41 25.16 25.51 26.20 26.94 27.15 26.50 24.64 113.27 
2003: First quarterHigh 28.90 29.00 28.12 26.00 26.40 27.40 28.00 27.79 27.15  119.11 
 Low 26.76 27.01 27.03 25.00 25.35 26.11 26.59 26.85 26.45  113.79 
2002: Fourth quarterHigh 27.77 28.20 28.00 25.63 26.00 26.90 27.09 27.24 27.00  116.36 
 Low 26.07 26.52 26.25 25.00 25.08 25.40 26.35 26.00 26.40  100.07 
2002: Third quarterHigh 27.69 27.80 27.65 25.73 26.05 27.08 27.50 27.30 26.98  114.08 
 Low 25.90 26.28 25.50 24.50 25.00 24.70 26.25 24.90 26.05  101.21 
2002: Second quarterHigh 27.60 27.26 26.55 25.50 25.48 26.20 27.29 26.38 26.90  106.74 
 Low 25.74 25.90 25.23 24.46 24.27 25.03 25.45 24.79 25.50  101.70 
2002: First quarterHigh 27.15 27.50 27.35 25.69 26.00 26.66 27.47 26.23 26.65  106.97 
 Low 25.85 25.53 25.15 24.46 24.49 24.50 25.65 24.80 25.35  101.05 
                         
By year                        
2003 (2)High 29.00 29.20 29.05 26.00 26.40 27.40 28.00 28.20 27.25 24.86 130.78 
 Low 26.76 27.01 27.03 25.00 25.10 25.65 26.30 26.05 26.00 22.25 111.06 
2002 (2)High 27.77 28.20 28.00 25.73 26.05 27.08 27.50 27.30 27.00  116.36 
 Low 25.74 25.53 25.15 24.46 24.27 24.50 25.45 24.79 25.35  100.07 
2001 (2)High 27.99 27.94 27.20 25.86 27.15 27.00 28.85 26.95 27.20  106.44 
 Low 25.38 25.25 24.31 22.94 22.75 24.63 24.80 22.17 25.50  96.58 
2000 (3)High 25.50 25.31 24.63 23.00 22.94 25.00 25.50  26.00   
 Low 20.63 19.81 19.13 18.88 17.63 19.63 21.13  21.56   
1999 (4)High 28.00 27.90 27.25 25.75 25.45 25.20 25.00  28.15   
 Low 24.80 24.70 24.15 21.50 21.30 23.50 25.00  24.45   

 
 Notes:
(1) Price quoted as a % of US$1,000 nominal.
(2)

Year ended 31 December.

(3)

15 months ended 31 December.

(4) Year ended 30 September.

172



Memorandum and articles of association
A summary of certain terms of the company’s Memorandum of Association (the “Memorandum”) and Articles of Association (the “Articles”) as in effect at the date of this annual report and certain relevant provisions of the Companies Act 1985, as amended (the “Act”) as relevant to the holders of any class of share is contained in the company’s Report and Accounts 2002 incorporating the Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2002, which summary is incorporated by reference into this annual report. The summary description is qualified in its entirety by reference to the terms and provisions of the Memorandum and Articles. The Memorandum and Articles are registered with the Registrar of Companies of Scotland. Holders of any class of share are encouraged to read the full Memorandum and Articles, which have been filed with the SEC.

Taxation for US Holders
The following discussion summarises certain US federal and UK tax consequences of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs, X-CAPs or PROs by a beneficial owner that is a citizen or resident of the United States or that otherwise will be subject to US federal income tax on a net income basis in respect of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares, X-CAPs, ADSs or PROs (a “US Holder”). This summary assumes that a US Holder is holding non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs evidenced by ADRs, X-CAPs or PROs, as applicable, as capital assets. This summary does not address the tax consequences to a US Holder (i) that is resident (or, in the case of an individual, ordinarily resident) in the UK for UK tax purposes or, generally, (ii) that is a corporation which alone or together with one or more associated companies, controls, directly or indirectly, 10% or more of the voting stock of the company.

The statements and practices set forth below regarding US and UK tax laws (including the US/UK double taxation convention relating to income and capital gains) which entered into force on 31 March 2003 (the “New Treaty”), the prior US/UK double tax convention relating to income and capital gains (the “Prior Treaty”) and the US/UK double taxation convention relating to estate and gift taxes (the “Estate Tax Treaty”) are based (i) on those laws and practices as in force and as applied in practice on the date of this Report and (ii) in part, on representations of the depository, and the assumption that each obligation in the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms. The US Treasury has expressed concerns that parties to whom ADRs are pre-released may be taking actions that are inconsistent with the claiming, by US Holders of ADRs, of foreign tax credits for US federal income tax purposes. Accordingly, the analysis of the creditability of UK taxes described below could be affected by future actions that may be taken by the US Treasury. This summary is not exhaustive of all possible tax considerations and holders are advised to satisfy themselves as to the overall tax consequences, including specifically the consequences under US federal, state, local and other laws, and possible changes in taxation law, of the acquisition, ownership and disposition of non-cumulative dollar preference shares, ADSs evidenced by ADRs, X-CAPs or PROs by consulting their own tax advisers.

References below to “the Treaty” are references to either the Prior Treaty or the New Treaty as applicable.

For the purposes of the New Treaty and the Estate Tax Treaty and for purposes of the US Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the “Code”), US Holders of ADRs will be treated as owners of the non-cumulative dollar preference shares underlying such ADRs.

Preference shares or ADSs evidenced by ADRs Taxation of dividends
The company is not required to withhold tax at source from dividend payments it makes or from any amount (including any amounts in respect of accrued dividends) distributed by the company.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends to noncorporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Noncorporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

The New Treaty applies to dividend payments after 1 May 2003. If a US Holder would have been entitled to greater benefits under the Prior Treaty, that US Holder may elect to continue to apply the Prior Treaty until 1 May 2004.

New Treaty
Because payments of dividends by the company to non-UK investors are not subject to UK withholding tax, it is not necessary to apply the New Treaty in order to receive a reduced rate of withholding. Since there is no UK withholding tax on payments of dividends to US Holders, US Holders will not be entitled to a foreign tax credit for foreign taxes paid as a result of the payment of dividends by the company.

Prior Treaty – effect of UK tax credit
An individual shareholder who is resident in the UK for UK tax purposes and who receives a dividend from the company is entitled to claim a tax credit in the UK against its income tax liability attributable to the dividend. Although a US Holder that receives a dividend from the company will not be entitled to this UK tax credit, under the Prior Treaty, certain US Holders may treat an amount equal to this credit (the “Tax Credit Amount”) as a tax paid to the UK taxing authorities, for which such US Holder may claim a US foreign tax credit. A US Holder that makes that election described above must include the Tax Credit Amount in its income and will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to a credit against its US federal income tax liability equal to the Tax Credit Amount.

For foreign tax credit purposes, dividends paid by the company with respect to the non-cumulative dollar preference shares (and any Tax Credit Amount Included) will generally constitute ‘passive income’ or, in the case of certain US Holders, ‘financial services income’.

173



Shareholder information continued

Taxation for US Holders (continued)
Taxation of capital gains
A US Holder that is not resident (or, in the case of an individual, ordinarily resident) in the UK will not normally be liable for UK tax on capital gains realised on the disposition of such holder’s non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR unless at the time of the disposal, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade, in the UK through a permanent establishment or, in the case of any other US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency and such non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR is or has been used, held or acquired by or for the purposes of such trade (or profession or vocation), permanent establishment, branch or agency. Special rules apply to individuals who are temporarily not resident or ordinarily resident in the UK.

An exchange by a US Holder of non-cumulative dollar preference shares or ADRs for other shares in the company will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on capital gains even if such US Holder would be subject to tax on a disposal of such holder’s non-cumulative dollar preference shares or ADRs.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS representing preference shares, generally recognise capital gains or losses for US federal income tax purposes (assuming in the case of a redemption, that such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company) in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding in the case of a redemption any amount treated as a dividend for US federal income tax purposes) and the US Holder’s tax basis in the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADS.

A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on a gain recognised on the disposal of the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

Estate and gift tax
A non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR held by an individual, whose domicile is determined to be the United States for purposes of the Estate Tax Treaty and who is not a national of the UK, will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on the individual’s death or on a lifetime transfer of the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR, except in certain cases where the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR (i) is comprised in a settlement (unless, at the time of the settlement, the settlor was domiciled in the United States and was not a national of the UK); (ii) is part of the business property of a UK permanent establishment of an enterprise; or (iii) pertains to a UK fixed base of an individual used for the performance of independent personal services. The Estate Tax Treaty generally provides a credit against US federal tax liability for the amount of any tax paid in the UK in a case where the non-cumulative dollar preference share or ADR is subject both to UK inheritance tax and to US federal estate or gift tax.

UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax (“SDRT”)
The following is a summary of the UK stamp duty and SDRT consequences of transferring an ADR in registered form (otherwise than to the custodian on cancellation of the ADS) or of transferring a non-cumulative dollar preference share.

A transfer of a registered ADR executed and retained in the US will not give rise to stamp duty and an agreement to transfer a registered ADR will not give rise to SDRT.

Stamp duty or SDRT will normally be payable on or in respect of transfers of non-cumulative dollar preference shares and accordingly any holder who acquires or intends to acquire non-cumulative dollar preference shares is advised to consult his own tax advisers in relation to stamp duty and SDRT.

X-CAPs
United States

Because the X-CAPs have no stated maturity, can be exchanged for preference shares or ADSs at the option of the company and would be treated as if they were preference shares in a winding-up of the company, and because the company may elect not to make payments on the X-CAPs, the X-CAPs will be treated as equity for US federal income tax purposes.

Payments (including any UK tax withheld there from, as to which see below) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction allowed to corporations. For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, payments will generally constitute ‘passive income’, or in the case of certain US Holders, ‘financial services income’.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends to noncorporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Noncorporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of X-CAPs, generally recognise a capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised and the US Holder’s tax basis in the X-CAPs (assuming, in the case of a redemption, that such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company). A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on a gain recognised on the disposal of the X-CAPs will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

Gain or loss will not be recognised by a US Holder upon the exchange of X-CAPs for preference shares or ADSs pursuant to the company’s exercise of its exchange right. A US Holder’s basis in the preference shares or ADSs received in exchange

174



for its X-CAPs will be the same as the US Holder’s basis in the X-CAPs at the time of the exchange and the US Holder’s holding period for the preference shares or ADSs received in the exchange will include the holding period of the X-CAPs exchanged.

United Kingdom
Taxation of payments of interest
Payments on the X-CAPs will constitute interest rather than dividends for UK withholding tax purposes. However, the X-CAPs will constitute “quoted eurobonds within the meaning of section 349 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 and therefore payments of interest will not be subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK taxation as long as X-CAPs are and remain at all times listed on the New York Stock Exchange or some other ‘recognised stock exchange’ within the meaning of section 841 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. So long as the X-CAPs are so listed, withholding will not be required whether the X-CAPs are in bearer or registered form. In all other cases an amount must be withheld on account of UK income tax at the lower rate (currently 20%) subject to any direction to the contrary by the Inland Revenue under the Treaty and except that the withholding obligation is disapplied in respect of payments to persons who the company reasonably believes are within the charge to corporation tax or fall within various categories enjoying a special tax status (including charities and pension funds), or are partnerships consisting of such persons (unless the Inland Revenue directs otherwise).

If interest were paid under deduction of UK income tax (e.g. if the X-CAPs lost their listing), US Holders may be able to claim a refund of the tax deducted under the Treaty.

Any paying agent or other person through whom interest is paid to, or by whom interest is received on behalf of, an individual, may be required to provide information in relation to the payment and the individual concerned to the UK Inland Revenue. The Inland Revenue may communicate this information to the tax authorities of other jurisdictions.

The UK Inland Revenue confirmed at around the time of issue of the X-CAPs that interest payments should not be treated as distributions for UK tax purposes (i) by reason of the fact that interest may be deferred under the terms of issue or (ii) by reason of the undated nature of the X-CAPs, provided that at the time an interest payment is made, the X-CAPs are not held by a company which is ‘associated’ with the company or by a ‘funded company’. A company will be associated with the company if, broadly speaking, it is in the same group as the company. A company will be a ‘funded company’ for these purposes if there are arrangements involving that company being put in funds (directly or indirectly) by the company, or an entity associated with the company. In this respect, the Inland Revenue has confirmed that a company holding an interest in X-CAPs which incidentally has banking facilities with any company associated with the company will not be a ‘funded company’ by virtue of such facilities.

Interest on the X-CAPs constitutes UK source income for tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding.

However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a US Holder unless, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment or in the case of other US Holders, such persons carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency in connection with which the interest is received or to which the X-CAPs are attributable. There are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agent (such as some brokers and investment managers).

EU Directive on taxation of savings income
The European Union has adopted a new directive regarding the taxation of savings income. Subject to a number of important conditions being met, Member States of the European Union will be required from a date not earlier than 1 January 2005 to provide to the tax authorities of another Member State details of payments of interest or other similar income paid by a person within its jurisdiction to an individual resident in that other Member State, except that Belgium, Luxembourg and Austria will instead operate a withholding system for a transitional period in relation to such payments unless during such period they elect otherwise.

Disposal (including redemption)
A disposal (including redemption) of X-CAPs by a US Holder, who is an individual or other non corporation tax payer, will not give rise to any liability to UK taxation on capital gains unless the US Holder carries on a trade (which for this purpose includes a profession or vocation) in the UK through a branch or agency and the X-CAPs are, or have been, held or acquired for the purposes of that trade, branch or agency. The exchange by such a US Holder of X-CAPs for ADRs pursuant to the company’s exercise of its exchange right will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on capital gains even if such US Holder would be subject to tax on a disposal of such Holder’s X-CAPs in accordance with the tax treatment referred to in the preceding paragraph.

A transfer of X-CAPs by a US Holder will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on accrued but unpaid interest payments, unless the US Holder is an individual or other non corporation tax payer and at any time in the relevant year of assessment or accounting period carries on a trade in the UK through a branch or agency to which the X-CAPs are attributable.

Annual tax charges
Corporate holders of X-CAPs may be subject to annual UK tax charges (or relief) by reference to fluctuations in exchange rates and in respect of profits, gains and losses arising from the X-CAPs, in place of the tax treatment referred to in the two preceding paragraphs but only if such corporate US Holders carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK permanent establishment to which the X-CAPs are attributable.

175



Shareholder information continued

Taxation for US Holders (continued)
Inheritance tax
X-CAPs in bearer form physically held outside the UK should not be subject to UK inheritance tax in respect of a lifetime transfer by, or the death of, a US Holder who is neither domiciled nor deemed to be domiciled in the UK for inheritance tax purposes. However, in relation to X-CAPs held through DTC (or any other clearing system), the position is not free from doubt and the Inland Revenue are known to consider that the situs of securities held in this manner is not necessarily determined by the place in which the securities are physically held. If X-CAPs in bearer form are or become situated in the UK, or if X-CAPs are held in registered form, there may be a charge to UK inheritance tax as a result of a lifetime transfer at less than fair market value by, or on the death of, such a US Holder. However, exemption from, or a reduction of, any such UK tax liability may be available under the Estate Tax Treaty in the same manner as for non-cumulative dollar preference shares. US Holders should consult their professional adviser in relation to such potential liability.

Stamp duty and SDRT
No UK stamp duty is payable on the transfer by delivery or redemption of bearer X-CAPs, whether in definitive form or in the form of one or more global X-CAPs. No SDRT is payable on any agreement to transfer bearer X-CAPs provided that the agreement is not made in contemplation of, or as part of an arrangement for, a takeover of the company.

No UK stamp duty will be payable in respect of any instrument of transfer of depositary interests representing X-CAPs, provided that any instrument relating to such a transfer is not executed in the UK, and remains at all times outside the UK. Depositary interests representing X-CAPs will not be “chargeable securities” for SDRT purposes and consequently a transfer of such depositary interests will not be subject to SDRT. Although the position is not clear, the transfer on the sale of X-CAPs in registered form may attract ad valorem UK stamp duty or (if an unconditional agreement to transfer X-CAPs is not completed by a duly stamped transfer) UK SDRT, generally, at the rate of 0.5% of the consideration paid, which, in the case of stamp duty, will be rounded up to £5 or multiples thereof. The transfer of X-CAPs in registered form (i) to, or to a nominee, or agent for, a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts or (ii) to, or to a nominee for, a person whose business is or includes the provision of clearance services, may give rise to a liability to UK stamp duty or (to the extent that UK stamp duty is not paid on an instrument of transfer) UK SDRT, generally, at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs transferred, which, in the case of stamp duty, will be rounded up to £5 or multiples thereof. Such a transfer of X-CAPs in bearer form may give rise to a charge to UK SDRT, generally, at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs transferred. A charge to UK SDRT may also arise on the issue of X-CAPs whether in registered or bearer form (i) to, or to a nominee or agent for, a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts or (ii) to, or to a nominee for, a person whose business is or includes the provision of clearance services, generally at the rate of 1.5% of the price of the X-CAPs issued.

PROs
United States
Payments of interest on a PRO (including any UK tax withheld there from) will constitute foreign source dividend income for US federal income tax purposes to the extent paid out of the current or accumulated earnings and profits of the company, as determined for US federal income tax purposes. Payments will not be eligible for the dividends received deduction allowed to corporations. For foreign tax credit limitation purposes, payments will generally constitute ‘passive income’, or in the case of certain US Holders, ‘financial services income’. A US Holder who is entitled under the Treaty to a refund of UK tax, if any, withheld on a payment will not be entitled to claim a foreign tax credit with respect to such tax. See ‘United Kingdom – Taxation of Payments on the PROs’ below for a discussion of circumstances in which UK withholding may apply.

Subject to applicable limitations that may vary depending upon a holder’s individual circumstances, dividends to noncorporate US Holders in taxable years beginning before 1 January 2009 will be taxable at a maximum tax rate of 15%. Noncorporate US Holders should consult their own tax advisers to determine whether they are subject to any special rules that limit their ability to be taxed at this favourable rate.

A US Holder will, upon the sale, exchange or redemption of a PRO, generally recognise a capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes in an amount equal to the difference between the amount realised (excluding any amount in respect of mandatory interest and any Missed Payments which are to be satisfied on a Missed Payment Satisfaction Date, which would be treated as ordinary income) and the US Holder’s tax basis in the PRO (assuming, in the case of a redemption, that such US Holder does not own, and is not deemed to own, any ordinary shares of the company). A US Holder who is liable for both UK and US tax on a gain recognised on the disposal of PROs will generally be entitled, subject to certain limitations, to credit the UK tax against its US federal income tax liability in respect of such gain.

United Kingdom
Taxation of payments on the PROs
Payments on the PROs will constitute interest rather than dividends for UK withholding tax purposes. However, the PROs will constitute “quoted eurobonds” within the meaning of section 349 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988 and therefore payments of interest will not be subject to withholding or deduction for or on account of UK taxation as long as the PROs are and remain at all times listed on a ‘recognised stock exchange’ within the meaning of section 841 of the Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988. So long as the PROs are so listed, withholding will not be required. In all other cases an amount must be withheld on account of UK income tax at the lower rate (currently 20%) subject to any direction to the contrary by the Inland Revenue under the Treaty and except that the withholding obligation is disapplied in respect of payments to persons who the company reasonably believes are within the charge to corporation tax or fall within various categories enjoying a special tax status (including charities and pension funds), or are partnerships consisting of such persons

176



(unless the Inland Revenue directs otherwise). Where interest has been paid under deduction of UK withholding tax, US Holders may be able to recover the tax deducted under the Treaty.

If interest were paid under deduction of UK income tax (e.g. if the PROs lost their listing), US Holders may be able to claim a refund of the tax deducted under the Treaty.

Any paying agent or other person by or through whom interest is paid to, or by whom interest is received on behalf of, an individual, may be required to provide information in relation to the payment and the individual concerned to the UK Inland Revenue. The Inland Revenue may communicate this information to the tax authorities of other jurisdictions.

The UK Inland Revenue confirmed at around the time of the issue of the PROs that interest payments would not be treated as distributions for UK tax purposes (i) by reason of the fact that interest may be deferred under the terms of issue or (ii) by reason of the undated nature of the PROs, provided that at the time an interest payment is made, the PROs are not held by a company which is ‘associated’ with the company or by a ‘funded company’. A company will be associated with the company if, broadly speaking, it is part of the same group as the company. A company will be a ‘funded company’ for these purposes if there are arrangements involving that company being put in funds (directly or indirectly) by the company, or an entity associated with the company. In this respect, the Inland Revenue has confirmed that a company holding an interest in the PROs which incidentally has banking facilities with any company associated with the company will not be a ‘funded company’ by virtue of such facilities.

Interest on the PROs constitutes UK source income for tax purposes and, as such, may be subject to income tax by direct assessment even where paid without withholding. However, interest with a UK source received without deduction or withholding on account of UK tax will not be chargeable to UK tax in the hands of a US Holder unless, in the case of a corporate US Holder, such US Holder carries on a trade in the UK through a UK permanent establishment or in the case of other US Holders, such persons carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK branch or agency in connection with which the interest is received or to which the PROs are attributable. There are exemptions for interest received by certain categories of agent (such as some brokers and investment managers).

EU Directive on taxation of savings income
The European Union has adopted a new directive regarding the taxation of savings income. Subject to a number of important conditions being met, Member States of the European Union will be required from a date not earlier than 1 January 2005 to provide to the tax authorities of another Member State details of payments of interest or other similar income paid by a person within its jurisdiction to an individual resident in that other Member State, except that Belgium, Luxembourg and Austria will instead operate a withholding system for a transitional period in relation to such payments unless during such period they elect otherwise.

Disposal (including redemption)
A disposal (including redemption) of PROs by a US Holder, who is an individual or other non corporation tax payer, will not give rise to any liability to UK taxation on capital gains unless the US Holder carries on a trade (which for this purpose includes a profession or a vocation) in the UK through a branch or agency and the PROs are, or have been, held or acquired for the purposes of that trade, branch or agency.

A transfer of PROs by a US Holder will not give rise to a charge to UK tax on accrued but unpaid interest payments, unless the US Holder is an individual or other non corporation tax payer and at any time in the relevant year of assessment or accounting period carries on a trade in the UK through a branch or agency to which the PROs are attributable.

Annual tax charges
Corporate holders of PROs may be subject to annual UK tax charges (or relief) by reference to fluctuations in exchange rates and in respect of profits, gains and losses arising from the PROs, in place of the tax treatment referred to in the two preceding paragraphs but only if such corporate US Holders carry on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK through a UK permanent establishment to which the PROs are attributable.

Inheritance tax
In relation to PROs held through DTC (or any other clearing system), the UK inheritance tax position is not free from doubt in respect of a lifetime transfer, or death of, a US Holder who is not domiciled nor deemed to be domiciled in the UK for inheritance tax purposes; the UK Inland Revenue are known to consider that the situs of securities held in this manner is not necessarily determined by the place where the securities are registered. In appropriate circumstances, there may be a charge to UK inheritance tax as a result of a lifetime transfer at less than fair market value by, or on the death of, such a US Holder. However, exemption from, or a reduction of, any such UK tax liability may be available under the Estate Tax Treaty. US Holders should consult their professional advisers in relation to such potential liability.

Stamp duty and SDRT
No stamp duty, SDRT or similar tax is imposed in the UK on the issue, transfer or redemption of the PROs.

Exchange controls
The company has been advised that there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would prevent the remittance of dividends or other payments to non-UK resident holders of the company’s non-cumulative dollar preference shares.

There are no restrictions under the articles of association of the company or under UK law, as currently in effect, which limit the right of non-UK resident owners to hold or, when entitled to vote, freely to vote the company’s non-cumulative dollar preference shares.

177



Shareholder information continued

Documents on display
Documents concerning the company may be inspected at 36 St Andrew Square, Edinburgh, EH2 2YB (telephone 0131 556 8555).

In addition, we file reports and other information with the SEC. You can read and copy these reports and other information at the SEC’s Public Reference Room at 450 Fifth Street, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20549. You can call the SEC at 1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the Public Reference Room or at the offices of The New York Stock Exchange, on which certain of our securities are listed, at 20 Broad Street, New York, New York 10005. The SEC also maintains a website at www.sec.gov which contains in electronic form each of the reports and other information that we have filed electronically with the SEC.

Important addresses
Shareholder enquiries
Registrar

Computershare Investor Services PLC
PO Box 82
The Pavilions
Bridgwater Road
Bristol BS99 7NH

Telephone: 0870 702 0135
Facsimile: 0870 703 6009

Group Secretariat
The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
42 St Andrew Square
Edinburgh EH2 2YE

Telephone: 0131 523 2471
Facsimile: 0131 557 6140

Registered office
36 St Andrew Square
Edinburgh EH2 2YB
Telephone: 0131 556 8555

Website
www.rbs.co.uk

Principal offices

The company

42 St Andrew Square
Edinburgh EH2 2YE

The Royal Bank of Scotland plc
42 St Andrew Square Edinburgh EH2 2YE
280 Bishopsgate London EC2M 4RB

National Westminster Bank Plc
135 Bishopsgate London EC2M 3UR

Citizens
Citizens Financial Group, Inc.
One Citizens Plaza Providence Rhode Island 02903 USA

Ulster Bank
11-16 Donegall Square East Belfast BT1 5UB
George’s Quay Dublin 2

RBS Insurance
Direct Line House 3 Edridge Road Croydon Surrey CR9 1AG
Churchill Court West Moreland Road Bromley BR1 1DP

RBS Greenwich Capital
600 Steamboat Road
Greenwich Connecticut 06830 USA

Coutts Group
440 Strand London WC2R 0QS

The Royal Bank of Scotland International Limited
Royal Bank House 71 Bath Street
St Helier Jersey Channel Islands JE4 8PJ

NatWest Offshore
23/25 Broad Street
St Helier Jersey Channel Islands JE4 8QG

 

The registered office of the company is 36 St Andrew Square
Edinburgh EH2 2YB (telephone 0131 556 8555).

The principal place of business of the company is
42 St Andrew Square, Edinburgh EH2 2YE
(telephone 0131 556 8555).

178


SEC Form 20-F cross reference guide 
    
ItemItem CaptionPages
    
PART I   
1Identity of Directors, Senior Management and AdvisersNot applicable
    
2Offer Statistics and Expected TimetableNot applicable
    
3Key Information 
  Selected financial data150 - 153, 161
  Capitalisation and indebtednessNot applicable
  Reasons for the offer and use of proceedsNot applicable
  Risk factors6
    
4Information on the Company 
  History and development of the Company4 - 6, 64, 178
  Business overview4 - 6, 164 - 168
  Organisational structure4, 178
  Property, plant and equipment168
    
5Operating and Financial Review and Prospects 
  Operating results11 - 41
  Liquidity and capital resources40 - 41, 50 - 53, 162 - 163
  Research and development, patents, licences etcNot applicable
  Trend information7, 161
  Off balance sheet arrangements162-163
  Contractual obligations163
    
6Directors, Senior Management and Employees 
  Directors and senior management62 - 63
  Compensation72 - 81
  Board practices68 - 71
  Employees37, 66 - 67
  Share ownership66, 79, 82
    
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions 
  Major shareholders65, 168
  Related party transactions166
  Interests of experts and counselNot applicable
    
8 Financial Information 
  Consolidated statements and other financial information86 - 148
  Significant changes148

179


ItemItem CaptionPages
    
9The Offer and Listing 
  Offer and listing details171 - 172
  Plan of distributionNot applicable
  Markets171 - 172
  Selling shareholdersNot applicable
  DilutionNot applicable
  Expenses of the issueNot applicable
   
10Additional Information 
  Share capitalNot applicable
  Memorandum and articles of association173
  Material contracts168
  Exchange controls177
  Taxation173 - 177
  Dividends and paying agentsNot applicable
  Statement of expertsNot applicable
  Documents on display178
  Subsidiary informationNot applicable
   
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk42 - 59,
   122 - 126,
   154 - 160
12Description of Securities other than Equity SecuritiesNot applicable
    
PART II   
13Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable
   
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of ProceedsNot applicable
   
15Controls and Procedures.68 - 71
   
16[Reserved] 
    
16AAAudit Committee financial expert69
 BCode of ethics67
 CPrincipal Accountant Fees and services99
 DExemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit CommitteeNot applicable
    
PART III   
17Financial StatementsNot applicable
    
18Financial Statements86 - 148
   
19Exhibit Index181
 Signature182

180


 

Exhibit Index
   
Exhibit
Number
 Description
   
1.1*Memorandum and Articles of Association of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
   
4.1*Service contract for Fred Goodwin
   
4.2 Service contract for Iain Robertson
   
4.3*Service contract for Norman McLuskie
   
4.3.1 Variation agreement to service contract for Norman McLuskie
   
4.4*Service contract for Fred Watt
   
4.5*Service contract for Gordon Pell
   
4.5.1**Variation agreement to service contract for Gordon Pell
   
4.6 Service contract for Lawrence Fish
   
7.1 Explanation of ratio calculations
   
8.1 Principal subsidiaries of The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
   
12.1 CEO certification required by Rule 13a-14(a)
   
12.2 CFO certification required by Rule 13a-14(a)
   
13.1 Certification required by Rule 13a-14(b)
   
14.1 Independent auditors’ consent

*Previously filed and incorporated by reference to Exhibits 1.1, 4.1 and 4.3 through 4.5 to the Group's Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2000 (File No. 1-10306).

**Previously filed and incorporated by reference to Exhibit 4.5.1 to the Group's Annual Report on Form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2002 (File No. 1-10306).

181

Signature

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

The Royal Bank of Scotland Group plc
Registrant

/s/  Fred Watt             
Frederick Inglis Watt
Group Finance Director

26 April 2004

182